JP5446701B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-7465 A

However, there is a risk that the amount of image data related to display effects will increase extremely, and the storage capacity of the image data memory will increase extremely.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying display modes while suppressing an increase in the capacity of image data. To do.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1
Display means having a display screen;
Display storage means for storing image data in advance;
Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data , and updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing;
In gaming machines equipped with
Includes a display effect to be performed over the presentation period of the update timing content of the multiple as the display mode,
In the display effect, the first specific image is displayed at the first update timing in the effect period, and the second specification is performed at the second update timing after a specific period of a plurality of update timings has elapsed from that timing. It includes a display mode that displays images,
The storage means for display includes, as specific image data used for displaying an image corresponding to the display effect, first specific image data corresponding to the first specific image and second corresponding to the second specific image. Including specific image data, specific image data for a plurality of update timings corresponding to the display effects is stored,
The display control means is for displaying an image on the display screen based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and setting the image data in the setting storage means The image data is set in a state in which parameter information including reflection value information that determines the degree to which the color information of the image data is reflected on the display screen is applied;
When the display control unit displays an image corresponding to the display effect, both the first specific image data and the second specific image data in the specific period are set as setting targets in the setting storage unit. By adjusting the reflection value information of each specific image data in a stepwise manner, the first specific image can be displayed from a state in which an intermediate image relatively reflecting the color of the first specific image is displayed rather than the second specific image. Transition to a state in which an intermediate image reflecting the color of the second specific image is displayed rather than an image, and at the time of the transition, specific image data for the plurality of update timings is predetermined in the setting storage unit. Are set in order,
The update interval of the specific image data from the time when the specific image data for one update timing is set to the time when the specific image data for the next update timing is set is set to be different according to the contents of the display effect. It is characterized by being.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to diversify display modes while suppressing an increase in the capacity of image data.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(j) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery determination. The block diagram for demonstrating the hardware constitutions of a memory module. The flowchart which shows the data transfer process performed with a controller. The timing chart which shows the mode of data transfer. The flowchart which shows the main process performed with display CPU. The flowchart which shows the initial setting process performed with display CPU. The flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed with display CPU. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list. The flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane used as calculation object in display CPU. The flowchart which shows the task process performed with display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that each individual image becomes a control object. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating scroll background data. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect | action by having set the overlap area | region. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the scroll background performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the division | segmentation part data performed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating background data for small unit groups. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the displacement background performed with display CPU. (A)-(e) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the addition process of an effect image. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the 1st effect presentation performed with display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for the 1st effect production performed by VDP. (A) The flowchart which shows 1st effect addition processing, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of 1st effect addition processing. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing partial addition, (b) The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the 2nd effect presentation performed with display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for the 2nd effect production performed by VDP. (A) The flowchart which shows 2nd effect addition processing, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of 2nd effect addition processing. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the multiple effect effects performed with display CPU. (A) The flowchart which shows the setting process for multiple effects production performed by VDP, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the area for synthetic data. (A)-(g) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (alpha) data. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for symbols performed by display CPU. (A) The flowchart which shows the setting process of the symbol sprite data performed by VDP, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a part display of a symbol is performed. (A)-(h) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st another form. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating 2nd another form, (b) The flowchart which shows the setting process of the symbol sprite data performed by VDP. (A) The flowchart which shows the character transition process performed by VDP, (b)-(f) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that character transition display is performed. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a wipe switching effect. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the wipe switching effect performed with display CPU. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing list | wrist produced when a wipe switching effect is performed. The flowchart which shows the setting process for the wipe switching effect performed by VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a wipe switching effect. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sprite for smooth movement, (b), (c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sprite data for displaying the sprite for smooth movement. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for smooth movement performed with display CPU. (A) The flowchart which shows the setting process for smooth movement performed by VDP, (b) The explanatory view for demonstrating a mode that the setting process for smooth movement is performed. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the resolution adjustment by a scaler. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for zoom-in effects performed with display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for zoom-in effects performed by VDP. The flowchart which shows the process for the output performed in a display circuit. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of a zoom-in effect. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of moving image data. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content by moving image data. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the moving images performed by display CPU. (A) The flowchart which shows the decoding process by a moving image decoder, (b) The flowchart which shows the setting process for moving images performed by VDP. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for transmission effects. The flowchart which shows the setting process for permeation | transmission effects. (A)-(e) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of a transmission effect. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data used for an enlarged display. The flowchart which shows the symbol calculation process for an enlarged display. The flowchart which shows the symbol setting process for an enlarged display. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of an enlarged display. The flowchart which shows another form of the symbol calculation process for an enlarged display. (A)-(f) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data used for curtain production. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data table for curtain production. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for curtain production. The timing chart which shows the mode of curtain production. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. The block diagram for demonstrating the hardware constitutions of a memory module. The flowchart which shows the task process performed with display CPU. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list. The flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data is produced with execution of a drawing process. The flowchart which shows the hidden surface process using the Z buffer performed by VDP. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for masks performed with display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of a 1st mask display. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of a 2nd mask display. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for masks performed with display CPU. The flowchart which shows the operation generation command corresponding | compatible process performed with display CPU. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the display mode background performed with display CPU. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for symbols performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for backgrounds performed by VDP. The flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for backgrounds performed by VDP. The timing chart which shows the timing at which the separate preservation | save data for 1st display modes and the separate preservation | save data for 2nd display modes are produced. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a connection object. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the connection object performed by display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for the connection object effect performed in VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a connection object effect. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic process for background performed by the display CPU in 4th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of the main control unit in a 1st process structure. The flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of the main controller in a 1st process structure. The flowchart which shows the game times control process performed in MPU of the main control unit in a 1st process structure. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU of the main control apparatus in a 1st process structure. The flowchart which shows the main process performed in MPU of the main controller in a 2nd process structure. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of the main controller in a 2nd process structure.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward by using one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display unit 33, an accessory display unit 34, and the like. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 20, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. The game board 20 is provided with a large number of nails 28 and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 27, the game ball enters the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and the electric operating member 24a is in the open state (supported state or guide state). It is possible to win 24.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a large winning opening 22a that leads to the back side of the game board 20, and an open / close door 22b that opens and closes the large winning opening 22a. The open / close door 22b is normally in a closed state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As a release mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display section 33 and the accessory display section 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the main display unit 33, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 23 and the winning to the lower working port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display section 33 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 33 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the main display unit 33 is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 33, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  The accessory display unit 34 displays a variation of the picture triggered by a winning to the through gate 25, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 25 as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 25 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol that is a kind of symbol. The variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The center frame 32 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is reduced due to the fall of the game ball is not caused. .

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 31, the variation display of the symbol is started based on the winning in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 33, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly. For example, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset active line.

  The display content of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) to 2 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 3B, on the display screen G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, when an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later is obtained, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  In addition, based on the winning of any one of the operating ports 23 and 24, the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 start the variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. It corresponds to one game time.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32, a first holding light emitting portion (first holding lamp portion) 35 corresponding to the main display portion 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed when the first holding light emitting unit 35 is turned on.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 32, a second reserved light emitting unit (second reserved lamp unit) 36 corresponding to the accessory display unit 34 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the second holding light emitting unit 36. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance light emission parts 35 and 36 is fulfill | performed by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 31. FIG.

  A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is constituted by the rail portion 37, and the game board 20 is fired from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. A game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating a launch handle 41 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window part 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel is made colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be made colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  A light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42. A display light-emitting part 44 is provided above the window part 42 as a part of the light-emitting means. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44, speaker units 45 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 42 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 that bulge to the near side are provided in parallel. An upper pan 46 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower pan 47 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

  In the region of the upper bulging portion 46 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating device 48 having an operation portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player so that the effect content on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is the predetermined effect content.

  A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power source and a firing control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main control device 50, a trace box for giving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving the trace of the opening is provided to the board box that accommodates the main control board 51 or the like. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is attached by peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 53 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as a structure currently mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power source and launch control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power source and launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, while generating the operating power required for each to the main control board 51, the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power source and launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 so that the MPU 52 executes processing for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

  Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, there are detection sensors provided one-to-one with respect to a winning-corresponding ball entering portion such as a general winning port 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24 and a through gate 25. It is included, and MPU 52 performs a winning determination (entrance determination) to each winning part. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a lottery occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winning to the upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24, and also executes a reach occurrence lottery and a display continuation period determination lottery for each game.

  Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

  The MPU 52 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 33, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the display device 31 changes and fluctuates, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, fluctuations in the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 A variation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 54 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when a winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 occurs. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b as a means.

  The holding ball storage area 54b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 are stored on hold. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 33, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of whether or not is made is performed.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (a success / failure information group) in a success / failure table storage area as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 53. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are: (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the bottom after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operating port 24.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device 22 can be controlled so that the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 22 is relatively high from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed 15 times (number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high frequency time) ) Or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed twice (number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Or until the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 22a reaches 6 (the number of low frequency).

  In this pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 seconds. . On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 22a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  It should be noted that the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening 22a in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time (or opening limit period) for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. If the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable winning device 22 is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode is started and ended, the value is not limited to the above value. Is optional. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or if the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 22 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the open limit number is set shorter than the open limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 22a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 22 does not occur substantially.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24, the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 24a is opened is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 24 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 23 than in the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is connected to the lower operating port 24. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (for example, on the display part 34 based on a winning to the through gate 25) secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, In this case, one condition or any combination of conditions is applied among shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 53. As such distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result (low-probability-compatible special game result), an explicit 2R probability-variable jackpot result (an explicit high-probability-matched game result or a result that suddenly changes into a probability state), and a 15R probability-variable jackpot result (high probability) Corresponding special game result) is set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (a special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the modes of the probability variation jackpot result are diversified. That is, when two types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode is the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the lowest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result that is the high-frequency support mode. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. An explicit 2R probability change jackpot result (an explicit high probability corresponding game result or a result of a latent probability change state) may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probabilistic jackpot results is achieved.

  Furthermore, as a kind of losing result in the winning / losing lottery, there may be included a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not shift to the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the completion. . In the configuration in which both the above-described non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special outlier result are set, the switching execution mode shifts to the low-frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. However, if one of the results of non-explicit 2R probability change jackpot or special outage occurs in the normal gaming state, for example, it will be It is possible to cause the player to predict which result actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. Expected effects include a symbol display device 31 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and variable display in game times where the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 22 is the high-frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is a special display result, the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 31 is started, This means a display state for making the player think that a variable display state is likely to result in a special display result.

  In the expected effect, two types are set: the reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display or the generation of a special display result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is obtained by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. A display state is displayed in which combinations of reach symbols that may be established are displayed, and in that state, symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  More specifically, the reach display related to the symbol variation display is performed in order to generate a high-frequency winning mode on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 31 as a stage before the symbol variation display is terminated. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a reach symbol combination for which a corresponding jackpot symbol combination may be established, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, a symbol variation display is displayed by the final stop symbol sequence. Is to do.

  The display contents of FIG. 3 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first terminated in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol variation display is terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective state is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the notice display, the symbol display on the display screen of the symbol display device 31 is started in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background image the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on the symbol sequence Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In the game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing is referred to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 in response to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 50 but by the sound emission controller 60.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the variation display time (display duration) in the main display unit 33 and the symbol variation display time (display duration) in the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the main display unit 33 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 31. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 54c at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power source and launch control device 57 is connected. For example, a payout ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. The payout control device 55 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power source and firing control device 57 based on the firing handle 41 being operated. Based on the launch permission command received from the main controller 50, the power supply and launch control device 57 drives the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area.

  Further, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and display control of the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52 at each game round. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 24a is to be opened is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

  The MPU 52 is connected to a variable winning drive unit that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22 and an electric combination driving unit that opens and closes the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24. . That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 24a is won, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit so that the electric combination 24a is opened and closed.

  Further, the sound emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  Here, the process executed by the MPU 52 will be briefly described.

  The MPU 52 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progress process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progress process, the normal process that is repeatedly executed in the first period and the second period that is shorter than the first period are started, and are executed by interrupting the normal process. Timer interrupt processing is set, but the specific processing configuration is arbitrary as long as the progress of the game can be controlled.

  As part of the game progress process, a hold information acquisition process, a game times control process, a game state transition process, and a demonstration display process are set. In the holding information acquisition process, when winning is detected in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 in a situation where the holding upper limit number of holding information is not stored in the holding ball storage area 54b, a lottery is performed at that time. A process of storing the combination of the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the counter buffer 54a as holding information in the holding ball storage area 54b is executed. The As described above, the hold information is stored in the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 in time series.

  In the game time control process, the data shift process of the reserved ball storage area 54b is performed on the condition that the game information is not being executed or in the open / close execution mode, and the hold information is held and stored in the hold ball storage area 54b. Is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 is shifted in order to the lower area side. In addition, when the data shift process is executed, a win / fail lottery process, a type determination process, and a game turn start process are executed.

  In the success / failure lottery process, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is determined by referring to the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 among the holding information shifted to the execution area AE and the success / failure lottery mode corresponding to the current success / failure lottery mode. judge. If it is a big win, a type determination process is further executed. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified with reference to the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE.

  In the game round start process, whether or not a reach is generated even if the jackpot is not won by referring to the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE and the reach table. Determine. In addition, in the game round start process, the variation display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type and the presence / absence of the reach is read from the ROM 53, and the read variation display time table and the variation type counter CS at the timing are read. The change display time of the current game time is determined from the numerical information. Then, in the game turn starting process, the main display unit 33 starts the display of the variation of the pattern corresponding to the determined variation display time, the variation command including information on the variation display time, A type command including information on the jackpot type is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  By the way, the variable display time is determined by reading the variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot, the type of jackpot, and the presence / absence of reach, so the change command includes information on the presence / absence of reach. It can be said that. As will be described later, since the sound emission control device 60 determines the type of reach display according to the change display time, it can be said that the change command includes information on the reach type.

  Further, in the game times control process, the process of changing display is executed during the execution of the game times, and when the change display time determined in the process for starting the change has elapsed, The change display of the picture is terminated in a state in which the stop result corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning and the type of jackpot is displayed. In addition, an end command for instructing the sound emission control device 60 to end the game times is transmitted.

  In the gaming state transition process, when the game round corresponding to the big win is completed, the transition process to the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the opening / closing process of the big winning opening 22a in the variable winning device 22 is started. Various commands for the opening / closing execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 when starting the opening / closing execution mode, during the opening / closing execution mode, and when ending the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the success / failure lottery mode transition or the support mode transition is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

  In the demonstration display process, a predetermined demonstration start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game time after the game time has ended in a state where the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress. A process for determining whether or not the process has been performed is executed. In addition, since a power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined demonstration start start period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed without newly starting a game play. A process for determining whether or not the process has been performed is executed. If it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  The demonstration display refers to a start waiting effect displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demo image, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying a displayed image. Further, in the configuration in which the demonstration display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game round may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

<Audio emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the sound emission control device 60 includes a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 63 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, a configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as a structure currently mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An effect operating device 48 and a main control device 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and various light emitting units 35, 36, 44, a speaker unit 45 and a display control device 70 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Yes.

  The MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start an effect for game times by receiving the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, and executes an effect start process for game times. In addition, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effect for the game turn, and the game turn effect end process is executed. Also, by receiving the various jackpot presentation commands transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the jackpot presentation needs to be started or advanced, and the jackpot presentation process is executed. Further, by receiving the demonstration display command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the demonstration display needs to be started, and the demonstration display processing is executed.

  Note that the MPU 62 receiving a command from the main control device 50 is not limited to a configuration for directly receiving a command from the main control device 50, and includes a configuration for receiving a command relayed to a relay board.

  In the game turn production start process, based on both the change command and the type command, the change display time grasp processing for grasping the change display time (display duration) of the corresponding game turn and the presence / absence of reach display are grasped. A reach display grasping process, a jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping presence / absence of a jackpot result, and a jackpot type grasping process for grasping a jackpot type when a jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasp results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the display effect for determining the type of display effect to be performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 in this game round. In addition to executing the grasping process, the symbol type grasping process for determining the kind of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 in this game round is executed. Then, based on the results of each of these grasping processes, a display control device includes a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designating command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. 70.

  In addition, in the game turn production start process, in addition to the above-described grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for determining whether or not to perform a notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery for the notice display is also executed. If it is determined that the notice display has been generated, a notice command including information on the type of notice display is transmitted to the display control device 70.

  Further, in the game start effect starting process, the game light display light emission table and the game turn sound table are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing results of the above processes. The display light emission table for game times defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 during the progress of the corresponding game times. In addition, an output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progress process of the corresponding game round is defined by the game round voice table.

  In the game round effect end process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game round are terminated. Further, in the game turn effect end process, an end command including information for ending the game turn effect is transmitted to the display control device 70.

  In the jackpot presentation process, based on the various commands for the jackpot presentation received, the presentation mode at the opening, at each round, between each round, and at the ending is grasped, and the jackpot presentation corresponding to the grasped result Is sent to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the jackpot effect and the sound table for the jackpot effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the jackpot effect. Is specified.

  In the demonstration display processing, the demonstration display presentation mode is grasped based on the received demonstration display command, and the demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for demonstration display and the sound table for demonstration display are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the voice output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the demonstration display. Is specified.

  The processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main controller 50 includes processing for controlling the light emission of the first hold light emitting unit 35 and the second hold light emitting unit 36 in addition to the above processing. included.

  Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the production operation device 48 is operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the production operation device 48 based on the operation of the production operation device 48 being operated. Then, the operation handling process is executed. Further, even when the operated state is released, it is recognized by the falling edge of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding process is executed.

  Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48, an effect is performed in which the image displayed on the symbol display device 31 is shifted to a different position on the two-dimensional plane. A plurality of positions, specifically, two positions are set as the shiftable positions. Correspondingly, the operation unit of the production operation device 48 is provided, for example, as a cross key or an operation lever that can be rotated in a plurality of directions so that the plurality of positions can be individually designated. An operation signal corresponding to each operation is transmitted from the device 48. In the operation handling process, an operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and an operation generation command including information that the production operation device 48 is operated and information on the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, in the operation handling process, an operation release command is transmitted to the display control device 70 when the operation of the operation unit is released. Further, in the operation handling process, in addition to the transmission of the command, the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 are defined so as to correspond to the operation of the effect operating device 48. .

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Is done. Note that the display CPU 72 receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 is not limited to a structure that directly receives a command from the sound light emission control device 60, and includes a structure that receives a command relayed to the relay board. It is.

  The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via a bus. Based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60, the display CPU 72 stores various data stored in the memory module 74 in the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75. The transfer instruction to transfer is performed. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and performs a drawing instruction for causing the symbol display device 31 to output an image signal based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described.

  The memory module 74 stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, background data, and moving images. It is a storage means for storing various image data (image information) including image data and the like in advance. The memory module 74 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for memory retention, and in detail, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed well. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Yes. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state where still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described in detail later.

  The work RAM 73 is storage means for temporarily storing the control data read and transferred from the memory module 74 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and retention, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed well. The work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74, control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance until the processing execution timing in the display CPU 72 corresponding to the control data comes. The display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  Incidentally, when the work RAM 73 is compared by reading data of the same capacity, the work RAM 73 is used that has a faster reading speed (transfer speed) than a NAND flash memory 102 described later. In other words, when the work RAM 73 is compared by reading data of the same capacity, a work RAM 73 having a shorter period of time than that of the NAND flash memory 102 is used.

  The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and holding, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. The VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 75 includes a development buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance until the execution timing of processing in the VDP 76 using the image data. The VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76.

  Incidentally, when the VRAM 75 is compared by reading data of the same capacity, a VRAM 75 whose reading speed (transfer speed) is faster than a NAND flash memory 102 described later is used. In other words, when the VRAM 75 is compared by reading data of the same capacity, a VRAM 75 whose period required for the reading is shorter than that of the NAND flash memory 102 is used. The VRAM 75 may be built in the VDP 76.

  The VDP 76 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the development buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. Yes, it is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 31b incorporated in the design display device 31 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a. Since the VDP 76 is an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 76 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a drawing-dedicated firmware.

  Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving picture decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 and an I / F 96 for the VRAM 75.

  The VDP 76 stores a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 in the register 92. When the drawing list is stored in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which all the control programs for the control part 91 to operate | move are provided with a drawing list, the memory which memorize | stored the control program previously is built in the control part 91, the content of the said control program and a drawing list, and Thus, the control unit 91 may execute a predetermined process. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

  As the processing described above, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or processing) the image data developed in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The drawing data for one frame is the data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. That means.

  Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame regions 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame region 82a and a second frame region 82b are provided. Each of the frame regions 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas (unit setting regions) corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. ing. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color method is employed, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration that can display only 256 colors in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b are provided in the frame buffer 82, drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. The creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame regions. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

  In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame region 82a or the second frame region 82b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 94. The signal is output to the symbol display device 31 via the connected output port 78. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal. The display circuit 94 is provided with a scaler 97 and an image signal output unit 98 in order to generate and output the image signal. The scaler 97 and the image signal output unit 98 will be described in detail later.

  The moving picture decoder 93 decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The contents of the process will be described in detail later.

<Specific Configuration of Memory Module 74>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 74 will be described.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram for explaining a hardware configuration of the memory module 74. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory module 74 is configured by packaging the controller 101 and the NAND flash memory 102 into one package. The NAND flash memory 102 is provided with a memory cell array. In the memory cell array, the control program area 103 storing the control program data of the display CPU 72 and the symbol display device 31 display an image. An image data area 104 storing image data to be used is provided.

  The controller 101 includes a main body side I / F 111 that transmits / receives data to / from the display CPU 72 that is the transfer instruction source and the work RAM 73 and VRAM 75 that is the data transfer destination, and a storage side I / O that transmits / receives data to / from the NAND flash memory 102. / F112, a controller CPU 113, which is a control unit that performs data control processing in the controller 101 and physical block management processing of the NAND flash memory 102, a control ROM 114, a control RAM 115, and a NAND flash based on a transfer instruction from the controller CPU 113 A transfer execution circuit 116 that reads data from the memory 102, a cache memory 117 that temporarily stores data read by the transfer execution circuit 116, and the NAND flash memory 10 And an error correction circuit 118 for performing error detection and correction of errors detected in data read from, and a.

  In general, the NAND flash memory 102 is used avoiding a block including a defect in the memory cell array. And the presence and location of this defective block differ from one solid to another. Accordingly, it is necessary to associate the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 102, and the association is executed by the controller CPU 113.

  More specifically, the control ROM 114 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) for associating a logical address with an address of each page of the physical block. The address designation command received from the display CPU 72 is temporarily stored in the address designation buffer of the control RAM 115. When an address designation command is stored in the control RAM 115, the controller CPU 113 reads the address management table from the control ROM 114 and grasps the page address of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, the transfer execution circuit 116 transfers the data so that the controller CPU 113 issues a transfer instruction to the transfer execution circuit 116 and the data at the physical address related to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. Processing is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 117 is transferred to the work RAM 73 or VRAM 75.

  Incidentally, as the control ROM 114, a memory capable of reading data by random access such as a mask ROM or a NOR flash memory is used. Further, the cache memory 117 is used that has a read speed (transfer speed) higher than that of the NAND flash memory 102 when compared by reading data of the same capacity. In other words, the cache memory 117 is used in which the period required for the read is shorter than that of the NAND flash memory 102 when compared by reading the data of the same capacity. Specifically, it has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for memory retention, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used.

  The memory module 74 is provided with a boot memory 119 that stores boot data for initial startup in the display CPU 72 in advance. As the boot memory 119, a mask ROM is used so that random access is possible. When compared with data read of the same capacity, the read memory (transfer speed) is faster than the NAND flash memory 102. It is used. In other words, as the boot memory 119, a memory having a shorter period than that of the NAND flash memory 102 when the same capacity data is read is used.

  The boot memory 119 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data read speed is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102, and may be an internal power source such as a battery. A DRAM unit or an SRAM unit including

  The storage capacity of the boot memory 119 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 102. Specifically, the storage capacity is the same, substantially the same as or similar to the storage capacity for one page in the NAND flash memory 102. The boot memory 119 stores boot data for initial startup in advance. When the display CPU 72 executes processing at the time of initial startup, data from the boot memory 119 instead of the NAND flash memory 102 is stored. Is read out. As the boot data for initial startup, an instruction code for initial setting of the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 and an instruction code for transferring data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 to the work RAM 73 and VRAM 75 are set.

  Data transfer processing executed by the controller 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The data transfer process is started when an unprocessed address designation command is stored in the control RAM 115.

  First, in step S101, it is determined whether or not the current address designation is related to access to the boot memory 119. Here, the display CPU 72 includes an initial transmission circuit so as to transmit an address designation command relating to access to the boot memory 119 to the controller 101 when supply of operating power is started. Specifically, the initial transmission circuit is configured to transmit an address designation command in which all bits are “1” via a bus that electrically connects the display CPU 72 and the memory module 74. . The address designation command in which all the bits are “1” corresponds to an access command to the boot memory 119, and the controller 101 relates to an access to the boot memory 119 when the command is received. Judge that there is.

  Note that the address designation command related to the access to the boot memory 119 does not need to have the above data configuration, and may be a command in which all bits are “0”, for example. Further, as an electrical wiring for electrically connecting the display CPU 72 and the memory module 74, a dedicated electrical wiring is provided separately from the electrical wiring for transmitting other addressing commands, and the operating power to the display CPU 72 is reduced. When the supply is started, the signal output to the dedicated electric wiring may be started. In this case, when the signal output from the dedicated electric wiring is started, the controller 101 is assumed to have received a data transfer instruction stored in the boot memory 119 and starts to transfer the data. Also good.

  If it is related to access to the boot memory 119, after executing the process of transferring the boot data in the boot memory 119 to the display CPU 72 in step S102, the data transfer process is terminated. As a result, the boot data is read in the display CPU 72.

  On the other hand, if it is not related to access to the boot memory 119 (step S101: NO), that is, if it is related to access to the NAND flash memory 102, the process proceeds to step S103. Incidentally, although details will be described later, the execution timing of the transfer instruction in this case is a timing before the timing at which the program data and image data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 are required by the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76. And transfer to the VRAM 75 is completed.

  In step S103, it is determined whether or not the address is a target address for prediction transfer. The predicted transfer target address is a physical address corresponding to a logical address for one page continuous to the logical address when a logical address for one page is designated from the display CPU 72.

  If it is not the target address for the predicted transfer (step S103: NO), in step S104, the physical address corresponding to the logical address to be specified this time is grasped using the address management table. With this process, even if the NAND flash memory 102 is likely to generate a defective block when data is written, the physical address can be associated with the logical address satisfactorily.

  In the subsequent step S105, the controller CPU 113 issues a transfer instruction to the transfer execution circuit 116 so that the data stored at the grasped physical address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. As a result, transfer of the data to the cache memory 117 is started.

  In subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. When the transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, in step S107, a data transfer instruction related to the target address of the predicted transfer is executed. As a result, the transfer execution circuit 116 starts transferring the data stored in the physical address corresponding to the logical address continuous to the logical address of the data that has been transferred immediately before, to the cache memory 117.

  In this case, the cache memory 117 has a storage capacity capable of simultaneously storing data for a plurality of pages, specifically, two pages. When the transfer execution circuit 116 transfers the data related to the target address of the predicted transfer to the cache memory 117, the transfer execution circuit 116 reads the data at the previous address that triggered the prediction and has been transferred to the cache memory 117. The data related to the target address of the predicted transfer is transferred to an area different from the area where the data is stored so as not to be erased. As a result, it is possible to prevent data being transferred from the cache memory 117 to the work RAM 73 or VRAM 75 from being erased when the data related to the target address of the predicted transfer is transferred.

  In the subsequent step S108, a process of transferring the data determined to have been transferred to the cache memory 117 in step S106 to the side of the work RAM 73 and VRAM 75 set as the transfer destination target is executed. In this case, when transmitting the address designation command, the display CPU 72 transmits the data transfer destination RAM and the information of the transfer destination address as a separate command included in the address designation command. Therefore, in step S108, the data is transferred to the designated transfer destination RAM and to the transfer destination address.

  Thereafter, in step S109, it is determined whether or not the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the transfer destination target is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. During this period, the data transfer request may not be accepted. When the data transfer to the transfer destination target is completed (step S109: YES), this data transfer process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S103 that the current address designation is related to the target address of the predicted transfer, the process proceeds to step S106 without executing the processes in steps S104 and S105. Then, when the transfer of the data related to the address designation to the cache memory 117 is completed (step S106: YES), the processing of step S107 to step S109 is executed, and this data transfer processing is terminated.

  The state of data transfer will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  8A shows a state in which data is transferred from the boot memory 119, FIG. 8A shows a state of a read request from the display CPU 72, and FIG. 8B shows a state in which the data is transferred from the boot memory 119. It is a state of data transfer. FIG. 8B shows how data in the NAND flash memory 102 is transferred, FIG. 8C shows a read request from the display CPU 72, and FIG. FIG. 8E shows a state of data transfer to the memory 117, and FIG. 8E shows a state of data transfer from the cache memory 117.

  First, a case where data is transferred from the boot memory 119 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, an address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 at the timing t1, and the controller CPU 113 recognizes reception of the address designation command at the timing t2.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the controller CPU 113 recognizes that the boot data in the boot memory 119 is designated as a read target, and data transfer from the boot memory 119 is started. In this case, the period from when the controller CPU 113 recognizes the read request from the display CPU 72 to when the data transfer is started is T1. Thereafter, the data transfer is completed at timing t4.

  Next, a case where data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, an address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 at the timing t5, and the controller CPU 113 recognizes reception of the address designation command at the timing t6.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the controller CPU 113 recognizes that the data of the NAND flash memory 102 is designated as a read target, and grasps the physical address corresponding to the designated logical address. In the transfer execution circuit 116, pages corresponding to the physical address are sequentially recognized, and data transfer to the cache memory 117 is started. In this case, by recognizing the physical address corresponding to the logical address and performing sequential recognition instead of random access, the period T2 from the timing t6 to the timing t7 is from the timing t2 to the timing t3. It is longer than the period T1.

  Thereafter, when the data transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed at the timing of t8, the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the transfer target RAM is started. In this case, the period from when the controller CPU 113 recognizes the read request from the display CPU 72 to when the data transfer to the transfer destination target RAM is started is T3, and the data transfer from the boot memory 119 is performed. It is longer than the period T1 required to start.

  Thereafter, the transfer of the data corresponding to the target address of the predicted transfer to the cache memory 117 is started at the timing t9 during the data transfer to the RAM. In this case, the controller CPU 113 only has to specify the physical address corresponding to the continuous logical address in the transfer execution circuit 116, so that the address of the defective block is interposed between the physical addresses corresponding to the continuous logical address. Even if it is, the time required for recognizing the physical address can be shortened by associating these continuities in advance as compared with the case of recognizing the physical address from the address designation command. Note that an image data group for executing a predetermined effect such as super reach display is stored across a plurality of physical blocks.

  Thereafter, the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the transfer destination target RAM is completed at the timing of t10. Then, a new address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 72. Incidentally, the NOR type flash memory is provided with an address terminal and a data input / output terminal separately, but the memory module 74 having the NAND type flash memory 102 has an address terminal, a data input / output terminal, Are not provided separately. Therefore, after data transfer from the cache memory 117 is performed, an address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 72.

  Thereafter, the transfer of the data related to the predicted transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed at the timing of t11, and the controller CPU 113 recognizes the reception of a new address designation command from the display CPU 72 at the timing of t12. Since the logical address designated by the address designation command corresponds to the logical address of the data subject to the predicted transfer, the cache memory for the data subject to the predicted transfer at the subsequent timing t13. Transfer from 117 to the transfer target RAM is started.

  In this case, the period from when the controller CPU 113 recognizes the read request from the display CPU 72 to when the data transfer is started is T4. As described above, the data related to the predicted transfer is started while the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the RAM is being performed, and the start timing is before the read request from the display CPU 72 is performed. It is the timing. Therefore, the period T4 is shorter than the period T3 required until the data transfer is started when data is read from the NAND flash memory 102 without performing the predictive transfer. Incidentally, the period T4 is shorter than the period T1 required until the data transfer from the boot memory 119 is started. However, the period T4 is not limited to this and may be longer than the period T1. Thereafter, the data transfer related to the predictive transfer is completed at the timing of t14.

  When the data transfer related to the predictive transfer is continuous, a transfer mode in which the period required for starting the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the RAM in response to the read request from the display CPU 72 is T4. Will be continuous. On the other hand, if the logical address of the data related to the predictive transfer does not match the logical address related to the read request from the display CPU 72, the period required for starting the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the RAM is T3. Data transfer is performed in the following manner.

  As described above, the NAND flash memory 102 is used as a memory for storing control program data and image data in advance, so that the capacity can be increased while reducing the manufacturing cost compared to the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Can do. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 102, it is possible to repeatedly rewrite the pachinko machine 10 at the development stage, and it is possible to reduce development costs. Recycling is also possible. In particular, the control program data and the image data are not stored in separate memories, but are stored in a single memory module 74 so that the transfer path to the display CPU 72 is made compact. Can do.

  However, the NAND flash memory 102 has a lower data transfer speed than the NOR flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, since the boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, which requires a faster reading speed than the NAND flash memory 102, supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started. If the pachinko machine 10 is reset in some cases, the display CPU 72 can quickly start the initial activation process. Therefore, compared with the configuration in which the program data for initial activation is stored in the NAND flash memory 102, the control in the display CPU 72 can be started smoothly.

  Further, data having logical addresses that are continuous with respect to the data designated as the transfer target from the display CPU 72 is used as data related to the predictive transfer, and the data for one page is transferred from the cache memory 117 to the transfer target target RAM. Data related to the predicted transfer is transferred in advance from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117 using the period. As a result, the time required for data transfer of pages with consecutive logical addresses can be shortened. The display CPU 72 reads out the program data transferred in advance to the work RAM 73 and executes the process, and the VDP 76 reads out the image data transferred in advance to the VRAM 75 and executes the process, so that each of the processes is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data transfer waiting time from occurring, and it is possible to make each process proceed smoothly.

  The NAND flash memory 102 and the boot memory 119 are packaged as a memory module 74, and data read from the memories 103 and 119 is managed by the controller CPU 113. Accordingly, the display CPU 72 may transmit an address designation command to the controller CPU 113 regardless of whether the data transfer is performed from either the NAND flash memory 102 or the boot memory 119. Thereby, simplification of the structure of the signal path | route which concerns on transmission of the said command is achieved. In addition, since the locations that receive commands from the display CPU 72 in the memory module 74 are collected in the I / F 111, the signal path configuration can be simplified from this point.

  Incidentally, the NAND flash memory 102 needs to input a write command signal to the WE terminal when reading data, but the controller 101 pulls up the HWE (HOST WRITE ENABLE) terminal to which the write command signal is input from the outside. However, the FWE (FLASH WRITE ENABLE) terminal of the controller 101 is connected to the WE terminal of the NAND flash memory 102, so that a substantial write command signal cannot be input from the outside of the controller 101. A pseudo write command signal is input to the type flash memory 102. Therefore, the data in the NAND flash memory 102 can be prevented from being illegally modified while the data can be read from the NAND flash memory 102 satisfactorily.

<Development buffer 81 of work RAM 73 and VRAM 75>
Next, the work RAM 73 and the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 to which data is transferred in advance from the memory module 74 will be described.

  First, the work RAM 73 will be described.

  In the work RAM 73, as shown in FIG. 4, while there is a possibility that the transferred data may be used even after it has been used once, specifically, power to itself is stored. There is provided a regular area 73a for storing and maintaining the supply and a change area 73b to be overwritten when another data is transferred after use.

  In the regular area 73a, program data necessary for advancing main processing, V interrupt processing, command interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is written. By providing the regular area 73a, it is possible to smoothly start the main process, the V interrupt process, the command interrupt process, and the like that are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals.

  When it is necessary to temporarily store data exceeding the storage capacity of the change area 73b, all or a part of the data in the regular area 73a is within a range that does not hinder the smooth execution of processing in the display CPU 72. It is good also as a structure erase | eliminated temporarily. In this case, the return of data to the regular area 73a needs to be performed before the start of the corresponding process.

  In the change area 73b, program data necessary to execute a subroutine that is activated as necessary in each of these processes is written. In addition, program data necessary for a subroutine to be executed next during execution of a predetermined subroutine may be transferred to the change area 73b. It is done not to erase. By providing the change area 73b as described above, data transfer can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 73 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, backup power is not supplied to the work RAM 73. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored in the work RAM 73 until then is erased or destroyed.

  Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 will be described.

  In the development buffer 81, while the situation where the transferred image data may be used even after it has been used continues, specifically, the power supply to itself is continued. During use, there are provided a regular area 81a that is stored and held, and a change area 81b that is overwritten when another image data is transferred after use.

  In the regular area 81a, background data and symbol sprite data used when the symbol display on the symbol display device 31 is started are written, and an abnormality notification image is displayed when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected. Abnormality notification data used for display is written. By providing the regular area 81a, even if a drawing instruction is suddenly given from the display CPU 72, the VDP 76 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the regular area 81a. it can.

  When it is necessary to temporarily store image data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 81b, all or one of the regular areas 81a can be used as long as smooth image display on the symbol display device 31 is not hindered. The data of the copy may be temporarily erased. In this case, the restoration of the image data to the regular area 81a needs to be performed before the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

  Production sprite data such as production characters and moving image data are written in the change area 81b. In addition, the image data necessary for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 81b while the predetermined effect is being executed, but the transfer erases the image data required for the effect being executed. It is done so as not to. By providing the change area 81b as described above, data transfer can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the development buffer 81 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 75. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored in the VRAM 75 until then is erased or destroyed.

<Basic Processing in Display CPU 72>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 72 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, a description will be given of a main process that is started when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main process.

  In the main process, an initial setting process is first executed in step S201. In the initial setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10, first, a boot data transfer request is made to the memory module 74 in step S301. Here, as described above, this processing is performed by the operation of the initial transmission circuit of the display CPU 72, but this is shown in the processing flow for convenience of explanation. Note that an address indicating the boot memory 119 is written in an area referred to first in the address map of the display CPU 72, and an address designation command may be transmitted to the memory module 74 based on the information.

  Thereafter, in step S302, it is determined whether or not the reading of the boot data is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the reading is completed. When the reading of the boot data is completed, an initialization process is executed in step S303. As the initialization process, initialization of the register of the display CPU 72, the register 92 of the VDP 76, the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S304, transfer of the latter half data for the initial setting is requested. In other words, the initial setting program data is composed of the initial start data constituting the first half part thereof and the latter half part data subsequent thereto, and the initial start data is set in the boot data. Yes. In the initial start-up data, a data read command for the latter half is set. Thus, by storing only the data from the beginning to the middle of the initial setting program data as boot data in the boot memory 119 in advance, the capacity of data to be stored in the boot memory 119 can be suppressed. Accordingly, the storage capacity of the boot memory 119 can be suppressed.

  Incidentally, if the entire initial setting program data is regarded as boot data, the data stored in advance in the boot memory 119 can be regarded as initial program data, and the latter half of the data is referred to as second program data. Can be considered.

  In the subsequent step S305, an initial adjustment process of the scaler 97 is executed. In the initial adjustment process, when an image signal is output based on the drawing data created in each frame area 82a, 82b of the VRAM 75, the image signal is output in correspondence with the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. As described above, a resolution initial adjustment command (resolution initial adjustment information) is transmitted to the VDP 76. The initial adjustment value is adjusted in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the boot data as a resolution initial adjustment command.

  By transmitting a resolution initial adjustment command to the VDP 76, numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the resolution adjustment area of the scaler 97 in the register 92 of the VDP 76. Thus, when an image signal is output from the VDP 76 to the symbol display device 31, the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output in a state adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

  In subsequent step S306, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the latter half of the data to the change area 73b of the work RAM 73 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the data transfer instruction timing and data capacity of the latter half are set so that the standby time in step S306 is as short as possible or not substantially generated. If the transfer of the latter half of the data is completed, the process proceeds to step S307.

  Incidentally, step S301 is executed on the circuit of the display CPU 72 as described above, and the processing from step S302 to step S306 is executed based on the boot data stored in the boot memory 119 in advance, and the processing from step S307 to step S314 is performed. Is executed based on the latter half of the data.

  In step S307, the memory module 74 is requested to transfer initial image data. Here, the initial image data is the minimum image data for displaying an image related to the system test on the symbol display device 31, and the variation display of symbols is performed on the display screen G before a predetermined background image. Therefore, the data capacity is set smaller than the image data necessary for displaying the image and the image data necessary for displaying the demo image.

  The image relating to the system test refers to an image for confirming that the symbol display device 31 is normal in a manufacturing factory or a game hall of the pachinko machine 10, for example, a red color image on the entire display screen G. Is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an image displayed by dividing a plurality of colors, or an image displaying the manufacturer name and model name of the pachinko machine 10. The memory module 74 receives the address designation command corresponding to the initial image data from the display CPU 72, thereby starting the transfer of the initial image data to the change area 81 b in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

  In the subsequent step S308, a ground color initial adjustment process is executed. In the initial adjustment process, a background color initial adjustment command (ground color initial adjustment) is applied to the VDP so that numerical information set as initial values in the unit areas of the frame regions 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 becomes initial numerical information. Information). This initial numerical information is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the latter half of the data as a ground color initial adjustment command.

  When the VDP 76 transmits a ground color initial adjustment command, initial numerical value information is stored in the ground color adjustment area in the register 92 of the VDP 76. As a result, when the drawing data is created, the background color is displayed in the dots corresponding to the unit areas that have not been updated from the initial numerical information. In the present pachinko machine 10, black is set as the initial ground color, but it is not limited to this and is optional.

  In subsequent step S309, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the initial image data to the VRAM 75 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the initial image data transfer instruction timing and the data capacity are set so that the standby time in step S309 is as short as possible or does not substantially occur. If the transfer of the initial image data is completed, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, a transfer request for the regular program data is made to the memory module 74. As described above, the regular program data includes program data necessary for proceeding with the processing after step S201 in the main processing and various interrupt processing. In the memory module 74, the address designation command corresponding to the regular program data is received from the display CPU 72, whereby the regular program data transfer to the regular area 73a of the work RAM 73 is started.

  In subsequent step S311, task processing for the initial image is executed. In the task processing, processing for grasping various parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 76 to display the initial image is executed. Specifically, as various parameters, address information of the area where the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 75, information on the target frame regions 82a and 82b for which drawing data should be created using the initial image data, and the target frame region for creation 82a and 82b include coordinate information when writing initial image data, scale information when writing the initial image data, and uniform α value (translucent value) information when writing the initial image data. Yes.

  In the following step S312, a drawing list is created as drawing instruction information including information corresponding to the processing result of the task processing in step S311 and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In the VDP 76, drawing data corresponding to the initial image is created in the creation target frame regions 82a and 82b according to the drawing list, and an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. Thereby, the display of the initial image is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. The display of the initial image is continued until a drawing list is newly transmitted from the display CPU 72 and the image is updated by the VDP 76. By displaying the initial image in this way, the display of the image on the display screen G is started at an earlier timing than the configuration in which no image is displayed on the display screen G until the display of the game image is started. can do.

  In subsequent step S313, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the regular program data to the work RAM 73 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the transfer instruction timing and data capacity of the regular program data are set so that the standby time in step S313 is as short as possible or not substantially generated. When the transfer of the regular program data is completed, the process proceeds to step S314.

  In step S314, a request for transfer of the regular image data is made to the memory module 74. Thereafter, the initial setting process is terminated. As described above, the regular image data includes background data and symbol sprite data used when the symbol display device 31 starts symbol variation display. In addition, abnormality notification data used when an abnormality notification image is displayed when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected is included. The memory module 74 receives the address designation command corresponding to the regular image data from the display CPU 72, thereby starting the transfer of the regular image data to the regular area 81 a of the development buffer 81.

  Here, when the main process is activated in the display CPU 72 by executing the initial setting process as described above, (1) program data for startup including boot data and data in the latter half, 2) Initial image data, (3) regular program data, and (4) regular image data are transferred from the memory module 74. In this case, data is transferred in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4). Further, the processing of step S302, step S306, step S309, and step S313 is executed so that the transfer timing of each data does not overlap. Therefore, the transfer of each data can be performed satisfactorily.

  Returning to the description of the main process (FIG. 9), after the initial setting process is executed in step S201, various interrupts are permitted in step S202. This allows the display CPU 72 to execute command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. Thereafter, in the main process, the process of step S202 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing will be described.

  The command interrupt process is a process that is started with the highest priority when a strobe signal is received from the sound emission control device 60, whatever the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received at the input port 77 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the change area 73b of the work RAM 73, and a flag indicating that a new command has been received is displayed in the corresponding area. set. Thereafter, the command interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the process before starting the command interrupt process.

  The process for confirming the command is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, instead of confirming whether or not a strobe signal has been received, the input port 77 is periodically monitored, and the command is received as a monitoring result. It is good also as a structure which transfers to a command buffer, when confirming.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, 20 msec.

  When the image signal for one frame is output to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display screen G, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output for the arranged dots, and image signals are output from the left to the right dots in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner of the display screen G. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing when the image signal is output with respect to the last dot, so that the display CPU 72 recognizes that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output period of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, in step S401, command analysis processing is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 are analyzed. In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received based on the analysis result in the step S401. If a new command has been received, command response processing is executed in step S403.

  In the command handling process, a data table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is grasped. The data table defines the processing necessary to display an image for one frame at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the received command on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Information group.

  Here, as already described, commands received by the display CPU 72 from the sound emission control device 60 include a variation pattern command, a symbol designation command, and a notice command. When these commands are received, a data table necessary for executing the game turning effects corresponding to these commands on the symbol display device 31 is grasped. The received command is an end command. When the command is received, a data table necessary for finally stopping the currently executed game turning effect is grasped. The received commands include various commands for jackpot presentation. When the command is received, a data table necessary to execute the jackpot presentation is grasped. The received command includes a demo display command. When the command is received, a data table necessary for executing the demo display is grasped. Further, other program data necessary for executing the processing based on the data table that is grasped as necessary is also grasped.

  Of the data tables necessary for executing the game times effect, the data tables necessary for starting the game times effect have already been transferred to the normal area 73a of the work RAM 73 as normal program data. In addition, a data table necessary for finally stopping the game turning effect, a data table necessary for starting the jackpot effect, and a data table necessary for executing the demonstration display are also used as regular program data in the work RAM 73. Already transferred to the area 73a. Further, other program data necessary for executing processing based on these data tables has already been transferred to the regular area 73a of the work RAM 73 as regular program data.

  After executing the command handling process in step S403, it is determined in step S404 whether or not advance transfer of program data is necessary. The data determined to be necessary here is a data table that is not included in the regular program data among the data tables determined to be necessary in step S403, and is necessary for executing processing based on the data table. Other program data.

  If the program data needs to be transferred in advance, in step S405, the memory module 74 is requested to transfer the necessary program data. The memory module 74 receives the address designation command corresponding to the program data from the display CPU 72, and starts to transfer the program data to the change area 73b of the work RAM 73.

  That is, when a new command is received, the display CPU 72 determines whether or not new program data needs to be transferred at the timing when the command is analyzed, and if necessary, issues a program data transfer request. As a result, the advance transfer of the program data can be started at the earliest possible timing. Incidentally, when this transfer request is made, not only the logical address where the program data to be transferred is stored but also the address of the transfer destination is designated. In addition, since the data table and program data including the processing at the first timing in executing the processing corresponding to the command are transferred as the regular program data at the initial startup, the processing corresponding to the command is received after receiving the command. There is no waiting time before it starts.

  If a negative determination is made in step S402, a negative determination is made in step S404, or after the processing in step S405 is executed, the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, it is possible for the display CPU 72 to grasp processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In a succeeding step S407, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing, calculation of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 76 is performed. Details of the task processing will be described later.

  In subsequent step S408, a drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. In the VDP 76, drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in the VDP 76 will be described in detail later.

  In a succeeding step S409, it is determined whether or not the program data is being transferred. If the program data is being transferred, the V interrupt processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the program data is not being transferred, it is determined in step S410 whether or not the image data needs to be transferred by referring to the information set as the update timing after the current state in the currently set data table. Determine whether.

  Of the various image data, the image data used for the drawing instruction based on the regular program data is set as the regular image data. That is, as the regular image data, the image data necessary for starting the game effect, the image data necessary for starting the jackpot effect, and the image data necessary for executing the demonstration display are set. . These image data transfer requests have already been made to the memory module 74 in the initial setting process (FIG. 10), and when the display CPU 72 has received a command, the transfer has been completed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and at least the processing after step S406 may not be executed until the transfer of the regular image data is completed. In this case, after the main process (FIG. 9) is activated in the display CPU 72 and the initial image is displayed on the symbol display device 31, the display of the initial image is continued until the transfer of the regular image data is completed. It becomes. In addition, when transferring the initial image data, simple symbol data with a data capacity smaller than the total data capacity of the image data required to display the symbol variation is transferred at the same time, and the transfer of the regular image data group is completed. If a variation pattern command is received in a situation where it is not, a configuration may be adopted in which variation display using simple symbols is performed.

  The image data determined to be transferred in step S410 is image data that is required at the update timing after the current state in the currently set data table and is not included in the regular image data. It is. If it is not necessary to transfer the image data, the V interrupt process is terminated. If it is necessary to transfer image data, in step S411, the memory module 74 is requested to transfer the necessary image data, and then the V interrupt process is terminated. The memory module 74 receives the address designation command corresponding to the image data from the display CPU 72, and starts the transfer of the image data to the change area 81b of the development buffer 81.

  That is, the display CPU 72 refers to the currently set data table to determine whether or not new image data needs to be transferred, and if necessary, issues a transfer request for the image data and creates drawing data in the VDP 76. The image data is pre-transferred before the timing required for this is reached. Thereby, the drawing data can be smoothly created in the VDP 76. Incidentally, when this transfer request is made, not only the logical address at which the image data to be transferred is stored, but also the transfer destination address is designated. In addition, since the regular image data is transferred at the time of initial startup, no waiting time is generated after the command is received until the display of the corresponding image is started.

  Here, by executing the processing of step S409, the transfer of the program data has priority over the transfer of the image data. Even if transfer of program data is prioritized in this way, the necessity of transferring image data is determined with reference to the data table, so even if transfer is temporarily avoided in step S409. Then, in the subsequent V interrupt process, the necessity for transfer is determined and a transfer request is executed. As a result, the transfer timing of the program data and the image data can be prevented from overlapping, and the transfer of the program data can be prioritized.

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

  In the VDP 76, processing for setting the value of the register 92 based on a command transmitted from the display CPU 72, processing for creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, And the process which outputs an image signal to the symbol display apparatus 31 based on the drawing data produced in the frame area | regions 82a and 82b is performed.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 12A to 12C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer, which is information indicating which one of the first frame region 82a and the second frame region 82b is to be created, is set for an image of one frame related to the drawing list. Yes. Also, in the header information, presence / absence of decoding designation and address information to which moving image data to be decoded is transferred are set. In addition, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of the various designation information will be described later.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image for one frame are set. Further, information on the drawing order of each image data and each image data Parameter information is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be sequential numerical value information, and information of image data to be used is set corresponding to each numerical information one-to-one. Also, parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

  The drawing order is set so that an individual image desired to be displayed is positioned on the back side of the display screen G in an image for one frame before the drawing target. The individual image refers to one still image defined by still image data such as background data and one sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 12A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn, and then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and the sprite data B is further written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so that the front side is in the order of background image → effect image → design.

  In parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3),..., A plurality of types of parameters are set. Specifically, the background data parameter P (1), as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the address information of the area where the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75 and the two-dimensional plane when the background data is written. Frame areas 82a and 82b with respect to the coordinate information indicating the position of the image, the rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when the background data is written, and the size set as the initial state of the background data. Information on the scale indicating the magnification at the time of writing, information on the uniform α value indicating the entire transmission information (or transparency information) when writing the background data, and the α data designation indicating whether or not the α data is applied and the application target Information is set. The types of parameters are the same for sprite data A as shown in FIG.

  Here, the coordinate information is not individually set for all the pixels constituting the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for specifying coordinate information. In the VDP 76, it is possible to recognize that the designated coordinate information is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when the image data is arranged, the center pixel is on the designated coordinate. . Thereby, the information capacity of the coordinate information to be specified for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to recognize coordinates for all pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the central pixel, and may be a corner pixel such as upper left or upper right. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixel by using the corner pixel as the reference pixel.

  The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all dots of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data. The alpha data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of the background data and sprite data need not be finely controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but should be controlled uniformly for all pixels. By being able to cope with a uniform α value, the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying α data, the transparency can be finely controlled in units of pixels.

  Drawing processing in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the creation of drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list has been completed. If the creation of the drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S502 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, corresponding processing at the time of reception is executed in step S503.

  In the corresponding processing at the time of reception, it is determined from which information of the target buffer included in the drawing list which frame area 82a, 82b the image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is created, and the determination The frame area thus set is set as a drawing data creation target. Also, the presence / absence of decoding designation is grasped, and when there is a decoding designation, the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is grasped, and the moving picture decoder is operated so as to decode the moving image data. . Details of this decoding will be described later.

  In subsequent step S504, a content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are grasped. In the case of sprite data, color palette data is applied to each dot of the bitmap image. In a succeeding step S505, a writing process is executed. In the writing process, based on the grasping result of the contents grasping process in step S504, the current drawing target image data is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation object.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list is being created, a drawing list counter update process is executed in step S506. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data of the next drawing order. Then, the processing of step S504 and step S505 is executed for the switched image data. That is, by executing the drawing process a plurality of times, drawing data of an image for one frame designated by one drawing list is created.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data is processed in one drawing process may be used. However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing processing may be employed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S502, or after the processing in step S505 is executed, it is determined in step S507 whether or not the output of the image signal for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If it has not been completed, this drawing process is terminated. If it has been completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72, and then this drawing process is terminated.

  The drawing data for one frame is generated so as to be completed within a 20 msec cycle. An image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. Since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for one frame after that frame. Note that the display circuit 94 includes a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame regions 82a and 82b to be referred to every time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the switching by the selector circuit. The frame regions 82a and 82b which are the drawing targets of the drawing data are restricted so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Task processing in display CPU 72>
Next, task processing executed in the display CPU 72 will be described.

  As already described, the task processing is executed in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72 in order to grasp information necessary for creating the drawing list. In this case, in the task processing, not only the individual image included in the range of the image for one frame but also the individual image not included in the range of the image for one frame is set as a control target.

  With reference to FIG. 14, the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL <b> 1 that is a calculation target in the display CPU 72 will be described. In FIG. 14, the range defined by the alternate long and short dash line is the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, and the range defined by the alternate long and two short dashes line is the drawing range PL2 for one frame defined by the frame regions 82a and 82b. Further, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 and the drawing range PL2 shown in FIG. 14 schematically show the data configuration for performing calculations in the display CPU 72.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 and the drawing range PL2 for one frame are both defined to be rectangular, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is defined such that the virtual area to be defined is wider than the drawing range PL2 for one frame, and the range is defined to include the entire drawing range PL2 for one frame. Has been. This size is set to a size that allows a plurality of drawing ranges PL2 for one frame to be arranged in both the vertical and horizontal directions.

  In the display CPU 72, an individual image is calculated using the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 as a calculation target range, and reference coordinates are set as a position reference for the calculation. The reference coordinates are arbitrary as long as they are determined as one dot among the dots included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but in the pachinko machine 10, the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the initial setting position. In this state, it is determined as a dot in the upper left corner of the drawing range PL2. The initial setting position is a position where the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the center of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1.

  By setting the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 as described above, in the display CPU 72, an individual image that is not included in an image for one frame but is included in an image for one frame at a subsequent update timing. It becomes possible to start the calculation in advance. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, by using the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, it is possible to execute an effect such that the viewpoint is switched based on the operation of the effect operating device 48 by the player. That is, the position of the drawing range PL2 for one frame can be displaced from the initial setting position in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 based on the operation of the effect operating device 48. The calculation for performing this effect is executed by the task processing of the display CPU 72.

  Hereinafter, the task processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not it is a viewpoint switching period. The viewpoint switchable period is set, for example, as a period from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 31 until the symbol variation display is stopped in the first symbol row Z1 or the next symbol row Z2. Or may be set as a period in which the notice display is performed in the symbol display device 31, or may be set as a period in which the reach display is performed in the symbol display device 31. 31 may be set as a period in which a specific reach effect is performed, or may be set as a period in which a jackpot effect is performed in the symbol display device 31. In addition, information on whether or not it is the viewpoint switching period is set in the data table.

  If it is in the viewpoint switchable period, it is determined in step S602 whether the viewpoint is switched. The viewpoint switching state means a state in which the drawing range PL2 for one frame is set to a position different from the initial setting position, and a viewpoint switching flag is set in the work RAM 73 when the viewpoint switching is performed. Thus, the viewpoint switching state is established, and when the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position, the viewpoint switching state is canceled by deleting the flag.

  If not in the viewpoint switching state, it is determined in step S603 whether there is a viewpoint switching instruction. The presence or absence of a viewpoint switching instruction is performed by determining whether or not an operation generation command is received from the sound emission control device 60.

  Here, the operation generation command is transmitted based on the operation of the production operation device 48 as described above, and further, in correspondence with the fact that a plurality of positions where the viewpoint can be switched are set, The operation generation command includes information on the position to be switched. Whether or not the operation generation command has been received is determined in step S402 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 11). If the operation generation command has been received, it is determined in step S403 that the operation generation command has been received. A flag to be shown is set in the work RAM 73, and information corresponding to the type of operation generation command is set in the work RAM 73.

  If there is a viewpoint switching instruction, in step S604, coordinate change processing of the drawing range PL2 is executed. In the coordinate change process, it is determined which information included in the operation generation command corresponding to the current switching instruction is the information instructed to change to which coordinate, and the drawing range PL2 moves to the coordinate corresponding to the instruction. As described above, the coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated. Also, the viewpoint switching state is set in the coordinate changing process.

  On the other hand, if it is already in the viewpoint switching state (step S602: NO), it is determined in step S605 whether a release condition is satisfied. Whether or not the release condition is satisfied is determined by determining whether or not an operation release command is received from the sound emission control device 60. Note that the specific processing configuration for determining whether or not an operation release command has been received is the same as that for the operation generation command.

  If the release condition is satisfied, a drawing range return process is executed in step S606. In the return processing, the coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated so that the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position. Further, the viewpoint switching state is canceled in the return process. In addition, also when it determines with it not being a viewpoint switchable period (step S601: NO), the process of step S606 is performed. However, when the drawing range PL2 has already returned to the initial setting position, the process of step S606 may be skipped.

  When a negative determination is made in step S603, after the process of step S604 is executed, after a negative determination is made in step S605, or after the process of step S606 is executed, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether there is an individual image to be controlled. The individual images to be controlled are shown in the currently set data table, and are set in association with the positions of a plurality of types of drawing ranges PL2 in the viewpoint switching period. Further, the individual images to be controlled are not all the individual images that can be arranged on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but the currently set drawing range PL2 and the specified number of dots in the vertical and horizontal directions from the drawing range PL2. Individual images that are included in the outer range and are not yet set as control targets are extracted.

  If there are control start target individual images, it is determined in step S608 whether or not there are a plurality of control start target individual images. If there are not a plurality of such images, the single individual image is recognized as a control start target, and the process proceeds to step S612 without executing the processes in steps S609 to S611.

  If there are a plurality (step S608: YES), it is determined in step S609 whether or not there is a control start target individual image included in the drawing range PL2 at least a part of which is currently set. Determine whether. That is, in the configuration in which the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set in the display CPU 72 as described above, and an individual image outside the currently set drawing range PL2 can be set as a control target, the individual control start target is set individually. Since not only the image within the drawing range PL2 but also the image outside the drawing range PL2 is included as an image, it is determined in step S609 which one corresponds. Incidentally, the coordinates of the control start position of the individual image included in the control start target are set in the currently set data table, and the coordinates of the control start position and the currently set coordinates of the drawing range PL2 , The relative position of the individual image included in the control start target with respect to the drawing range PL2 is grasped.

  If there is a control start target individual image that is at least partially included in the drawing range PL2, in step S610, the individual image is grasped as the current control start target. In this case, when a plurality of individual images to be controlled are included in the drawing range PL2, all of them are grasped as the control start targets. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the individual image is outside the drawing range PL2 so that a situation in which there are a plurality of individual images to be controlled within the drawing range PL2 does not occur in one processing of the task processing. It is good also as a structure set as a control start object in the process time with a low processing load.

  On the other hand, when the individual image to be controlled is not included in the drawing range PL2, there are a plurality of control starting targets outside the drawing range PL2. In this case, in step S611, among the individual images outside the drawing range PL2, an individual image closer to the currently set drawing range PL2 is grasped as a control start target.

  Incidentally, as a result of the processing in step S610 and step S611, an individual image whose control start timing is postponed is recognized as a control start target in the subsequent processing times. In this case, when an individual image displayed as if it is moving in a predetermined direction at every update timing of the image is postponed, the control start parameter of the individual image including the control start position is one update timing. It is updated on the data table so that it is in an advanced state. As a result, even if the control start timing is postponed, the individual image is displayed at a predetermined position and state at a predetermined timing.

  When a negative determination is made in step S608, or after execution of either step S610 or step S611, the control start process of steps S612 to S614 is executed. In the control start process, first, in step S612, the work RAM 73 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling individual images, and a pair of individual images grasped as control start targets is paired. A free buffer area is secured so as to correspond to 1.

  In subsequent step S613, initialization processing is executed for all the empty buffer areas secured in step S612. In subsequent step S614, a parameter for starting control corresponding to the individual image is set for the empty buffer area initialized in step S613. The parameters for starting control include the position, rotation angle, and size of the target individual image on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. When there are a plurality of individual images that are recognized as control start targets, control start parameters are individually set for each empty buffer area corresponding to each individual image.

  When a negative determination is made in step S607 or after the process of step S614 is executed, the control update process of steps S615 to S618 is executed. In the control update process, first, background calculation processing is executed in step S615. In the background arithmetic processing, the current control update target is grasped among the rearmost still image and the background sprite that constitute the background image. In addition, for the grasped control update target, various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation are calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in an area secured in correspondence with each individual image in the work RAM 73.

  In the subsequent step S616, an effect calculation process is executed. In the effect calculation processing, the current control update target is grasped among effect sprites that constitute an effect image to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect. The various parameters are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in an area secured in correspondence with each individual image in the work RAM 73.

  In the subsequent step S617, a symbol calculation process is executed. In the symbol computation process, the current control update target is grasped from symbols subject to variable display in each game round. The various parameters are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in an area secured in correspondence with each individual image in the work RAM 73.

  Incidentally, in each processing of step S615 to step S617, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image update timing comes. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 and is transferred in advance to the work RAM 73 before the display CPU 72 needs to read it.

  Then, after executing the drawing instruction target grasping process in step S618, the task process is terminated. In the drawing instruction target grasping process, the individual images included in the image for one frame related to the current drawing data creation instruction among the individual images that have been controlled and updated by the processes in steps S615 to S617. Execute the process to grasp.

  The grasping is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to information on the drawing range PL2 that is currently set and information on coordinates, rotation angles, and scales of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, it is necessary to select individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76 by making the individual images designated in the drawing list not only all individual images that have been started to be controlled but only individual images to be displayed. In addition, even if it is not selected, there is no need to perform drawing processing for individual images that are not display targets. Thereby, the processing load of the VDP 76 can be reduced.

  As described above, for the individual image to be controlled, “search for empty buffer area” in step S612, “initialization of reserved buffer area” in step S613, and “setting parameters for starting control” in step S614. ”And any one of the“ various parameter update procedures ”in steps S615 to S617 is executed, while the individual image only for the control update target is in any one of“ various parameter update ”in steps S615 to S617. Only the "update procedure" is executed. Therefore, the processing load is greater for an individual image that is a control start target than for an individual image that is only a control update target. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the process which replaces it with respect to the individual image used as the control start object is performed in either of step S615-step S617, without performing the process of step S614.

  Here, as already described, it is necessary to update the image at a cycle of 20 msec, and this image update is performed by transmitting a drawing list created based on the processing result of the task processing to the VDP 76. Then, for the task process, a period required for creating a drawing list and receiving it by the VDP 76 for 20 msec, a period required for creating drawing data corresponding to an image for one frame based on the drawing list It is necessary to complete in a period shorter than the period minus. In such a situation, as described above, the processing for starting the control has a larger processing load than the processing for updating the control. Therefore, if there are a large number of individual images to be controlled, the task processing is completed. There is a possibility that processing failure occurs without being in time. On the other hand, the processing from step S608 to step S611 is executed, and the control start timing is distributed so that there are not many individual images to be controlled in one processing time. Does not occur.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the individual image once controlled is not displayed within a predetermined number of frames, such as at a position outside the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. When it becomes, it is excluded from the control target. When it becomes necessary to perform the control for the individual image again, the process for starting the control is executed again.

  Next, how each individual image is a control target in the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 16A and 16B are explanatory diagrams for explaining how individual images are controlled. FIG. 16A shows a case where viewpoint switching is not performed, and FIG. ) Indicates a case where the viewpoint is switched.

  When the viewpoint is not switched, the drawing range PL2 is fixed as shown in FIG. In this case, since the individual images PC1 to PC3 included in the drawing range PL2 are targeted for control start at a timing prior to the timing shown in FIG. 16A, only the control update process is executed.

  On the other hand, since the individual image PC4 and the individual image PC5 that are outside the drawing range PL2 but are included in the control target range PL3 are not yet controlled, the individual image PC4 and the individual image PC5 are included in the control start target. Will be. However, if the processing load increases when the control start process is executed for both the individual images PC4 and PC5, the control start process is preferentially executed for the individual image PC4 close to the drawing range PL2, and the individual image PC4 and PC5 are individually processed. The control start process for the image PC 5 is performed in the next task process. In addition, the individual image PC6 and the individual image PC7 that are included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 but outside the control target range PL3 are not included in the control start target, and the control start process is not executed.

  When there are a plurality of individual targets outside the drawing range PL2 as control start targets, the control start process is executed with priority from the side closer to the drawing range PL2. Thereby, in the configuration in which the control start timing is dispersed, the frequency at which the control start process is executed at a timing at which at least a part of the drawing range PL2 is included is reduced.

  When the viewpoint is switched, as shown in FIG. 16B, the previous task process has the drawing range PL2 at the first position defined by the two-dot chain line, whereas the current task. The drawing range PL2 is displaced to the second position defined by the solid line by the processing. In this case, a part of the drawing range PL2 at the second position is included in the drawing range PL2 at the first position, and accordingly, the individual image PC8 is the first at the time of the previous task processing. Since the drawing range PL2 at the position is at least partially included, it is already a control target. Therefore, in the current task process, it is not necessary to execute the control start process for the individual image PC8.

  On the other hand, since the individual image PC9 and the individual image PC10 are newly included in the drawing range PL2 displaced to the second position, the control start process has priority over both the individual image PC9 and the individual image PC10. Is executed and controlled. In this case, the individual image PC11 is newly included in the control target range with respect to the drawing range PL2 at the second position, but the control start process is executed with priority on the individual images PC9 and PC10. This time, it is excluded from the control start target.

  Even when the control start timing is distributed, when it is necessary to execute the control start process on the individual images included in the drawing range PL2, that is, included in the image for one frame, the control start process is It is executed preferentially and is not deferred. As a result, there is no inconvenience that an individual image that should originally be included in an image for one frame is not included.

  In particular, in a configuration in which an effect is performed in which the viewpoint is switched when the effect operating device 48 is operated by a player, an individual image that has not been controlled until then may be suddenly controlled. Can happen. On the other hand, since the control start process is executed with priority on the individual images included in the image for one frame as described above, the effect of switching the viewpoint can be achieved without causing the above disadvantages. Can perform well.

  Note that the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which all the individual images included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 are the control start targets in the display CPU 72. In this case, the individual image included in the drawing range is given the highest priority as the control start target, and the individual image for the entire range is set as the control start target while giving priority to the side closer to the drawing range. Thus, it is possible to start the control in advance for a wider range of individual images than in the above configuration while favorably distributing the control start timing.

  However, in this configuration, since the individual images to be controlled and updated in the display CPU 72 are increased as compared with the above configuration, the processing load of the processing for control update in each processing time increases. In order to reduce the processing load of the control update process, it is preferable that a part of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set as a control start target as described above.

  Further, the drawing range may be switched in advance. In this configuration, it is preferable to perform in advance the control start processing of the individual image that will be included in the drawing range of the switching destination when the period when the switching is possible or at a timing before that. . Thereby, even if the drawing range is switched at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to cope with it.

  Further, the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the drawing range is not switched. In this case, the presence / absence of the control start target may be determined based on the fixed drawing range, so that the processing configuration for performing the confirmation can be simplified. In this configuration, an individual image that is displayed so as to move in the depth direction of the display screen G can be considered as an individual image that is a control start target at a timing that is a display target on the display screen G.

  Further, the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which a display mode such as a background image or a pattern is changed based on an operation of the effect operating device 48 or the like. Even in this case, the control start timing can be well distributed.

<Configuration for displaying scroll background image>
Next, a configuration for displaying a scroll background image will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a scroll background image is set as a kind of background image. The scroll background image is a background image displayed so as to scroll and change in a predetermined direction, specifically, in the horizontal direction as time passes. The scroll background image is set to have background images for a plurality of frames in the scroll direction. The scroll background image has a start point portion and an end point portion, and is set so that the image of the start point portion has continuity with respect to the image of the end point portion. As a result of the scroll display, when the scroll background image reaches the end point portion, the start point portion is continuously displayed. That is, the scroll background image is repeatedly displayed so as to go around.

  As image data for displaying the scroll background image, scroll background data PD1 is set. The scroll background data PD1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the scroll background data PD1.

  The scroll background data PD1 is still image data. As shown in FIG. 17A, the vertical size is set to one frame or larger, and the horizontal size as the scroll direction is Are set to be a plurality of frames. The scroll background data PD1 is not set as one image data, but is set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided part data PD2 to PD10. Each of the divided part data PD2 to PD10 is set so as to divide the scroll background data PD1 in the scroll direction, and the scroll background data PD1 is configured by arranging in the scroll direction.

  The contents of the images set in the divided part data PD2 to PD10 are different from each other. However, the divided part data adjacent in the scroll direction is set so that the content of the image has continuity in the scroll direction.

  The divided parts data PD2 to PD10 are set so that the sizes in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction are the same. In this case, the horizontal size is set to be smaller than one frame, and in order to form a background image for one frame, a part of the divided part data PD2 to PD10 and a plurality of divided part data are set side by side. There is a need to. Specifically, in the case of setting the divided part data at the initial size, the horizontal direction is set so that a background image for one frame can be formed by arranging two or three divided part data. The size is set. Note that a background image for one frame may be formed by always arranging three divided parts data or arranging four or more divided parts data. It is good also as a structure which can form an image.

  Further, the divided parts data adjacent in the scroll direction are set to overlap each other at the boundary portion. The divided parts data PD5 and PD6 adjacent in the scroll direction will be described as an example.

  As shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, each pixel constituting one line in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the scroll direction at the end point portion of the divided part data PD5 on the scroll destination side, In the starting point portion of the divided part data PD6, the pixels constituting one line in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the scroll direction are set to the same coordinate in the scroll direction when drawing in the frame regions 82a and 82b. The same data is set for each line. When both divided parts data PD5 and PD6 are drawn, the lines overlap each other. That is, the overlapping area PA1 is set at the boundary portion between the divided part data PD5 and PD6 adjacent in the scroll direction.

  The effect | action by setting overlap area | region PA1 is demonstrated using FIG. 18A-1 and 18A-2 show the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set, and FIGS. 18B-1 and 18B-2 show that the overlapping area PA1 is set. The divided part data PD5 and PD6 not shown are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (b-1), in the divided part data in which the overlapping area PA1 is not set, when both divided parts data are enlarged from the initial size and drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, FIG. As shown in b-2), a gap may occur at the boundary between the two parts data. For example, depending on the method of enlarging the divided part data and the method of setting the enlarged frame areas 82a and 82b, if the overlapping area PA1 is not set, a dot in which no data is set between the adjacent divided part data is set. It may be present. In this case, the background color is set for the dot, and the boundary portion is conspicuous in appearance, which is not preferable.

  Further, for example, when the divided part data is enlarged, the above-described phenomenon occurs depending on the content of linear interpolation executed when each pixel of the divided part data after the enlargement corresponds to each dot of the frame regions 82a and 82b. . And the data of the edge part of division | segmentation part data is expanded and set to the dot of the above gap parts. If it does so, a boundary part will be in a conspicuous state in appearance, and is not preferable.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18 (a-1), in the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set, both the divided part data PD5 and PD6 are enlarged at the same magnification from the initial size. Even if the drawing is performed in the frame areas 82a and 82b, no gap is generated because the overlapping area PA1 exists at the boundary between the divided part data PD5 and PD6 as shown in FIG. 18 (a-2). As a result, it is possible to display an image using the divided part data PD5 and PD6 without causing the above inconvenience.

  Incidentally, the effect of preventing the generation of a gap due to the presence of the overlapping area PA1 as described above is that the divided part data PD5 and PD6 are reduced from the initial size by the same magnification and drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b. The same is true for cases. Further, in order to more surely prevent the inconvenience that a gap is generated due to the presence of edge portion data after enlargement, the divided parts data PD5 and PD6 constituting the overlapping area PA1 are arranged on the near side. For example, α data is used to make the edge part completely transparent so that the edge part data (partial data after enlargement of the overlapping area PA1) of the divided parts data is not reflected on the frame areas 82a and 82b. Further, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the data of the portion overlapping the edge portion in the divided part data on the back side is set to the corresponding dot in the frame regions 82a and 82b.

  In addition, a part constituting one overlapping area PA1 is a pixel for one line in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. Thereby, the data capacity allocated to provide the overlapping area PA1 can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the divided part data PD5 and PD6, the same data is set in the portion constituting one overlapping area PA1. As a result, when the divided parts data PD5 and PD6 are individually enlarged and set in the frame regions 82a and 82b, even if the overlapping portions are slightly shifted, the shifted portions are within the same data range. Deviation occurs, and even in this case, a good display mode can be obtained.

  A specific processing configuration for displaying the scroll background image will be described below. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for scroll background executed by the display CPU 72. The scroll background calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15). The calculation process for the scroll background is activated when information about the scroll background is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S701, the scroll position information is updated. The scroll position information is information for specifying which region is displayed on the display screen G in the scroll background image. The scroll position information is determined by numerical information of a scroll counter provided in the work RAM 73. A large number of frame portions included in the scroll background image correspond to each numerical value of the scroll position information on a one-to-one basis. In step S701, the numerical information of the scroll counter is updated so that 1 is added.

  In subsequent step S702, the scale of the background image of this time is grasped. In the subsequent step S703, the divided part data included in the display range is grasped by referring to the scroll position information updated in step S701 and the scale grasped in step S702. In this case, at least two pieces of divided part data are grasped. Incidentally, the control start processing for the divided part data has already been completed.

  In the subsequent step S704, the coordinates of the divided part data on the most scrolling side among the divided part data grasped in step S703 are calculated and derived, and the information on the derived coordinates corresponds to the divided part data in the work RAM 73. The information for control is updated by writing in the reserved area.

  In the subsequent step S705, as coordinates of the next divided part data, coordinates for generating an overlapping region are calculated for the adjacent divided parts data on the scroll destination side, and information on the derived coordinates is obtained from the work RAM 73. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the divided part data.

  In a succeeding step S706, it is determined whether or not the coordinates have been grasped for all of the divided part data grasped in the step S703. If unrecognized divided part data exists, the process of step S705 is executed for the divided part data. If there is no unrecognized divided part data, the process proceeds to step S707.

  In step S707, parameter information other than the size and coordinates is updated for the divided part data obtained in step S703. Thereafter, in step S708, after the scroll background designation information is stored, this calculation process is terminated.

  When the above process is executed, the divided part data grasped in step S703 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). Also, scroll background designation information is set in this drawing list.

  Next, the setting process of the divided part data executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The divided part data setting process is executed in the content grasping process in step S504 in the drawing process (FIG. 13). The divided part data setting process is activated when scroll background designation is set in the drawing list.

  First, in step S801, the type of divided part data to be drawn and the address where the divided part data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Thereafter, the scale of each divided part data is grasped in step S802, the coordinates of each divided part data are grasped in step S803, and other parameters are grasped in step S804, and then this setting process is terminated.

  By executing the setting process of the divided part data, each divided part data is stored in the subsequent writing process (step S505) with the above parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Drawn. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, whereby a background image using each of the divided part data is displayed on the display screen G.

  Here, a part of the divided parts data to be drawn protrudes from the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, when three divided part data PD2 to PD4 are drawn in a region PL4 for one frame partitioned by a two-dot chain line, in each divided part data PD2 to PD4, There is a portion that protrudes from the region PL4 for one frame. In the VDP 76, when image data is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b, it is not possible to draw out only some pixels. Therefore, although the protruding portion is not written in the frame regions 82a and 82b, the same processing as that executed when the portion that does not protrude is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b is executed for the pixels at the protruding portion. The

  As described above, the scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames is stored in advance as a plurality of divided part data, so that the size that can be stored as single image data in the NAND flash memory 102 is set to be excessively large. There is no need to do it. In addition, if the background data for scrolling is transferred as a single image data, the transfer time becomes longer, but since it can be transferred in divided part data units, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

  Further, the VDP 76 performs the drawing process on the portion that protrudes from the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn in the same manner as the portion that does not protrude. However, when the scroll background data is used as a single image data, the VDP 76 protrudes. There are many places, and the processing load increases. On the other hand, by using only the divided part data in which at least a part is included in the frame regions 82a and 82b, the protruding portion can be suppressed and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, parameter information is not derived in the display CPU 72 for the divided parts data that is not to be displayed. As a result, the processing load on the display CPU 72 is reduced.

  In addition, by setting the divided part data small and increasing the divided part data used in each frame, it is possible to suppress the portion that protrudes from the frame regions 82a and 82b. However, as the divided part data increases, the display CPU 72 As a result, the amount of image data subject to parameter calculation increases, and the processing load on the display CPU 72 increases. On the other hand, since the size of each divided part data is set so that there are 2 to 3 pieces of divided part data used in each frame, the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be suppressed.

  The scroll direction is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction.

  In addition, when focusing on the effect that the data capacity of a single image data can be suppressed, a configuration in which a plurality of divided part data is set as image data for displaying a series of images may be required. The divided parts data may not have the overlapping area PA1. In this case, if the individual size adjustment of each divided part data is not performed, the possibility that a gap is generated is reduced. Even if the size is adjusted, the gap may not exist by adjusting the coordinates when setting the frame regions 82a and 82b.

  In addition, the overlapping area PA1 may not be configured by pixels for one column, but may be configured by pixels for a plurality of columns. In this case, although the data capacity allocated to the overlapping area PA1 increases, the generation of a gap can be more reliably prevented. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the same data is not set to the part which comprises one overlap area | region PA1.

<Configuration for displaying displacement background image of small unit group>
Next, a configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a displacement background image of a small unit group is set as a kind of background image. The displacement background image of the small unit group is a background image that is displayed so that a large number of small unit images are displaced in a predetermined direction as time passes in front of the backmost image. A flower leaf image is set as the small unit image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a rain image or a snow image may be set.

  Small unit group background data PD11 is set as image data for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group. The small unit group background data PD11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small unit group background data PD11.

  The small unit group background data PD11 is not set as one image data, but is set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 as shown in FIG. Each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 has a plurality (for example, four) of divided parts data.

  Each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 has the same number of divided part data, and the order of reading out the images for one frame in each divided data group PD12 to PD15 is determined in advance. In other words, each divided part data set as the first order in each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 is arranged at a corresponding position, so that a displacement background image for one frame is displayed and the next order is displayed. The divided part data set as is arranged at corresponding positions, so that a displacement background image for the next frame is displayed. This is sequentially performed for each combination in order.

  A plurality of small unit image data are set in each divided part data. The data for these small unit images is set differently for each divided part data, and the combination of each divided part data is sequentially selected in the above-described predetermined order, so that FIG. As shown, each of the large number of small unit images is displayed so as to be displaced in a predetermined direction as time passes.

  A specific processing configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described below. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for displacement background executed by the display CPU 72. The displacement background calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15).

  First, in step S901, the value of the part counter for specifying the order of the divided part data corresponding to the current frame is updated. This parts counter is provided in the work RAM 73. In subsequent step S902, the divided data group to be set is grasped. In grasping this, a target counter provided in the work RAM 73 is referred to.

  In subsequent step S903, the divided part data to be controlled is grasped from the information on the order indicated by the parts counter and the information on the divided data group to be the target indicated by the target counter. In the subsequent step S904, the parameter of the divided part data grasped in step S903 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured corresponding to the divided part data in the work RAM 73. Update information for

  In a succeeding step S905, it is determined whether or not the setting of all divided parts data corresponding to the current order is completed. If the setting has not been completed, the target counter is updated in step S906, so that the setting target is updated to the next divided data group, and then the processing from step S902 is executed. On the other hand, if the setting has been completed, after the displacement background designation information is stored in step S907, the calculation process for the displacement background is terminated.

  When the above process is executed, each divided part data corresponding to the current order is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). In the drawing list, displacement background designation information is set. The VDP 76 that has received the drawing list draws each divided part data in the frame regions 82a and 82b according to the drawing list. Then, the output of the drawing list and the drawing corresponding thereto are repeatedly performed for each frame, so that an animation as shown in FIG. 21B is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, when displaying an animation that displaces a small unit group, instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite, a still image in which a plurality of small unit images are set together is sequentially switched. Since the control is performed, the processing load of the parameter calculation process in the display CPU 72 is reduced. Therefore, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load on the display CPU 72.

  The number of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 and the number of divided part data assigned to each divided data group PD12 to PD15 are arbitrary as long as they are plural.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the division | segmentation part data is not allocated for every division | segmentation data group PD12-PD15, and the common division | segmentation data group in which many division | segmentation part data was set is provided. In this case, the divided part data may be distributed from the common divided data group to each divided position.

<Adding effect image>
Next, the effect image addition processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 23A to 23E are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect image addition processing.

  An effect image is an image that represents a blast, an image that represents water splash, a light-emitting image that represents light being emitted from a light source, and an aura image that represents as if the surroundings of a character are emitting light. In addition, this is an image for enhancing the visual effect. Among these effect images, the image to be applied to the blast and the image to splash water is not limited, but the aura image is applied to a predetermined sprite.

  Specifically, effect data PD17 is set in correspondence with sprite data PD16 as shown in FIG. 23A, as shown in FIG. The sprite data PD16 includes an image area PA2 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image, and a frame area PA3 surrounding the image area PA2, and is defined to be rectangular as a whole. Yes. On the other hand, the effect data PD17 is defined along the outer edge of the image area PA2, and the effect area PA4 to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image and the effect area PA4 so as to be rectangular as a whole. A frame area PA5 that defines an inner side and an outer side.

  Incidentally, the sprite data PD16 and the corresponding effect data PD17 are defined to have the same size and the same shape at the time of initial setting. In addition, since information of “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as the α value in the pixels constituting each frame area PA3, PA5, the pixel area PA3 is not displayed on the display screen G. The effect area PA4 is a display target on the display screen G. However, the frame areas PA3 and PA5 may be hidden by using dedicated α data. Details of the α data will be described later.

  By applying the effect data PD17 to the sprite data PD16, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), an effect image CH2 is generated for the character CH1 as if the surrounding area is emitting light. . In this case, the effect image CH2 overlaps a part of the background image in front of it. On the other hand, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are individually set, the character CH1 alone can be displayed.

  The frame areas 82a and 82b in which the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are drawn include a large number of unit areas as described above, and an area for storing color information is set in each unit area. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23 (d), in each unit area 121, color information storage areas 121a to 121c each consisting of 1 byte are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each color of RGB. 256 colors can be set for each of RGB.

  The smaller the value of the numerical information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c, the darker the color in RGB is finally displayed, and in the case of the minimum value, black is displayed. Further, the larger the value of the numerical information, the brighter the color is finally displayed in RGB, and in the case of the maximum value, white is displayed. In a configuration that can display only 256 colors instead of the full color system, the color information storage areas 121a to 121c need only be 1 byte.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23E, color information including numerical information is set in each pixel 122 of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 using a palette table or the like. In this case, the color information set in each pixel 122 is data that can display only 256 colors, not full color. However, in order to perform drawing in the frame regions 82a and 82b favorably, each color of RGB Are set as information within the range of 1 byte.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set with 1 byte instead of 3 bytes, and in a configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors, each pixel 122 has The color information may be set to 1 byte.

  In addition to the color information, α value information is set for each pixel 122. A storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as information on the α value, but in reality, any numerical value information of “0 to 100” is set in decimal. The information on the α value is numerical information of “0 to 100”, which corresponds to the α value of “0 to 1”, and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

  When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 to be drawn, the numerical information obtained by accumulating the α value for the RGB numerical information in each pixel 122 is used for storing color information in the unit area 121. It is stored for each of the areas 121a to 121c corresponding to RGB. In this case, when the α value is set as the opaque information with “1”, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten as it is on the corresponding unit area 121. On the other hand, when the α value is less than 1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is performed on the image superimposed on the back side of the display screen G, and the calculation result is obtained for the unit area 121. Written.

  In the case of the effect data PD17, an α value less than 1 is set for all pixels. Specifically, complete transmission information with an α value of “0” is set for all the pixels included in the frame area PA5, and semitransparent with 0 <α value <1 is set for each pixel included in the effect area PA4. Information is set. When the effect data PD17 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, an α value is set for the numerical information of each pixel of the effect data PD17 for each unit area 121 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The accumulated results are added.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying an image using the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for the first effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the first effect effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15). The calculation process for the first effect effect is activated when information about the first effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S1001, the sprite data PD16 included in the display area is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1002, the parameter of the sprite data PD16 grasped in step S1001 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured in correspondence with the sprite data PD16 in the work RAM 73. Update information for

  In a succeeding step S1003, it is determined whether or not the effect data should be applied based on the currently set data table. If it is not necessary to apply the effect data, this calculation process is terminated as it is.

  When the calculation process for the first effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the sprite data PD16 is the drawing target, and further includes the parameter information of the sprite data PD16. A list is created and sent to the VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is necessary to apply the effect data PD17, the effect data PD17 to be applied this time is grasped in step S1004. In the subsequent step S1005, the same coordinates as those obtained for the application-target sprite data PD16 in step S1002 are grasped as the coordinates of the effect data PD17, and the work RAM 73 is allocated to the area secured corresponding to the effect data PD17. The information for control is updated by writing.

  In the subsequent step S1006, parameter information other than coordinates is calculated and derived for the effect data PD17, and the information for control is updated by writing the derived parameter information in the secured area. In this case, when the size and rotation angle of the sprite data PD16 to be applied are changed from those at the initial setting, the size and rotation angle of the effect data PD17 are adjusted so as to be the same as those. Thereafter, after the effect designation information is stored in step S1007, this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for the first effect effect is executed as described above, a drawing list in which both the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are set as drawing targets is created in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). Is done. The drawing list includes parameter information of each of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17, and effect designation information indicating that the effect data PD17 should be applied. Then, the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the setting process for the first effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the first effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the setting process for the first effect effect is activated when the designation relating to the first effect effect is set in the drawing list.

  In step S1101, the current drawing target sprite data PD16 shown in the drawing list and the address to which the sprite data PD16 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In subsequent step S1102, the parameters of the sprite data PD16 are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1103, it is determined whether or not effect designation information is set in association with the sprite data PD16 in the drawing list. If the effect designation information is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the effect designation information is set, in step S1104, the effect data PD17 to be drawn together with the sprite data PD16 is grasped, and the effect data PD17 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address you have. Thereafter, in step S1105, after grasping the parameters of the effect data PD17, the setting process is terminated.

  That is, the effect data PD17 is set in association with the application-target sprite data PD16 in the drawing list, and is simultaneously processed in the processing times for processing the application-target sprite data PD16. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect data PD17 may be set independently of the application-target sprite data PD16 in the drawing list. Even in this case, as described above, since the parameters are set solely for the effect data PD17, the effect data PD17 can be drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn.

  Incidentally, by handling the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 separately, as described above, the character CH1 alone corresponding to the sprite data PD16 can be displayed using the same sprite data PD16. In addition, it is possible to display the character CH1 to which the effect image CH2 is applied.

  When the setting process for the first effect effect is executed, the sprite data PD16 is applied in the state where the above parameters are applied to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b in the subsequent writing process (step S505). The effect data PD17 is drawn.

  Next, the first effect addition process executed by the VDP 76 when the effect data PD17 is drawn will be described. FIG. 26A is a flowchart showing the first effect addition process, and FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the first effect addition process. The first effect addition process is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S505 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). The first effect addition process is started when the effect data PD17 is set.

  First, in step S1201, a target pixel update process is executed. In the target pixel update process, a process for updating the pixel to be rendered this time in the effect data PD17 is executed. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

  In subsequent step S1202, the numerical information stored in the dot (that is, the unit area) in which the current target pixel is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b is read and grasped. In this case, as shown by “r1”, “g1”, and “b1” in FIG. 26 (b-1), each numerical value information of RGB is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1203, numerical information set for the current target pixel in the effect data PD17 is grasped. This numerical information is numerical information obtained as a result of accumulating numerical value information of α values with respect to RGB numerical information. That is, each numerical value information of RGB is grasped as indicated by “α × r2”, “α × g2”, and “α × b2” in FIG.

  In addition, in the integration, an operation is performed so that the α value defined as a decimal value of “0 to 100” functions as “0.00 to 1.00”, which is a value of 1 or less, Furthermore, the value is rounded down or rounded off so that the result of integration does not include a value after the decimal point. The handling of the α value and the numerical values after the decimal point are the same in the following description. In addition, the α value is determined as a decimal value of “0 to 10”, and the calculation is performed so that it functions as “0.0 to 1.0” which is a value of 1 or less. Good.

  In subsequent step S1204, the RGB numerical value information grasped in step S1202 and the RGB numerical value information grasped in step S1203 are added. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 26 (b-3), each numerical value information of RGB becomes “r1 + α × r2”, “g1 + α × g2”, “b1 + α × b2”. In subsequent step S1205, each numerical value information of RGB calculated in step S1204 is written in the current target dot.

  Thereafter, in step S1206, it is determined whether drawing has been completed for all the pixels of the effect data PD17. If not completed, the processing from step S1201 to step S1205 is repeated. If it has been completed, this addition process is terminated.

  By executing the addition process, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 reflects the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed. Is displayed. As described above, the effect image CH2 is an image that transmits the back-side object such as light and water droplets, and thus, when displayed independently of the background image, a sense of incongruity occurs. On the other hand, by performing the addition process as described above, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state in which the background image is reflected, which is visually preferable without causing the sense of incongruity. Become.

  Note that the specific process of reflecting the back-side individual image when displaying the near-side individual image is not limited to the addition process, and other calculation processes can be performed as long as the reflection can be performed satisfactorily. May be configured to be executed.

  In addition, after the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side is set in the frame regions 82a and 82b, the addition processing of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the near side to the frame regions 82a and 82b is executed. Alternatively, the image data resulting from the addition process may be set in the frame regions 82a and 82b.

<Effect image partial addition processing>
Next, the effect image partial addition process will be described.

  When an effect image is applied as described above, an addition process is executed. However, when a bright effect image is superimposed on a bright image, each numerical value of RGB is displayed in the unit areas of the frame regions 82a and 82b. The information may become the maximum value, and may be displayed in a white color that deviates from the designer's intention (so-called whiteout occurs). On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, in order to suppress the occurrence of the overexposure, partial addition is performed when displaying a predetermined effect image.

  With regard to the data structure for performing the partial addition, referring to FIG. 27 (a), an effect that is handled independently of the character sprite data, such as an image representing a blast or an image representing water splash, is taken as an example. While explaining. FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration for performing partial addition.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a-1), the effect data PD18 to which partial addition is applied includes an effect area PA6 that includes a plurality of pixels and is to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image, and is entirely rectangular. And a frame area PA7 that defines the periphery of the effect area PA6 so as to have a shape. As described above, each pixel constituting the effect area PA6 includes color information having numerical information corresponding to each of RGB and information of α value integrated with each numerical information of the color information. Is set. It should be noted that “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as the α value for each pixel constituting the frame area PA7.

  In correspondence with the effect data PD18 on a one-to-one basis, as shown in FIG. 27 (a-2), partial addition data PD19 defined so that the size and outer shape at the time of initial setting are the same as the effect data PD18. Is set. The partial addition data PD19 includes an effect corresponding area PA8 that is defined to have the same shape and the same number of pixels as the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, and the periphery of the effect corresponding area PA8 so as to be rectangular as a whole. And a frame corresponding area PA9 that defines

  Unlike the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, color information is not set for each pixel constituting the effect corresponding area PA8, and only α value information is set. By the way, the information of α value set for each pixel is individually set according to the execution target of partial addition, and if there are pixels with the same α value information set to each other, There are also pixels for which information of different α values is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the α value set for each pixel may be the same.

  When the partial addition is performed, first, the partial addition data PD19 is applied to each dot (that is, each unit area) on which the effect data PD18 is drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. Thereafter, effect data PD18 is drawn for each dot. A specific processing configuration in which the drawing is performed will be described below.

  FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing a calculation process for the second effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the second effect effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15). The calculation process for the second effect effect is activated when information about the second effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S1301, the effect data PD18 to be rendered this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S1302, the parameter of the effect data PD18 grasped in step S1301 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured corresponding to the effect data PD18 in the work RAM 73. Update information for

  In subsequent step S1303, based on the currently set data table, partial addition data PD19 to be applied this time is grasped. In the following step S1304, the same coordinates as the coordinates obtained for the application target effect data PD18 in step S1302 are grasped as the coordinates of the partial addition data PD19, and the information on the grasped coordinates is added to the partial addition in the work RAM 73. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the data PD19.

  In subsequent step S1305, information on parameters other than coordinates is derived from the partial addition data PD19, and the information on the derived parameters is written in the reserved area to update the control information. In this case, when the size and rotation angle of the effect data PD18 to be applied are changed from those at the time of initial setting, the size and rotation angle of the partial addition data PD19 are adjusted so as to be the same as those. . Thereafter, after the partial addition designation information is stored in step S1306, this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for the second effect presentation is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the drawing list in which both the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19 are set as drawing targets. Is created. Further, the drawing list includes parameter information of the effect data PD18 and partial addition data PD19, and partial addition designation information indicating that the partial addition data PD19 should be applied. The created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the setting process for the second effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the second effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). The setting process for the second effect effect is activated when partial addition designation is set in the drawing list.

  In step S1401, the present application target partial addition data PD19 shown in the drawing list and the address to which the partial addition data PD19 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In subsequent step S1402, the parameter of the partial addition data PD19 is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1403, the current drawing target effect data PD18 shown in the drawing list and the address to which the effect data PD18 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Thereafter, in step S1404, after grasping the parameters of the effect data PD18, the setting process is terminated.

  That is, the partial addition data PD19 is set in association with the effect data PD18 to be applied in the drawing list, and is processed at the same time in the processing time for processing the effect data PD18 to be applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the partial addition data PD19 may be set independently of the application target effect data PD18 in the drawing list. In this case, since the parameter is set solely for the partial addition data PD19, the partial addition is only required if the drawing order is set so that the partial addition data PD19 is processed before the effect data PD18. It is possible to appropriately draw the data PD19 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn.

  By executing the setting process for the second effect effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the partial addition is performed with the above parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn.

  Next, the second effect addition process executed by the VDP 76 when the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn will be described. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing the second effect addition process, and FIG. 29B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the second effect addition process. The second effect addition process is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S505 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). The second effect addition process is activated when the partial addition data PD19 is set.

  First, in step S1501, a target pixel update process is executed. In the update process of the target pixel, a process for updating the pixel to be rendered this time in the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 is executed. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

  In subsequent step S1502, the numerical information stored in the dot (that is, the unit area) in which the current target pixel is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b is read and grasped. In this case, as indicated by “r3”, “g3”, and “b3” in FIG. 29 (b-1), each numerical value information of RGB is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1503, the α value set for the current target pixel in the partial addition data PD19 is grasped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (b-2), “α1” is set as the α value.

  In subsequent step S1504, the α value grasped in step S1503 is integrated with respect to each numerical value information of RGB grasped in step S1502. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29 (b-3), the RGB numerical information corresponding to the integration result becomes “α1 × r3”, “α1 × g3”, and “α1 × b3”.

  In subsequent step S1505, numerical information set for the current target pixel in the effect data PD18 is grasped. This numerical information is each numerical information obtained as a result of integrating the numerical value information of α value predetermined for the pixel with respect to each numerical value information of RGB. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (b-4), each numerical value information of RGB is “α2 × r4”, “α2 × g4”, “α2 × b4”.

  In subsequent step S1506, the numerical value information of RGB grasped in step S1505 and the information of each integration result of RGB grasped in step S1504 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29 (b-6), each numerical value information of RGB becomes “α1 × r3 + α2 × r4”, “α1 × g3 + α2 × g4”, “α1 × b3 + α2 × b4”. In subsequent step S1507, the numerical value information of RGB calculated in step S1506 is written in the current target dot.

  Thereafter, in step S1508, it is determined whether drawing has been completed for all pixels of the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18. If not completed, the processing from step S1501 to step S1507 is repeated. If it has been completed, this addition process is terminated.

  After the addition process is executed, the numerical information already stored in the unit area where the effect data PD18 is drawn is reduced to a value corresponding to the α value of the partial addition data PD19. The numerical information obtained as a result of adding the numerical information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical information is set. Thereby, after rendering of the effect data PD18, it is possible to suppress the numerical value information of RGB in the unit areas of the frame regions 82a and 82b from being the maximum value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

  For example, when the numerical information and the α value of the effect data PD18 are suppressed, the effect image becomes familiar with the image to be superimposed, and the visual effect cannot be enhanced by the effect image. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the superimposed image is suppressed by the partial addition data PD19, occurrence of overexposure can be suppressed while enhancing the effect image.

  In addition, a configuration in which numerical information of images to be superimposed is originally set to be suppressed is also conceivable, but in this case, when the image is used without an effect image applied, the numerical information is supported. Limited to color information. On the other hand, by setting the partial addition data PD19 separately as described above, it is difficult to generate restrictions on the superimposed image.

  Further, the partial addition data PD19 has a configuration in which numerical information corresponding to the color information is not set, and numerical information corresponding to the α value is set. Therefore, the data capacity of the partial addition data PD19 is the effect. It is smaller than the data PD18. Therefore, the above excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity required in the NAND flash memory 102.

  Note that a technique other than the technique of applying the partial addition data PD19 may be adopted as a technique for reducing the ratio of reflecting the individual image on the back side. For example, in the configuration in which the α value of the image data can be manipulated in units of pixels in the processing of the VDP 76, the numerical information in the corresponding portion of the individual image on the back side is reduced at a predetermined rate in the processing of the VDP 76. Also good.

  In addition, in the individual image on the back side, the area other than the overlapping part with the individual image on the near side will be affected. Conceivable.

  Further, in the configuration in which the limit values of the frame regions 82a and 82b are the darkest and the minimum value is the brightest, the above-described addition processing is used instead of the above-described addition process so that the individual image on the back side is reflected in the individual image on the near side The subtraction process needs to be executed. In order to suppress overexposure, partial subtraction data needs to be applied instead of the partial addition data PD19.

Instead of the above configuration, not only the α value but also numerical information corresponding to the color information may be set in the partial addition data PD19. In this case, in step S1503 in the second effect addition process, the α value and numerical value information of the target pixel in the partial addition data are grasped, and in step S1504, a fusion calculation process is executed instead of the integration process. . Specifically, when the α value of the partial addition data PD19 is α1, and the color information of the partial addition data PD19 is “r5, g5, b5”, in step S1504,
R: r3 × (1−α1) + r5 × α1
G: g3 × (1−α1) + g5 × α1
B: b3 × (1−α1) + b5 × α1
The calculation for fusion is performed.

And by performing the process of step S1505-step S1507 with respect to the said calculation result,
R: r3 × (1−α1) + r5 × α1 + α2 × r4
G: g3 × (1−α1) + g5 × α1 + α2 × g4
B: b3 × (1−α1) + b5 × α1 + α2 × b4
It becomes.

  Even when the partial addition data PD19 in which numerical information corresponding to the color information is set as described above is used, the timing before rendering the effect data by executing the fusion processing is performed. Since the numerical information already stored in is reduced, the occurrence of overexposure can be suppressed.

<Combined data with multiple effect images>
Next, a configuration for creating composite data in which a plurality of effect images are combined will be described.

  As described above, a plurality of effect images may be displayed in an image for one frame in order to enhance the visual effect. For example, an image representing a blast and a luminescent image may be displayed at the same time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of separately storing each effect data originally set individually in a combined state. Specific processing for creating the composite data and specific processing for using the composite data will be described below.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for multi-effect effects executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the multi-effect effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15). The calculation process for the multiple effect effects is activated when information on the multiple effect effects is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether composite data has been created in the VDP 76. This determination is made by determining whether or not the created determination flag is set in the work RAM 73, but the present invention is not limited to this, and composite data is created in the currently set data table. It may be configured that information on whether or not completed is set.

  If composite data has not been created, a plurality of effect data to be applied this time are grasped based on the currently set data table in step S1602. In the subsequent step S1603, the parameter of each effect data grasped in step S1602 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured corresponding to each effect data in the work RAM 73. Update information for In subsequent step S1604, the multi-effect effect designation information is stored.

  In a succeeding step S1605, it is determined whether or not it is the generation timing of the composite data. Specifically, a plurality of types of timings at which a plurality of effect effects are performed are set, and at each of these timings, there are a timing when the number of individual images other than the effect images is relatively large and the processing load on the VDP 76 is large, and effects There is a timing when the number of individual images other than images is relatively small and the processing load on the VDP 76 is small. The synthetic data creation timing is a timing when the processing load is small.

  If it is determined that it is not the timing for creating the composite data (step S1605: NO), this calculation process is terminated. If it is determined that it is the creation timing of the composite data (step S1605: YES), after the composite data creation designation information is stored in step S1606, this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for multiple effect production is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), a plurality of sprite data is a drawing target, and further, a drawing list including parameter information of these sprite data Is created. In addition, the drawing list includes multiple effect production designation information that is information indicating that multiple effect production should be executed. Further, when the composite data creation designation information is stored, the drawing list includes composite data creation designation information that is information indicating that composite data should be created.

  On the other hand, if the composite data has been created (step S1601: YES), in step S1607, the composite data to be applied this time is grasped. In the subsequent step S1608, the parameters of the composite data grasped in step S1607 are calculated and grasped.

  In subsequent step S1609, additional effect data is grasped based on information set as a case where composite data has already been created in the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1610, the parameter of the additional effect data grasped in step S1609 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured in correspondence with the additional effect data in the work RAM 73 for control. Update the information. That is, when composite data is applied, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 have a margin for the processing time for drawing, and the additional effect data is set using the processing time.

  Thereafter, the multi-effect effect designation information is stored in step S1611, and the composite data use designation information is stored in step S1612.

  When the calculation process for multiple effect production is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the composite data and the additional effect data are to be drawn. A drawing list including parameter information is created. In addition, the drawing list includes plural effect effect designation information, and also includes synthetic data use designation information that is information indicating that synthetic data should be used.

  Next, the setting process for multi-effect effects executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the setting process for multiple effect effects is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). In addition, when a multiple effect effect designation is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the multiple effect effect is activated.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether or not composite data use designation is set in the drawing list. If the composite data use designation is not set, in step S1702, a plurality of effect data designated as the current rendering target and the addresses to which these effect data are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are displayed. To grasp. That is, when a plurality of effect data are drawn simultaneously, the effect data are not set individually in the drawing list, but are set to be processed simultaneously in one processing time.

  In subsequent step S1703, parameters of each effect data are grasped. Thereafter, in step S1704, it is determined whether or not composite data creation designation is set. If the composite data creation designation is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is. If composite data creation designation is set, the process advances to step S1705.

  In step S1705, composite data is created in a state where each parameter grasped in step S1704 is applied to the plurality of effect data grasped in step S1702. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 31B, a composite data area 81c is set in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The composite data created in step S2305 is written in the composite data area 81c. The composite data area 81c stores and holds the written composite data while the power supply to the VRAM 75 is continued, and when other image data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the VRAM 75. This area is not subject to overwriting. Therefore, the composite data once created is stored and held until the power supply to the VRAM 75 is cut off.

  By executing the setting process for multi-effect production as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the respective parameters are applied to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. Each effect data is drawn. An effect image using each effect data is displayed on the display screen G by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data.

  On the other hand, if composite data use designation is set in the drawing list (step S1701: YES), in step S1706, the composite data specified as the current drawing target and the composite data in the composite data area 81c. Know the address where is stored. In subsequent step S1707, the parameters of the combined data are grasped.

  In subsequent step S1708, the additional effect data designated as the current rendering target and the address to which the additional effect data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In other words, when composite data and additional effect data are drawn simultaneously, the composite data and additional effect data are not set individually in the drawing list, but are set to be processed simultaneously in one processing time. Has been. Thereafter, in step S1709, after grasping the parameters of the additional effect data, this setting process is terminated.

  By executing the setting process for multiple effect production as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the composite data with the parameters applied to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. Is drawn, and additional effect data is drawn with the parameters applied. Then, by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, an effect image using the combined data and the additional effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, composite data for displaying a plurality of effect images at the same time is created, and when the subsequent use is performed, the composite data is used so that a plurality of effect data can be obtained each time the execution timing of a plurality of effect effects is reached. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced compared to the configuration for drawing.

  In particular, since the display CPU 72 issues a composite data creation instruction at a timing when the processing load on the VDP 76 is small, it is possible to create composite data while avoiding a processing drop in the VDP 76.

  Further, when a plurality of effect effects are executed using the composite data, an additional effect image using the additional effect data is displayed using the fact that there is a margin in processing time. As a result, more effect images can be applied, and the visual effect of the effect images can be enhanced.

  In addition, the storage capacity required for effect data in the NAND flash memory 102 can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the composite data is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance. Further, since the composite data is created using the effect data set individually, it is possible to use the effect data individually.

  Further, since the composite data is stored in the composite data area 81c after creation, the composite data can be used for a plurality of non-continuous frames after the composite data is created.

  Further, the composite data is created in accordance with each effect data constituting the composite data when it is used for display. Thus, it is not necessary to set the processing timing for creating the composite data separately from the image display.

  Further, the composite data is created after the parameter information is applied to each effect data constituting the composite data. As a result, when composite data is used, parameter information may be derived and applied to the composite data, and it is not necessary to derive and apply parameter information to each effect data constituting the composite data. Therefore, the processing load when using the composite data can be reduced.

  It should be noted that when multiple effect effects are executed using the composite data, the additional effect data may not be drawn. Even in this case, it is easy to adjust the processing time in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 by creating the composite data.

  The synthesized data may be created at a timing different from the timing at which each effect data is used for display, such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

<Partial display of individual images using α data>
Next, a configuration for performing partial display of individual images using α data will be described.

  As already described, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data. α data is set individually for image data that defines individual images, such as background data and sprite data. However, overall α data and partial α data are set for design sprite data. Has been.

  The overall α data and partial α data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining α data. FIG. 32A shows symbol sprite data PD20 corresponding to a predetermined symbol, and FIG. 32B is set in association with the symbol sprite data PD20. 32 (c) shows a case where the overall α data PD21 is applied to the symbol sprite data PD20, and FIGS. 32 (d) to (g) are associated with the symbol sprite data PD20. The set partial α data PD22 to PD25 are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the symbol sprite data PD20 includes an image area PA10 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image, and a frame area PA11 surrounding the image area PA10. The frame area PA11 allows the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to handle the symbol sprite data PD20 as image data defined in a rectangular shape regardless of the outer edge shape of the image area PA10, thereby facilitating the designation of coordinates.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the size of the overall α data PD21 is set so that its outer shape matches the symbol sprite data PD20 to be applied. The overall α data PD21 includes an image corresponding area PA12 occupying the inside of the outer edge part, and a frame corresponding area PA13 occupying the outer edge part, with the outer edge part of the image area PA10 in the design sprite data PD20 to be applied as a boundary. It has.

  For each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13, “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as an α value. On the other hand, “1”, which is non-transparent information, is set as the α value for each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 excluding the outer edge portion, and the α value is set for each pixel included in the outer edge portion. 0 <α value <1, which is partial transmission information, is set.

  By applying the overall α data PD21 to the design sprite data PD20, the α value of each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 is applied to each pixel included in the image area PA10, and the frame area PA11. The α value of each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13 is applied to each pixel included in.

  In this case, as described above, the size of the overall α data PD21 is set so that its outer shape matches the symbol sprite data PD20 to be applied. Therefore, by setting the two data PD20 and 21 so that the size and rotation angle of the two data PD20 and 21 are the same, and the reference pixel such as the center one pixel is overlapped, the overall α data PD21 for the symbol sprite data PD20 is set. Application can be performed, and the processing load related to the setting can be reduced. The same applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

Further, when the symbol sprite data PD20 to which the overall α data PD21 is applied is overlapped with the image data overlapping on the back side of the display screen G, each dot related to the overlap is determined by the overall α data PD21. The numerical information is fused (that is, blended) based on the α value. In particular,
R: “R value of back side image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “R value of front side image” × “α value”
G: “G value of back side image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “G value of front side image” × “α value”
B: “B value of back side image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “B value of front side image” × “α value”
It becomes. The same applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

  By applying the overall α data PD21, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the frame pattern PA11 is in a completely transparent state in the applied pattern CH3, and only the image area PA10 is visible. Further, jaggy generated in the outline of the symbol CH3 is reduced, and the color can be smoothly changed so that the outline of the symbol CH3 is fused with the background. That is, it becomes possible to perform anti-aliasing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 32D to 32G, the sizes of the partial α data PD22 to PD25 are set so that the outer shape thereof matches the symbol sprite data PD20 to be applied. The partial α data PD22 to PD25 include a partial image corresponding region PA14 that occupies the inside of the outer edge portion, with the outer edge portion corresponding to a part of the image region PA10 in the design target sprite data PD20 as a boundary, and the outer edge portion. And a corresponding area PA15 other than a part occupying the outside of the area.

  “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as an α value for each pixel included in the corresponding area PA15 except for a part. On the other hand, in each of the pixels corresponding to the partial image corresponding area PA14, “1” that is non-transparent information is set as an α value in each pixel included in the portion excluding the outer edge portion, and α included in each pixel included in the outer edge portion. As a value, 0 <α value <1, which is partial transmission information, is set.

  Each of the partial α data PD22 to PD25 is different in a portion corresponding to the partial image corresponding area PA14 in the image area PA10 of the symbol sprite data PD20. Specifically, the partial α data PD22 in FIG. 32D corresponds to a quarter of the destination when the image area PA10 is variably displayed, and the partial α data in FIG. 32E. The data PD23 corresponds to the half on the destination side, the partial α data PD24 in FIG. 32 (f) corresponds to the half on the source side, and the partial α data PD25 in FIG. It corresponds to 1/4 of the original side.

  The partial α data PD22 to PD25 set for one symbol sprite data PD20 is not limited to four, and may be two, three, or five or more. Moreover, the number may be one. The combination of the overall α data and the plurality of partial α data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each type of symbol sprite data.

  By using the α data PD22 to PD25 for each part, it is possible to display a part of the symbol. Even when partial display is performed in this way, jaggy that occurs in the outline of the symbol is reduced within the range of the partial display, and the color changes smoothly so that the outline of the symbol merges with the background. It becomes possible to make it. That is, even when partial display is performed, antialiasing can be performed.

  Hereinafter, processing in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 when α data is applied will be described.

  First, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the symbol calculation process is a process executed in step S617 of the task process (FIG. 15), as described above, and calculates various parameters for symbols that are subject to variable display in each game round. This is a process to derive.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether it is time to execute partial display. Whether or not it is the timing is determined by referring to the information specified by the current pointer in the currently set data table.

  If it is not time to execute partial display (partial display), in step S1802, the symbol sprite data to be controlled this time is grasped. In subsequent step S1803, various parameters such as coordinates, size, and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all the recognized symbol sprite data, and information on the derived parameters is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the symbol sprite data. The control information is updated by writing in the designated area.

  In subsequent step S1804, overall α data corresponding to each of the symbol sprite data acquired in step S1802 is acquired. In this case, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 also grasps information on the address to which each overall α data is transferred. Thereafter, in step S1805, the combination designation information is stored in the register, and then the symbol calculation process is terminated.

  When the symbol calculation processing is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1802 is the drawing target, and the parameter information of each symbol sprite data. A drawing list including the type and address of the overall α data and the combination designation information indicating that the overall α data should be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is time to execute partial display (step S1801: YES), the coordinates and size of the partial display area are grasped in step S1806. The partial display area is an area that is displayed so as to divide a part of the display screen G (see an area partitioned by a frame indicated by reference numeral PL5 in FIG. 34B).

  In the subsequent step S1807, the symbol sprite data currently displayed on the display screen G including the partial display area is grasped. In this pachinko machine 10, when displaying the partial display area, the design is displayed only in the partial display area, and the background and effect characters are displayed on the display screen G outside the partial display area. Is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which symbols are displayed outside the partial display area.

  In subsequent step S1808, various parameters such as coordinates, size, and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1807, and information on the derived parameters is associated with the symbol sprite data in the work RAM 73. The information for control is updated by writing in the reserved area. In this case, the size information is calculated so that the symbols displayed in the partial display area are displayed in a size smaller than the normal display state in which the partial display area is not displayed.

  In a succeeding step S1809, it is determined whether or not the partial α data needs to be set. If it is necessary to set the partial α data, in step S1810, the partial α data corresponding to the symbol sprite data that needs to be set and corresponding to the creation target of the current drawing list Grasp alpha data. In this case, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 also grasps information on the address to which each partial α data is transferred.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1809 or after the processing in step S1810 is executed, it is determined in step S1811 whether or not the overall α data needs to be set. Even if the symbol sprite is displayed in the partial display area, it is necessary to set the overall α data for those that are not applicable for the partial α data. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1811. do. If it is necessary to set the overall α data, the process of step S1804 is executed to grasp the overall α data.

  Regardless of whether the overall α data is grasped or not grasped in step S1804, the symbol designating process is terminated after the combination designation information is finally stored in step S1805.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), in addition to the information described as the case where only the overall α data is applied, a partial display area should be set. A drawing list is created that includes information, parameter information of the partial display area, the type and address of the partial alpha data, and combination designation information indicating that the partial alpha data should be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data And transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Incidentally, in the drawing list, not only the data content corresponding to the image displayed in the partial display area but also the data corresponding to the background and effect characters displayed outside the partial display area are set. In this case, the image displayed in the partial display area is displayed as if it is present on the front side of the display screen G compared to the image displayed outside the partial display area. The image data corresponding to the outside of the partial display area is first, and the image data corresponding to the partial display area is later.

  Next, symbol sprite data setting processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The design sprite data setting process is executed in the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Also, the symbol sprite data setting process is started when the synthesis designation is set in the drawing list.

  In step S1901, the current drawing target symbol sprite data shown in the drawing list is grasped. In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined whether or not the overall α data is applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in the step S1901.

  When applying the overall α data, in step S1903, the overall α data is read from the designated address, and synthesized with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. Thus, the α value set for each pixel of the overall α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the symbol sprite data. Incidentally, when synthesizing the overall α data, the overall α data overlaps with the entire symbol sprite data. The same applies to the partial α data.

  On the other hand, when the partial α data is applied, in step S1904, the partial α data is read from the designated address and is synthesized with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. Thereby, the α value set for each pixel of the partial α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the symbol sprite data.

  After executing Step S1903 or Step S1904, the process proceeds to Step S1905. In step S1905, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) to be referred to when the composite sprite data created in step S1903 or step S1904 is written in the frame regions 82a and 82b are grasped. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Various parameters grasped in step S1905 are information set for the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1901. That is, information on various parameters necessary for writing to the frame regions 82a and 82b is set for the symbol sprite data, but is not set for the overall α data and the partial α data. Information on various parameters set for the data is applied to the composite sprite data. As a result, the amount of information specified in the drawing list can be reduced and the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be reduced as compared to the configuration in which various parameter information is set for the overall α data and the partial α data. It is done.

  Incidentally, when the design sprite data for which the above setting process has been completed is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the background data and the effect data already written in the frame areas 82a and 82b have already been described. An operation for blending (blending operation) is performed.

  Next, how a part of the symbol is displayed using the partial display area PL5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which a part of the symbols is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the partial display area PL 5 is displayed as a range smaller than the display screen G at a position near the corner of the display screen G. Further, the outer edge of the partial display area PL5 is not in contact with the outer edge of the display screen G, and a gap is formed between all the outer edges of the partial display area PL5 and the outer edge of the display screen G.

  In the partial display area PL5, the symbols CH3 and CH4 are displayed in a variable direction in a predetermined direction. The predetermined direction is the same as that in the case of performing variable display of symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without displaying the partial display area PL5, but may be different directions.

  The symbols CH3 and CH4 variably displayed in the partial display area PL5 are displayed so as to appear from a predetermined side of the partial display area PL5 and disappear from the opposite side. In this case, the symbols CH3 and CH4 are partially displayed so as not to protrude from the partial display area PL5.

  Incidentally, although omitted in FIG. 34B for convenience of explanation, in the area outside the partial display area PL5 on the display screen G, a predetermined background and an image of a character for presentation are displayed. In this case, the images of the predetermined background and effect character are displayed between the peripheral edge of the display screen G and the peripheral edge of the partial display area PL5 in the corner portion where the partial display area PL5 is set. You may make it do. Further, a predetermined background or effect character image may be displayed on both sides of the partial display area PL5.

  As described above, by combining the partial α data with the symbol, the symbol can be partially displayed using the α data that can be anti-aliased.

  Further, as already described, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 cannot recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, and can recognize only the coordinates of the reference pixel. If it does so, the process which divides | segments only some symbol sprite data in the process on a program cannot be performed. On the other hand, a configuration in which a plurality of symbol sprite data necessary for partial display is previously set for one symbol is also conceivable. However, symbol sprite data is data including color information, and has a data capacity larger than that of α data in which only an α value is set for each pixel. Therefore, by performing partial display using the α data, partial display can be performed while suppressing the data capacity of the image data and further the data capacity required in the NAND flash memory 102.

  Further, when performing the partial display, the VDP 76 only has to read the partial α data and apply it to the image data to be applied. Therefore, partial display can be performed while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the VDP 76.

  Note that a configuration in which anti-aliasing is not performed when the partial α data is applied may be employed. Further, the application target of the partial α data is not limited to the symbol, and may be a background character or an effect character. Also, the parameter information may be set independently for the overall α data and the partial α data.

<First Alternative Form for Partial Display>
A first alternative form for performing partial display will be described.

  FIGS. 35A and 35B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first alternative form. FIGS. 35A and 35C show symbol sprite data, and FIGS. 35B and 35D show overall α data. FIGS. 35E to 35H show the partial α data.

  In this different form, as shown in FIGS. 35A to 35H, the overall α data PD28 and PD29 are individually set for the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, and the partial α data PD30. To PD33 are set in common to the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. Incidentally, the initial size stored in the NAND flash memory 102 is the same for all the data PD26 to PD33. The data structure is the same for the symbol sprite data other than the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27 illustrated in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (c).

  In the case of this configuration, when partial display is not performed, anti-aliasing can be performed by synthesizing the corresponding α data PD28 and PD29 corresponding to the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. In the case of partial display, first, the corresponding overall α data PD28 and PD29 are synthesized, and then the partial α data PD30 to PD33 corresponding to the parts to be partially displayed are synthesized, thereby providing anti-aliasing. While performing, partial display can be performed using the common partial α data PD30 to PD33.

  According to the above configuration, compared to the configuration in which the partial α data is individually set for the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, the types of the partial α data PD30 to PD33 can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for storing the data PD30 to PD33.

<Second alternative form for partial display>
A second alternative form for performing partial display will be described.

  FIG. 36 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second alternative form, and FIG. 36 (b) is a flowchart showing a setting process of symbol sprite data in the second alternative form.

  In this alternative embodiment, not using α data but using α palette data, anti-aliasing is performed and a part of the symbol is displayed. The α palette data PD34 is obtained by adding α value information to each color information of 256 colors of palette data as shown in FIG. 36 (a-1).

  In the design sprite data PD35, as shown in FIG. 36 (a-2), an image area PA16 and a frame area PA17 are set, but color information not set in the image area PA16 is set in the frame area PA17. Has been. On the other hand, in the overall α palette data, complete transmission information is set as an α value for the color information set in the frame area PA17. In the image area PA16, “1” that is non-transparent information is set as the α value in the color information of the portion excluding the outer edge portion, and partial transmission information is set as the α value in the color information of the outer edge portion. 0 <α value <1 is set. By synthesizing the overall α palette data with the symbol sprite data PD35, anti-aliasing can be performed as shown in FIG. 36 (a-3).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 36A-2, a plurality of partial areas PA18 to PA21 in which the same color information is not used are set in the symbol sprite data PD35. On the other hand, complete transmission information is set as an α value for color information set in some partial areas PA18 to PA21 and frame area PA17, and color information set in other areas. For this, partial alpha pallet data in which opaque information is set as an alpha value is prepared. A plurality of types of partial α palette data are prepared so that partial areas PA18 to PA21 to which the α value of complete transmission information is applied are different from each other. By synthesizing the partial α palette data with the symbol sprite data PD35, as shown in FIG. 36 (a-4), a symbol can be partially displayed.

  Hereinafter, the symbol sprite data setting process in the VDP 76 executed when α palette data is used will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2001, the current drawing target symbol sprite data shown in the drawing list is grasped. In a succeeding step S2002, it is determined whether or not the overall α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in the step S2001.

  When the overall α palette data is applied, in step S2003, the overall α palette data is read from the designated address and synthesized with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. As a result, the α value set by adding to each color information in the overall α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data.

  On the other hand, when the partial α palette data is applied, in step S2004, the partial α palette data is read from the designated address and synthesized with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. As a result, the α value set by adding to each color information in the partial α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data.

  After executing step S2003 or step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) to be referred to when the composite sprite data created in step S2003 or step S2004 is written in the frame regions 82a and 82b are grasped. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  By executing the above process, the overall α palette data or the partial α palette data is combined with the symbol sprite data. Even in this configuration, although the data configuration of the symbol sprite data is limited as compared with the case where α data is used, the antialiasing and partial display of the symbol sprite can be performed. Also, partial display settings can be made in accordance with the color information settings.

<Another form for displaying character transitions using alpha data>
Another mode for performing character transition display using α data will be described.

  FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing a character transition process executed by the VDP 76, and FIGS. 37B to 37F are explanatory diagrams for explaining how character transition display is performed. The character transition process is executed in the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). The character transition process is started when the character transition designation is set in the drawing list.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, in the character transition process, first, in step S2101, the process of superimposing the character sprite data PD36 is executed. In the character sprite data PD36, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), a plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction, specifically in the horizontal direction, and the outer shape is rectangular. The data is defined such that the periphery of the plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 is surrounded by the frame area PA27. In step S2101, two identical character sprite data PD36 are read out, and the data are set so that all of them overlap each other.

  In subsequent step S2102, palette data is set in character sprite data PA36 on the back side. As a result, the same color information is set for each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PA36 on the back side. In subsequent step S2103, the α data for the whole is synthesized with the character sprite data PD36 on the back side. Thereby, anti-aliasing is performed on each character area PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite on the back side.

  In the subsequent step S2104, palette data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the front side. The palette data is different from the palette data set in step S2102 in the color information set for each numerical value information of the bitmap data. Thereby, color information different from the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the back side is set for the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PD36 on the near side.

  In a succeeding step S2105, it is determined whether or not the overall α data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the near side. In the case of synthesizing the overall α data, in step S2106, after synthesizing the overall α data with the near-side character sprite data PD36, the character transition process ends. The overall α data is the same as the overall α data used in step S2103. Thereby, anti-aliasing is performed on the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the near side.

  When the process of step S2106 is executed, the character areas PA22 to PA26 set in the character sprite data PD36 on the back side are not displayed on the display screen G, and the character sprite data on the near side is not displayed. The character areas PA22 to PA26 set in the PD 36 are displayed. In this case, the character is displayed with the color information set in the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PD36 on the near side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the overall α data is not to be combined, the character transition processing is performed after combining the partial α data with the character sprite data PD36 on the near side in step S2107. finish. As shown in FIGS. 37 (c) and 37 (d), the partial α data PD37 and PD38 include complete transmission information as an α value for each pixel in a region corresponding to a part of the character regions PA22 to PA26 and the frame region PA27. Is set. Further, in each of the other character areas PA22 to PA26, the non-transparent information is set as an α value for each pixel included in the portion excluding the outer edge portion, and the partial transparency is set as an α value for each pixel included in the outer edge portion. Information 0 <α value <1 is set. The partial α data PD37 and PD38 are set in plural types so that the character areas PA22 to PA26 are erased one character at a time in a predetermined direction, specifically from the left.

  When the processing in step S2107 is executed, the character area of the back character sprite is displayed on the display screen G for the character area that is not displayed in the front character sprite. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 37 (e) and (f), some characters continued from the left side are displayed with the color information set in each character area in the character sprite on the back side. The remaining characters are displayed in the color information set in each character information in the character sprite on the near side. Alternatively, all characters are displayed in the color information set in each character information in the character sprite on the back side.

  As described above, karaoke-like character transition display can be performed using the α data. Incidentally, the above character transition display is executed when a karaoke-like effect is performed, and an effect is provided in which the corresponding lyrics portion changes color according to the melody output from the speaker unit 45.

  The character sprite data PD36 may not be set in an overlapping manner, but a single character sprite data PD36 may be set and the display range thereof may be narrowed sequentially. In this case, each character area is displayed so as to be sequentially erased, instead of being displayed so that different colors are sequentially assigned to the respective character areas.

  Further, when each character area is displayed so that different colors are sequentially added, first, by applying α data in which the character sprite data PD36 on the front side is not displayed, the character sprite data PD36 on the back side is changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the α data to be applied is changed so that each character area of the character sprite data PD36 on the near side is sequentially displayed as a display target. In this case, when the character area of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side is to be displayed, the character area to be displayed in the character sprite data PD36 on the front side corresponds to the character corresponding to the character sprite data PD36 on the back side. The area may be overwritten, or the color information of both character areas may be blended.

  Further, the anti-aliasing may not be performed on the near-side character sprite data, and the contour portion of each character area may not be affected by the back-side image.

<Configuration for performing wipe switching effect>
Next, a configuration for performing the wipe switching effect will be described.

  The wipe switching effect means that at the timing when the background image and a large number of characters are changed, the image at the previous display timing is gradually deleted, and instead, the image at the subsequent display timing is gradually used by using the deleted area. It is an effect that is displayed on the screen.

  A link display function is used for the wipe switching effect. The link display function is a function that integrates the subordinate side image data (relative sprite) with one type of reference side image data (absolute sprite) and allows the VDP 76 to handle it as one piece of image data. is there. When a plurality of image data are integrated by the link display function, the dependent image data is visually displayed only within the image range of the reference image data. Further, when the image data is integrated by the link display function, the process performed on the reference side image data is also applied to the dependent side image data.

  Further, in the wipe switching effect, the alpha data for the wipe switching effect is used to gradually display the image at the subsequent display timing while gradually deleting the image at the previous display timing. The alpha data for the wipe switching effect is synthesized with the reference side image data at the previous display timing. As already described, the subordinate side image data is a single piece of image data integrated with the reference side image data. Since it is handled, the α data is also applied to the subordinate image data.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38, each image data constituting the image at the previous display timing, each image data constituting the image at the subsequent display timing, and α data for the wipe switching effect will be described.

  FIG. 38A shows the image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image at the previous display timing. Among these, the image data PD39 is image data for displaying the rearmost image at the previous display timing, and is used as the reference side image data in the link display function (hereinafter, the image data PD39 is referred to as the reference side image data). PD39). The plurality of image data PD40 to PD42 are image data for displaying a decorative image displayed on the backmost image, and are used as subordinate image data in the link display function (hereinafter, referred to as “delay side image data”). The image data PD40 to PD42 are referred to as subordinate image data PD40 to PD42).

  By applying the link display function to these image data PD39 to PD42, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are visually displayed only within the image range of the reference side image data PD39 as already described. It becomes. Even if the entire dependent-side image data is included in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b, a portion that protrudes from the reference-side image data PD39 is not a drawing target.

  FIG. 38B shows the image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image at the post display timing. The image data PD43 is image data for displaying the backmost image at the post-display timing, and the plurality of image data PD44 and PD45 are image data for displaying a decorative image displayed on the backmost image. It is. The link display function is not applied to the image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image at the subsequent display timing.

  FIGS. 38C and 38D show the alpha data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effects. Since the α data PD46 and PD47 are synthesized with the reference side image data PD39, they have the same size and outer shape as the reference side image data PD39 at the time of initial setting. Also, each α data PD46, PD47 has completely transparent areas PA28, PA30 in which the α value of each pixel is set to “0” which is completely transparent information, and “1” where the α value of each pixel is opaque information. Non-transparent areas PA29 and PA31. In each of the α data PD46 and PD47, areas inside the boundary line are impermeable areas PA29 and PA31, and areas outside are the completely transmissive areas PA28 and PA30. Each of the α data PD46 and PD47 is switched and used every time the image for one frame is updated when executing the wipe switching effect, but the α data PD46 used at the previous timing is later. The sizes of the completely transmissive areas PA28 and PA30 are set larger than the α data PD47 used at the timing.

  A specific processing configuration for executing the wipe switching effect using each image data will be described.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a wipe switching effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the wipe switching effect is executed in the background calculation process in step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15). The calculation process for the wipe switching effect is activated when information on the wipe switching effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S2201, based on the currently set data table, the image data PD43 to PD45 corresponding to the image at the subsequent display timing are grasped, and the image data PD43 to PD45 are grasped as the priority side for drawing. To do. In subsequent step S2202, the parameters of the image data PD43 to PD45 grasped as the post-display timing are calculated and derived, and information on the derived parameters is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the image data PD43 to PD45. The information for control is updated by writing to.

  Thereafter, in steps S2203 to S2209, processing for instructing drawing of an image at the previous display timing is executed. First, in step S2203, the reference-side image data PD39 is grasped from the images at the previous display timing based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S2204, the parameter of the reference side image data PD39 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured in correspondence with the reference image data PD39 in the work RAM 73 to obtain control information. Update.

  In the subsequent step S2205, the subordinate-side image data PD40 to PD42 are grasped from the images of the previous display timing based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S2206, the parameters of the subordinate-side image data PD40 to PD42 are calculated and derived, and information on the derived parameters is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the subordinate-side image data PD40 to PD42. To update the control information.

  Thereafter, in step S2207, link designation information is stored. The link designation information is information for designating execution of image data drawing using the link display function. In the subsequent step S2208, the alpha data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect corresponding to the current drawing instruction are grasped based on the currently set data table. The wipe switching effect α data PD46 and PD47 are set in association with the reference side image data PD39, and the application target is the reference side image data PD39.

  Thereafter, after the wipe designation information is stored in step S2209, this calculation process is terminated. The wipe designation information is information for instructing to combine the alpha data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect with the reference side image data PD39.

  When the calculation process for the wipe switching effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), a drawing list for drawing an image corresponding to the wipe switching effect is created. The drawing list will be described below. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing list created when a wipe switching effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of image data is set in association with each drawing order. In this case, since each image data constituting the image at the post-display timing is grasped as the priority side in step S2201 of the arithmetic processing, each image data constituting the image at the post-display timing is also in the drawing list. The drawing order is set earlier than the image data constituting the image at the previous display timing.

  Each image data constituting the image at the previous display timing is designated as a link. When the link is designated, the image data related to the link designation is processed within the range of one processing time of the drawing process (FIG. 13) in the VDP 76, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure divided and processed by times. Although not shown in the figure, the parameter P (4) of the background data corresponding to the reference-side image data among the image data constituting the image at the previous display timing includes α data for wipe switching effects. Information is set.

  Incidentally, the symbol sprite data is set in the drawing order after each image data constituting the image at the previous display timing. Therefore, an image is displayed in which the symbol variation display is executed in front of the background image on which the wipe switching effect is performed.

  Next, the setting process for the wipe switching effect executed in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, at the timing when the setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed, each image data constituting the image at the display timing specified in the current drawing list is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. It has been done.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether link designation is set in the drawing list. If the link designation is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is. If the link designation is set, in step S2302, the reference side image data PD39 designated as the current drawing target and the reference side image data PD39 are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address. In a succeeding step S2303, the parameters of the reference side image data PD39 are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S2304, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 designated as the current drawing target and the address where the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are transferred in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In subsequent step S2305, each parameter of the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 is grasped.

  In subsequent step S2306, link setting is performed. As a result, the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 grasped in step S2304 are linked to the reference image data PD39 grasped in step S2302. Incidentally, at the time of this linking, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 to which the parameter grasped in step S2305 is applied are linked to the reference side image data PD39 to which the parameter grasped in step S2303 is applied. .

  In a succeeding step S2307, it is determined whether or not the wipe designation is set. If the wipe designation is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is. If the wipe designation is set, in step S2308, the alpha data PD46, PD47 for wipe switching effect designated this time and the alpha data PD46, PD47 are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address you have. Then, the α data read based on the grasped address is combined with the reference side image data PD39 to which each of the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 is linked. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Next, the state of the wipe switching effect using the link display function will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing before the wipe switching effect is started, the image PC12 at the previous display timing is displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, in front of the image PC 12 at the previous display timing, the symbol variation display is performed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, when the wipe switching effect is started, after the image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image PC13 at the post display timing are drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b, the reference side image data is drawn. The image data in the state where the subordinate-side image data PD40 to PD42 are linked to the PD39 and the alpha data PD46 for wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 38C is combined is drawn.

  In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 at the preceding display timing are drawn so as to overlap with the image data PD43 to PD45 at the subsequent display timing, but the fusion calculation as described above is executed at the time of the drawing. Is done. Therefore, the numerical information of the image data at the subsequent display timing remains as it is for each dot corresponding to the pixel with which the completely transparent area PA28 is synthesized. On the other hand, since the numerical value information of the pixel in which the opaque region PA29 is synthesized at the previous display timing is overwritten with respect to the drawing target dot, the numerical information of the image data at the subsequent display timing is deleted and the previous display is performed. Timing image data is written. Thus, as shown in FIG. 42B, a wipe image is displayed in which the outside of the boundary line is the image PC13 at the post-display timing, and the inside of the boundary line is the image PC12 at the front display timing. In addition, in front of the wipe image, the symbol variation display is performed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, the drawing process is executed by using the wipe change effect α data PD47 shown in FIG. 38D instead of the wipe change effect α data PD46 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the area in which the image PC12 at the subsequent display timing is displayed is widened instead of the area in which the image PC12 at the previous display timing is displayed.

  As described above, the background image switching mode is gradually changed over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect, whereby the background image switching mode can be made novel and the background image switching mode can be changed. Diversification is also possible.

  Further, since the image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image at the front side display timing are linked, and the α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect are combined with the linked image data, The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the α data for wipe switching effects is individually synthesized for the image data PD39 to PD42.

  Further, after the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear display timing are simply drawn on the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b, the image data PD39 to PD42 at the front display timing are drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b. It is a configuration. That is, the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear display timing may be drawn as usual according to the drawing list. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration.

  Note that the α data may be applied individually to the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 for the purpose of anti-aliasing or partial display. In addition, the link designation may be made for the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear display timing.

  Further, the wipe switching direction is not limited to the configuration in which the image at the previous display timing is narrowed from the outside to the inside over a plurality of frames, and may be configured to be narrowed from the inside to the outside. It is good also as a structure which becomes narrow from one predetermined side of this to the one side opposite to it.

<Configuration for smoothly moving and displaying sprites>
Next, a configuration for smoothly moving and displaying the sprite will be described.

  When displaying an animation in which the sprite is moving in a predetermined movement direction, the sprite is drawn at a position shifted by a predetermined dot in the movement direction for each frame or for each of a plurality of frames. A sprite for smooth movement is set as the sprite.

  The sprite for smooth movement will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the smooth movement sprite CH5, and FIGS. 43B and 43C show the sprite data PD48 and PD49 for displaying the smooth movement sprite CH5. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image representing a cloud displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction over time. Further, the display size is smaller than that of the other individual image PC 14 displayed simultaneously as an image for one frame. In addition, when the sprite CH5 for smooth movement and other individual images PC14 are displayed, the symbols are variably displayed on the near side, but the individual image corresponding to the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is The display size is smaller than the design. In addition, the smooth movement sprite CH5 is set such that the number of image updates required to move one dot is greater than the number of symbols. That is, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is displayed in a state where the movement speed is slower than the symbol.

  The smooth movement sprite CH5 is not limited to an individual image representing a cloud, but is an individual image representing another object such as an airplane as long as it is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction. There may be.

  A plurality of sprite data is set as image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. Specifically, two pieces of sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set. Both the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are used to represent the smooth moving sprite CH5. The second sprite data PD49 is based on the frame regions 82a and 82b in the moving direction with respect to the first sprite data PD48. This corresponds to the state of moving half a dot.

  Both the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are data shifted by half a dot due to the difference in the α value at the boundary portion. Comparing the two sprite data PD48 and PD49 by taking each pixel constituting the same boundary as an example, as shown in FIGS. 43B and 43C, the α values of the pixels ahead in the moving direction are different. ing.

  As described above, when the α value is “0”, it corresponds to the complete transmission information, and the pixels with the α value “0” transmit all of the overlapping images on the back side of the display screen G. On the other hand, when the α value is “1”, it corresponds to the non-transparent information, and at the pixel having the α value “1”, the overlapping images are filled in the back side of the display screen G. In addition, when 0 <α value <1, the overlapping image is transmitted on the back side of the display screen G in a state where the α value is semi-transparent.

  Incidentally, when superimposing the sprite CH5 for smooth movement on the back side image, the calculation for fusion is executed. The fusion calculation is as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 43B, the first sprite data PD48 has an α value at the boundary portion, whereas the second sprite data PD49 has a boundary as shown in FIG. 43C. The α value of the portion is set to a value corresponding to a state in which the portion is shifted by a half dot with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b in the moving direction. As a result, when the second sprite data PD49 is set at the same position as the coordinates where the first sprite data PD48 is set, as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIGS. The smooth moving sprite CH5 is visually recognized as if it moved half a dot with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b or a corresponding amount with respect to the display screen G as a reference.

  Incidentally, the second sprite data PD49 is created by magnifying the first sprite data PD48 twice, shifting it by one dot with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b, and then halving it. .

  Next, a processing configuration for performing smooth movement display using each of the sprite data PD48 and PD49 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a smooth movement calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The smooth movement calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15). The smooth movement calculation process is started when information on smooth movement is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the smooth movement display. This determination is made based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, the progress target flag area set in the work RAM 73 is cleared in step S2402. In the subsequent step S2403, the numerical information of the progress counter set in the work RAM 73 is initialized.

  In the subsequent step S2404, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as the current drawing target. In the subsequent step S2405, by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter, the coordinate information of the first sprite data PD48 is calculated and derived, and the derived coordinate information is obtained in the work RAM 73 by the first sprite data PD48. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the above. Incidentally, the coordinate information is set so as to correspond one-to-one with the numerical information of the progress counter.

  Thereafter, in step S2406, a parameter other than the coordinate information is calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the information for the derived parameter is written in the secured area to update the control information. . Further, in step S2407, after storing the smooth movement designation information, this calculation process is terminated. When the above process is executed, the first sprite data PD48 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list, and initial value coordinates are set as the coordinates. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing, it is determined in step S2408 whether the progress target flag is set. If the progress target flag is not set, this means that the first sprite data PD48 has been set in the previous frame, and the process advances to step S2409.

  In step S2409, a progress target flag is set. In the subsequent step S2410, the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as the current drawing target. In the subsequent step S2411, the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 is grasped, and the grasped coordinate information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the second sprite data PD49. Update information for In this case, since the progress counter update process has not been executed, information on the same coordinates as the information on the coordinates on which the first sprite data PD48 was drawn in the previous frame is obtained.

  Thereafter, in step S2412, parameters other than coordinate information are calculated and derived for the second sprite data PD49, and the information for the derived parameters is written in the secured area to update the control information. . Further, in step S2407, after storing the smooth movement designation information, this calculation process is terminated. When the above processing is executed, the second sprite data PD49 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list, and the same coordinates as the previous frame are set as the coordinates. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  If it is determined in step S2408 that the progress target flag is set, this means that the second sprite data PD49 has been set in the previous frame, and thus the process proceeds to step S2413.

  In step S2413, the progress target flag is cleared. In a succeeding step S2414, the progress counter is updated so that 1 is added. In the subsequent step S2415, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as the current drawing target. In subsequent step S2416, by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter updated in step S2414, the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 is calculated and derived, and the derived coordinate information is secured as described above. Control information is updated by writing to the area. In this case, information of coordinates that have advanced by one dot with respect to the coordinates set in the previous frame with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b in the movement direction is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S2417, parameters other than the coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the information for the derived parameter is written in the secured area to update the control information. . Further, in step S2407, after storing the smooth movement designation information, this calculation process is terminated. When the above processing is executed, in the drawing list, the first sprite data PD48 is set as a drawing target, and the coordinates are shifted by one dot from the coordinates set in the previous frame as the coordinates in the moving direction. Is set. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  Next, the setting process for smooth movement executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The smooth movement setting process is executed in the content grasping process in step S504 in the drawing process (FIG. 13). Also, the smooth movement setting process is started when smooth movement designation is set in the drawing list.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the current drawing target is the first sprite data PD48. If it is the first sprite data PD48, the process proceeds to step S2502, where the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as a drawing target, and the first sprite data PD48 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address. On the other hand, if it is not the first sprite data PD48, the process proceeds to step S2503, where the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as a drawing target, and the second sprite data PD49 in the change area 81b in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address that has been forwarded.

  After executing the processing of step S2502 or step S2503, in step S2504, the coordinates of the current drawing target are grasped. In step S2505, other parameters are grasped, and then this setting processing is terminated.

  By executing the setting process for smooth movement, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the current sprite data among the sprite data PD48 and PD49 for the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b. Data is drawn at the specified coordinates. In this case, as shown in FIG. 45B, in the first frame, the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinate in the movement direction becomes “n”, and the coordinate in the movement direction is set in the second frame. The second sprite data PD49 is set so as to be the same at “n”. Also, in the third frame, the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinate in the moving direction is “n + 1”, and in the fourth frame, the second sprite data PD is set so that the coordinate in the moving direction is “n + 1”. The sprite data PD49 is set. Then, after the first sprite data PD48 and the second sprite data PD49 are alternately set for the same coordinates, the state in which the moving direction is updated by one dot is repeated. As a result, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is visually recognized as if it is progressing by half a dot with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b for each frame or as much as the corresponding amount with reference to the display screen G. Smooth movement display is possible.

  In particular, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement has a smaller display size than the other individual images PC14 displayed at the same time, so that one dot or the display screen G is displayed for each frame on the basis of the frame regions 82a and 82b. In the configuration in which the movement corresponding to one dot is performed as a reference, there is a concern that the movement amount with respect to its own area becomes a large ratio, and the movement becomes conspicuous as rattling. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, such inconvenience is not caused, and the sprite CH5 can be moved and displayed smoothly.

  The sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image representing a cloud. When the frame rate is lowered as if the cloud is moving slowly, the frame regions 82a and 82b are used as a reference at the timing of movement. In the configuration of moving by one dot or the amount corresponding to the one dot on the basis of the display screen G, there is a concern that it may become noticeable as rattling. On the other hand, according to this configuration, even if the movement is performed by one dot or a number corresponding to each frame, the movement by less than one dot is performed with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b. The sprite CH5 can be moved and displayed smoothly.

  Incidentally, as a configuration for reducing the frame rate, specifically, the same coordinate information is applied to the first sprite data PD48 for the first plurality of frames, and the same coordinate information is the second information. When the second plurality of frames are applied to the sprite data PD49, a configuration in which the coordinate information is advanced by one dot is conceivable. In this case, the first plurality of frames and the second plurality of frames may be the same number or different numbers. However, if it is desired to display the smooth moving sprite CH5 as if it is traveling at a constant speed, it is preferable that the first plurality of frames and the second plurality of frames be the same number.

  Moreover, the smooth movement display as described above can be realized only by alternately drawing the sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot. That is, the above excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complexity of the processing configuration. Further, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 can be created by a simple method of making the outer edge portions have different α values.

  Also, since the difference between the two sprite data PD48 and PD49 is for half a dot, the apparent amount of movement is the same between when switching from one to the other and when switching from the other to one. Can do.

  The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot are provided, and other sprite data shifted by less than one dot such as a quarter dot or a quarter dot may be provided. . Further, in addition to the reference sprite data, a plurality of sprite data for less than 1 dot, such as 1/4 dot, half dot, and 3/4 dot, may be provided so that the amount of movement is different. .

  In the configuration in which the number of dots in the frame regions 82a and 82b and the number of dots in the display screen G correspond one-to-one, the second sprite data PD49 is based on the display screen G with respect to the first sprite data PD48. As shown in FIG.

  Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame regions 82a and 82b is smaller than the number of dots on the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is shifted by half a dot with respect to the first sprite data PD48 on the basis of the display screen G. It is good also as a structure set as data. In this case, both the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data shifted by less than a half dot with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b. Further, both the sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data shifted by less than one dot instead of half a dot with respect to the display screen G.

  Further, in the configuration in which the number of dots in the frame regions 82a and 82b is larger than the number of dots on the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is shifted by half a dot with respect to the first sprite data PD48 with respect to the display screen G It is good also as a structure set as data. In this case, both the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data shifted by a half dot or more with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b. Further, both the sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data shifted by less than one dot instead of half a dot with respect to the display screen G.

  Further, both the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are not stored in the memory module 74 in advance, but only one is stored in advance, and the other is obtained from one sprite data after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is good also as a structure created and preserve | saved separately. In this case, although it is necessary to create the one sprite data and save it separately, the processing load increases. However, the memory capacity required for storing the sprite data in the memory module 74 can be reduced.

  In addition, the above-described configuration for smooth movement may be applied to a sprite that is displayed so that a part moves instead of a sprite that is displayed so that the whole moves.

  In addition, the individual image PC14 that is displayed simultaneously with the smooth movement sprite CH5 and larger in size than the sprite CH5 is displayed as if it has moved over a predetermined period, that is, the viewpoint changes slowly. It is good also as composition to be. In this case, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement may be configured such that the number of image updates required to move one dot is set more than that for the individual image PC14. That is, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement may be configured to move and display in a state where the movement speed is slower than that of the individual image PC14. In this configuration, since a small individual image is moved and displayed at a slower speed than a large individual image, there is a concern that shakiness due to movement of one dot is noticeable, but as described above, it is less than one dot. By preparing the shifted sprite data PD48 and PD49 and using them alternately, it is possible to suppress the above-described rattling.

<Configuration for zooming in using Scaler 97>
Next, a configuration for performing a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 will be described.

  As described above, the VDP 76 outputs an image signal to the symbol display device 31 on the basis of the drawing data created in the output frame regions 82a and 82b, and displays the above-mentioned image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. A display circuit 94 for displaying an image corresponding to the drawing data is provided (see FIG. 4). Incidentally, the image signal is a signal including gradation data for determining a display color in each dot (each pixel) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and is output to the symbol display device 31 based on a predetermined clock signal. .

  The display circuit 94 converts the number of pixels of the drawing data read from the frame regions 82a and 82b to be output into the number of pixels specified by the display CPU 72, and also sets each dot constituting the liquid crystal display unit 31a of the symbol display device 31. A scaler 97 for generating gradation data for each pixel is provided.

  The scaler 97 is provided as a dedicated circuit for resolution adjustment in the display circuit 94. As shown in FIG. 4, the scaler 97 includes a resolution adjustment buffer 97a. When gradation data is generated by the scaler 97, the drawing data created in the output frame regions 82a and 82b is transferred to the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and gradation data for the designated number of pixels. The drawing data is converted so that In this conversion, linear interpolation processing is executed. Specifically, the number of pixels can be converted using bilinear filtering.

  Based on the gradation data created in the resolution adjustment buffer 97 a, an image signal is generated by the image signal output unit 98 provided in the display circuit 94 and output to the symbol display device 31. An image for one frame is displayed. Incidentally, the image signal output unit 98 is provided with a line buffer 98a, and fine control is performed using the line buffer 98a when generating and outputting the image signal.

  Here, when drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, data is written in all unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800. The number of dots is x600. On the other hand, the resolution of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is 1024 × 768 dots. That is, the liquid crystal display unit 31a has a higher resolution than the frame regions 82a and 82b.

  When the resolution adjustment value (adjustment information) in the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value (initial adjustment information), drawing data created at a resolution of 800 × 600 corresponds to the liquid crystal display unit 31a 1024. It is converted into gradation data with a resolution of × 768. The state of this conversion will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 46A, the range defined by the solid line is the range of the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and the range defined by the alternate long and short dash line is the range where the transferred drawing data PD50 is written. When resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data PD50 at a resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, the drawing data PD50 is converted into gradation data PD51 having a size indicated within a range defined by a two-dot chain line. In this case, the number of pixels of the gradation data PD51 matches the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and all data constituting the gradation data PD51 is output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. That is, at the time of conversion to the resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, the gradation data for all the dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is created using all the pixels of the drawing data. The number of pixels of gradation data increases.

  Note that the initial adjustment value is set based on the initial setting process (FIG. 10) being executed by the display CPU 72, as already described. The area in the resolution adjustment buffer 97a to which the drawing data PD50 is transferred is always constant.

  In the pachinko machine 10, an image zoom-in effect is performed using the scaler 97. In this zoom-in effect, the resolution adjustment value in the scaler 97 is set as the enlargement adjustment value. A plurality of types of adjustment values for enlargement are set so that corresponding resolutions are different, and each resolution is higher than the resolution of the initial adjustment value. The manner in which the drawing data is converted into gradation data having a resolution corresponding to a predetermined enlargement adjustment value will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the case where the resolution adjustment is performed with the resolution corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value with respect to the drawing data PD52 indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 46B, the gradation data having the size indicated within the range partitioned by the alternate long and two short dashes line Converted to PD53. In this case, since the number of pixels of the gradation data PD53 is larger than the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, all data constituting the gradation data PD53 cannot be output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal.

  On the other hand, the display CPU 72 designates a range of the gradation data PD53 to be output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. In this designation, the address of a dot serving as a drawing reference point is designated in the resolution adjustment buffer 97a. However, the designation method is arbitrary as long as the designation can be performed satisfactorily.

  In the display circuit 94, when a drawing reference point is designated, data in a range indicated by a broken line in FIG. 46B in the gradation data PD53 is output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. In this case, since an image signal is output using a part of pixels of the drawing data, an image display in the symbol display device 31 is performed in a state where a part of the image corresponding to the drawing data is substantially enlarged. Is done.

  Note that the drawing reference point corresponds to any of the four corner dots in the range to which the image signal is to be output, but which dot is the target is arbitrary. Also, the information capacity of the resolution adjustment buffer 97a is set to an information capacity that can store all pixels of the gradation data regardless of the enlargement adjustment value converted from the drawing data to the gradation data. Has been.

  A specific processing configuration for executing an image zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a zoom-in effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the arithmetic processing for zoom-in effect is executed in a shared manner in the respective arithmetic processing of step S615 to step S617 in the task processing (FIG. 15), but is shown here as a single flowchart for convenience of explanation.

  First, in step S2601, image data for background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S2602, the parameter of the grasped background image data is calculated and derived, and information on the derived parameter is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the background image data. Update control information.

  In the subsequent step S2603, the image data for presentation is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S2604, the grasped image data parameters for the effect are calculated and derived, and the information on the derived parameters is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the effect image data. Update control information.

  In subsequent step S2605, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the timing to enlarge compared to the initial adjustment value of the scaler 97. If it is not time to enlarge, in step S2606, the image data for symbols (that is, symbol sprite data) is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S2607, the grasped graphic image parameter is calculated and derived in accordance with the fact that the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value, and the derived parameter information is obtained in the work RAM 73. Information for control is updated by writing in an area secured in correspondence with image data for symbols. Thereafter, this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for zoom-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), drawing for drawing an image corresponding to the scaler 97 being set to the initial adjustment value A list is created and sent to the VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is time to enlarge compared to the initial adjustment value of the scaler 97, in step S2608, information on the current adjustment value for enlargement is grasped. Information on each adjustment value for enlargement is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 and transferred to the work RAM 73 by the timing required by the display CPU 72. In the data table, information on any enlargement adjustment value is set. In step S2608, information on the enlargement adjustment value shown in the currently set data table is grasped.

  In subsequent step S2609, information on the current drawing reference point is grasped. The drawing reference point information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the enlargement adjustment value information. Information about each drawing reference point is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 and transferred to the work RAM 73 by a timing required by the display CPU 72. In the data table, information on any drawing reference point is set, and in step S2609, information on the drawing reference point shown in the currently set data table is grasped. In subsequent step S2610, zoom-in designation information is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S2611, the image data for symbols is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S2612, the grasped graphic image data parameters are calculated and derived based on the fact that the scaler 97 is set to the current enlargement adjustment value, and information on the derived parameters is obtained from the work RAM 73. Then, the control information is updated by writing in the area secured in correspondence with the image data for the symbol. In this case, the coordinates and size of the image data for the symbol are calculated so that the symbol display position and the symbol size on the display screen G are not changed between the timing before execution of the zoom-in effect and the timing during execution.

  Specifically, when image data of the same size is adjusted by the scaler 97, the size of the resolution adjustment using the enlargement adjustment value is larger than the resolution adjustment using the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the size information of the design image data specified in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the size after the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is the same as the size after the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. It is specified smaller than the case of.

  Further, when the resolution of the image data is adjusted by the scaler 97, the resolution adjustment using the enlargement adjustment value is displaced in the direction in which the image is enlarged compared to the resolution adjustment using the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the coordinate information of the design image data specified in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the position after the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is the same as the position after the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. It is specified by displacing in the opposite direction of the enlargement direction than in the case of.

  After executing the process of step S2612, this calculation process ends. When the arithmetic processing for zoom in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), an image corresponding to the scaler 97 being set to any one of the enlargement adjustment values is drawn. A drawing list is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, the drawing list includes enlargement adjustment value information, drawing reference point information, and zoom-in designation information indicating that a zoom-in effect should be executed. For the image data for symbols, parameter information corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value specified at the same time is set.

  Incidentally, as described above, the number of image data on which the adjustment for enlargement is performed on the parameter information is equal to or less than the number of image data on which the adjustment for enlargement is not performed.

  Next, the zoom-in effect setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The setting process for zoom-in effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, when zoom-in designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for zoom-in effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, the zoom-in designation information is set in association with the pattern image data, so the setting process for zoom-in effect is the drawing order of the pattern image data in the current drawing list. It is activated when

  Note that in the drawing order in the drawing list, the background image data and the effect image data are set as the order ahead of the pattern image data, and therefore the zoom-in effect setting process is executed. At the timing, the drawing of the image data for background and the image data for effect has been completed.

  First, in step S2701, the enlargement adjustment value information specified in the drawing list is set by writing it in a dedicated area of the register 92 (see FIG. 4). Here, the dedicated area is set as an area different from the area where the information of the initial adjustment value is written. Therefore, even if the information on the adjustment value for enlargement is set, the information on the initial adjustment value is not deleted.

  In the subsequent step S2702, the information is set by writing the information of the drawing reference point designated in the drawing list in the dedicated area of the register 92. Here, when the resolution adjustment is performed using the initial adjustment value, it is sufficient to always use a fixed drawing reference point. Therefore, the drawing reference point corresponding to the initial adjustment value is determined in advance in the display circuit 94.

  In the subsequent step S2703, an enlargement flag is set in a predetermined area set in the register 92. By setting the enlargement flag, when the display circuit 94 outputs an image signal, the resolution adjustment is performed with the enlargement adjustment value set in step S2701, and the setting is made in step S2702. A range to which an image signal is to be output is determined based on the drawing reference point. The enlargement flag is deleted based on an instruction from the display CPU 72 when the zoom-in effect is terminated.

  In the subsequent step S 2704, the design image data designated as the current drawing target and the address to which the design image data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In step S2705, the parameters of the image data for symbols are grasped. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  By executing the setting process for zoom-in effect as described above, the drawing data created based on the drawing list specified this time is subjected to resolution adjustment with the corresponding adjustment value for enlargement and converted to gradation data. After conversion, data in a predetermined range with reference to the drawing reference point is output as an image signal.

  The output process executed by the display circuit 94 to output the image signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The output process is started when an instruction to output an image signal is issued from the display CPU 72, and is started whenever the image update start timing (for example, 20 msec) is reached.

  First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the enlargement flag is set in the register 92. If the enlargement flag is not set, linear interpolation processing corresponding to the initial adjustment value is executed in step S2802. In this case, information of the initial adjustment value is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and linear interpolation processing is executed according to the initial adjustment value. In the linear interpolation process, in order to interpolate the increase in the number of pixels accompanying the increase in resolution, the numerical information (or pixel value) of each pixel after enlargement is linearly calculated from the numerical information set for the four pixels before enlargement. Bilinear interpolation obtained by interpolation is performed. Note that the bilinear interpolation is not executed for all the pixels at once, but sequentially for every predetermined number of pixels.

  In a succeeding step S2803, it is determined whether or not the conversion to the gradation data is completed, and if not completed, the process returns to the step S2802. If completed, in step S2804, the output target dot is grasped based on a predetermined initial reference point.

  Thereafter, in step S2805, after executing the image signal output process, the output process is terminated. In the image signal output process, the image signals for the dots grasped in step S2804 are sequentially output.

  On the other hand, if the enlargement flag is set (step S2801: YES), in step S2806, linear interpolation processing corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value designated this time is executed. In this case, information on the adjustment value for enlargement is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and linear interpolation processing is executed according to the adjustment value for enlargement. The contents of the linear interpolation process are as described above.

  In the following step S2807, it is determined whether or not the conversion to the gradation data is completed. If not completed, the process returns to step S2806. If it has been completed, in step S2808, the drawing reference point designated this time is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the output target dot is grasped based on the grasped drawing reference point.

  Thereafter, in step S2805, after executing the image signal output process, the output process is terminated. In the image signal output processing, the image signals for the dots grasped in step S2808 are sequentially output.

  Next, the state of the zoom-in effect will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a zoom-in effect. FIG. 50A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image at an image update timing immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, and FIG. 50B is an image update timing next to the image update timing and zoom-in. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image of the timing when the production was started.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, the character CH6 is displayed near the center of the background image PC15 and the symbols CH7 and CH8 are displayed at the upper left and upper right. ing. The image is in a state where the reach is displayed with symbols CH7 and CH8, and the character CH6 is displayed as an effect of the reach display. When the image is displayed, each image data is drawn in the frame size 82a, 82b to be output with the same relative size and relative position as in FIG.

  At the next image update timing in the above state, a zoom-in effect is started. In this case, each image data is drawn in the relative size and relative position as shown in FIG. 50 (b-1) in the output frame regions 82a and 82b. As shown in FIG. 50 (b-2), resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data with the adjustment value for enlargement, and an image signal is output based on the area grasped based on the drawing reference point. Correct images are displayed.

  In the image, the background image PC15 and the character CH6 are enlarged so that the character CH6 is zoomed in as compared with the image of FIG. On the other hand, the positions and sizes of the symbols CH7 and CH8 are the same, substantially the same as or similar to the positions and sizes in the case of FIG.

  Incidentally, when compared with the same line of the character CH6, in the state of FIG. 50 (a), the line is displayed with gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 50 (c-1), whereas FIG. In the state b-2), lines are displayed with gradations (and colors) as shown in FIG. 50C-2.

  Further, by displaying the image shown in FIG. 50 (b-2) and then displaying the image shown in FIG. 50 (a), the VDP 76 only returns to the resolution adjustment by the initial adjustment value. Is displayed as zoomed out. That is, the pachinko machine 10 can perform not only a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 but also a zoom-out effect using the scaler 97. Furthermore, as already described, since a plurality of combinations of enlargement adjustment values and drawing reference points are set, the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect can be performed in stages.

  As described above, a zoom-in effect can be performed using the scaler 97, and a zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. For example, it is possible to similarly perform a zoom-in effect by drawing each image data in an enlarged state when drawing in the frame regions 82a and 82b. In this case, however, all the image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 are enlarged. The processing needs to be executed, and the processing load on the VDP 76 is increased. In addition, for example, a configuration in which image data for normal size and image data for enlarged size are set in advance for the same image is conceivable. In this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, processing for enlarging and displaying an image is performed not by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 but by the display circuit 94. Therefore, it is possible to perform a zoom-in effect or a zoom-out effect while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity necessary for storing the image data.

  In addition, the size of the drawing data created in the frame regions 82a and 82b is the same regardless of whether or not the zoom-in effect is performed. Thereby, the creation of the drawing data in the frame regions 82a and 82b can be performed with the same processing configuration regardless of whether the zoom-in effect is performed or not.

  Further, in the display circuit 94, when the zoom-in effect is not performed, the resolution adjustment is performed with the designated initial adjustment value, and the range to which the image signal is to be output is grasped based on the predetermined initial reference point. When the zoom-in effect is performed, only the adjustment value and the reference point to be referred to are changed. Therefore, the zoom-in effect can be performed while using the hardware configuration of the display circuit 94 when the zoom-in effect is not performed.

  Even if a zoom-in effect is performed, the symbol is not enlarged. Thereby, it is prevented that the visibility of a symbol falls in the zoom-in effect. In particular, the display CPU 72 designates the parameters of the image data for the symbols as parameters that are not enlarged and the VDP 76 only needs to draw the image data for the symbols in accordance with the parameters. The visibility of the symbol can be improved.

  When the zoom-in effect is finished, the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is returned to the initial adjustment value. Thereby, when the zoom-in effect is finished, the display of the image according to the resolution of the display screen G can be resumed.

  The display circuit 94 may be configured to execute a process corresponding to the output process (FIG. 49) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using a program. Further, the display circuit 94 may not be built in the VDP 76 but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the display circuit 94 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path. A display circuit 94 may be provided above.

  Alternatively, the initial adjustment value and the enlargement adjustment value may be written in the same area in the register 92. In this case, after the zoom-in effect, a process for returning the information of the area to the initial adjustment value may be executed. The processing may be performed based on designation from the display CPU 72, or may be performed independently by the VDP 76.

  The initial reference point may be set in the register 92 when the initial adjustment value is set in the register 92. In this case, the area in which the initial reference point is set and the area in which the drawing reference point is set may be set separately, and these pieces of information may be set in the same area. In the case where the same area is set, after the zoom-in effect, a process for returning the information of the area to the initial reference point may be executed. The processing may be performed based on designation from the display CPU 72, or may be performed independently by the VDP 76.

  Further, the image data on which the adjustment for enlargement is performed on the parameter information is not limited to the image data for the design, and may be image data for a predetermined effect or image data for the background. . In this case, for example, for the character for presentation that is not the enlargement target, the adjustment for enlargement may be performed so that at least the entire character is displayed, and the adjustment for enlargement is performed so that at least the position does not change. It is good also as a structure.

  In addition to the scaler 97, a circuit for adjusting the size of the drawing data in order to perform a zoom-in effect or a zoom-out effect may be provided.

  Further, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is the initial adjustment value, only a part of the drawing data may be output as an image signal. In this case, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for reduction, the range that is output as the image signal in the drawing data is widened so that the zoom from the state displayed with the initial adjustment value can be achieved. It is possible to perform out production.

  In addition, when a zoom-in effect is performed, the background image PC15 and the character CH6 to be zoomed in may be gradually enlarged over a plurality of update times of the image. In this case, a plurality of stages of adjustment values for enlargement of the scaler 97 may be prepared, and the adjustment values may be changed in stages so that the enlargement rate gradually increases. In addition, by setting the coordinates of the image data for the image and the parameters of the scale according to each adjustment value for enlargement, when the zoom-in effect is performed so that the image is gradually enlarged, the symbol is displayed at each stage. It can be prevented from being enlarged.

<Direction using moving image data>
Next, an effect using moving image data will be described.

  The moving image data is image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to still image data for one frame and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

  The moving image data set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 51A to 51C, as moving image data, moving image data PD54 before branching, moving image data PD55 for branching A, and moving image data PD56 for branching B are used. , Is set. These moving image data PD54 to PD56 are set to perform super reach display that develops after normal reach display or without via normal reach display among reach displays.

  In any of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, compressed data of each frame is set. The compressed data of each frame is accompanied by a frame header.

  The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

  The I picture data is data that can create still image data for one frame by the data alone at the time of decoding. P picture data is data that can generate still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. . B picture data is decoded by bi-directional prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data before one frame or plural frames and I picture data or P picture data after one frame or plural frames. This is data that can create still image data for one frame.

  In the compressed data of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. In addition, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) th frame,..., The (n−1) th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the nth frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  The contents of the images set in the respective moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described with reference to FIG. 52A shows the contents of a part of the image set in the pre-branch moving image data PD54, and FIG. 52B shows the post-branch A moving image data PD55. FIG. 52C shows the contents of a part of the image set in the post-branch B moving image data PD56.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a-1), the moving image data PD54 before branching is superimposed on the pre-branching background image PC16 showing a waved state, so that the character to be moved is a boy character. Reference data (I picture data) PD57 corresponding to the image to which CH9 is added is set. Also, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a-2) and (a-3), difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image that does not have the background image PC16 but the moving target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction. Data, B picture data) PD58 and PD59 are set. Still image data for one frame is generated from the reference data PD57 and the difference data PD58 and PD59 are applied to the reference data PD57, whereby each difference data PD58, One frame of still image data to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 59 is added is created.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b-1), the moving image data PD55 for A after branching is superimposed on the background image PC17 for A after branching where a large number of jellyfish are shown. Reference data (I picture data) PD60 corresponding to an image to which a certain movement target character CH9 is added is set. Also, as shown in FIGS. 52 (b-2) and (b-3), difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image that does not have the background image PC17 but the moving target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction. Data, B picture data) PD61 and PD62 are set. Still image data for one frame is generated from the reference data PD60, and the difference data PD61 and PD62 are applied to the reference data PD60, so that each difference data PD61 is applied to the background image PC17 set in the reference data PD60. , Still image data for one frame to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 62 is added is created.

  In the post-branch B image data PD56, as shown in FIG. 52 (c-1), a large number of fish are superimposed on the post-branch B background image PC18 so that the same boy character is used. Reference data (I picture data) PD63 corresponding to an image to which a certain movement target character CH9 is added is set. Also, as shown in FIGS. 52 (c-2) and (c-3), difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image that does not have the background image PC18 but the moving target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction. Data, B picture data) PD64 and PD65 are set. Still image data for one frame is generated from the reference data PD63, and the difference data PD64 and PD65 are applied to the reference data PD63, so that each difference data PD64 with respect to the background image PC18 set in the reference data PD63. , Still image data for one frame to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 65 is added is created.

  Using each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, super reach display corresponding to effect branching is executed. Specifically, when the super reach display is started, the pre-branch effect is executed by each still image data created from the pre-branch moving image data PD54.

  Thereafter, either the after-branch A effect or the after-B branch effect is selected by reaching the branch timing. The selection is performed when the post-branch A effect is selected when the production operation device 48 is operated at the determination timing before the branch timing, and the production operation device 48 is not operated at the determination timing. After branching, the effect for B is selected. When the post-branch A effect is selected, the post-branch A effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch A moving image data PD55. On the other hand, when the post-branch B effect is selected, the post-branch B effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch B moving image data PD56.

  Note that the specific opportunity for selecting either the post-branch A effect or the post-branch B effect is not limited to the above, and the directing operation device 48 in a specific operation mode at the determination timing. When the operation is performed, when the production operation device 48 is operated for a specific number of times or for a specific period at the determination timing, or after the start of the current super reach display, the time is determined in advance. One or more effects may be selected when one or a plurality of game balls are in the entrance portion.

  A specific processing configuration for performing super reach display using the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a moving image calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The moving image calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15). Note that the calculation processing for moving images is started when a data table corresponding to the game times in which the super reach display is performed is set.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not it is after the branch timing based on the currently set data table. If it is the timing before branching, it is determined in step S2902 whether the pre-branch presentation is being executed based on the currently set data table.

  If the pre-branch effect is not being executed, this means that the timing is before the start timing of the super reach display, and thus the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether it is time to decode the pre-branch moving image data PD54.

  If it is time to decode the pre-branch video data PD54, in step S2904, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. Specifically, the address where the pre-branch video data PD54 is pre-transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 and the pre-branch video data PD54 are decoded to obtain still image data for a plurality of frames. When it is created, the address of the area where the still image data is stored in the change area 81b is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S2905, the pre-branch decoding designation information is stored. Incidentally, the timing determined in step S2903 is set so that the decoding of the pre-branch moving image data PD54 is completed before the pre-branch presentation is started.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2903, or after execution of step S2905, calculation processing corresponding to the timing before the pre-branch effect occurs is executed in step S2906. Specifically, based on the currently set data table, the background image data is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are calculated to update the control information. Thereafter, this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for the moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the background image data in the image corresponding to the timing before the pre-branch effect occurs is drawn. A drawing list is generated and transmitted to the VDP 76. Further, when the current calculation process is the timing for specifying the decoding of the pre-branch moving image data PD54, the decoding specifying information indicating that the decoding should be performed, and the pre-branching moving image data PD54 described above. Information on various addresses is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2902 that the pre-branch effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2907. In step S2907, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is time to decode the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for branching.

  If it is time to decode the after-branch moving image data PD55 and PD56, it is determined in step S2908 whether or not the decoding target is the after-branch A moving image data PD55. Specifically, a key for determining whether or not the production operation device 48 is operated at the determination timing before the branch timing is set in the data table, and when the key is confirmed. Determines whether or not a flag indicating that the production operating device 48 has been operated is set in the work RAM 73. Incidentally, the flag is set in the command response process in step S403 when reception of the operation generation command is confirmed in step S402 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72. In step S2908, an affirmative determination is made when a flag indicating that the effect operating device 48 has been operated is set, and a negative determination is made when the flag is not set.

  When the decoding target is the moving image data PD55 for A after branching (step S2908: YES), in step S2909, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. Specifically, the post-branch A moving image data PD55 is pre-transferred in the decompression buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, and the post-branching A moving image data PD55 is decoded and a plurality of frames of still images are decoded. When the data is created, the expansion buffer 81 grasps the address of the area where the still image data is stored. Thereafter, in step S2910, post-branch A-use decode designation information is stored.

  On the other hand, if the decoding target is the post-branch B moving image data PD56 (step S2908: NO), in step S2911, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. Specifically, the post-branch B moving image data PD56 is pre-transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, and the post-branch B moving image data PD56 is decoded to decode a plurality of frames of still images. When the data is created, the expansion buffer 81 grasps the address of the area where the still image data is stored. Thereafter, in step S2912, the decode designation information for A after branching is stored.

  Incidentally, the timing determined in step S2907 is set so that decoding of the target post-branch moving image data PD55 and PD56 is completed before any post-branch effect is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2907 or after execution of step S2910 or step S2912, the process proceeds to step S2913. In step S2913, the address where the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored among the still image data created from the pre-branch moving image data. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S2914, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information for the derived parameter is written in an area secured in correspondence with the still image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information. To do. Thereafter, in step S2915, moving image designation information indicating that still image data created from moving image data is to be used is stored, and then this calculation process ends.

  When the calculation processing for moving images is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), still image data created from the moving image data before branching is included as a drawing target, A drawing list in which parameters of still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. In addition, when the current arithmetic processing timing is to designate decoding of the post-branch A moving image data PD55, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the post-branching A moving image data PD55 are included. The information on the various addresses is set in the drawing list. On the other hand, if the current calculation process is the timing for specifying the decoding of the B moving image data PD56 after branching, the decoding specifying information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching are included. The information on the various addresses is set in the drawing list.

  Since the background image and the effect image are mixed in the still image data, it is not necessary to set the effect image separately from the still image data. Therefore, when still image data is set as a drawing target, the effect calculation processing in step S616 is skipped. However, since the symbol is displayed separately from the still image data, the symbol calculation processing is not skipped. Therefore, when the still image data is set in the drawing list, the pattern image data is also set in the drawing list. The same applies to other cases where still image data is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that it is after the branch timing, the process proceeds to step S2916. In step S2916, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the effect to be executed is a post-branch A effect. Incidentally, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2908, data corresponding to the post-branch A effect is set as data to be referred to after branching in the data table, and if a negative determination is made, in the data table Data corresponding to the post-branch B effect is set as data to be referred to after branching.

  When the effect to be executed is the effect for A after branching, the process proceeds to step S2917. In step S2917, the address where the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored among the still image data created from the moving image data for A after branching is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S2918, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information for the derived parameter is written in an area secured in correspondence with the still image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information. To do. Thereafter, in step S2919, moving image designation information indicating that still image data created from the moving image data is to be used is stored, and then this calculation process ends.

  When the calculation processing for moving images is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the still image data created from the moving image data for A after branching is included as a drawing target. A drawing list in which parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  If the effect to be executed is the effect for B after branching, the process proceeds to step S2920. In step S2920, an address where still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored among the still image data created from the moving image data for B after branching is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S2921, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information for the derived parameter is written in the area secured in correspondence with the still image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information. To do. Thereafter, in step S2922, moving image designation information indicating that still image data created from the moving image data is to be used is stored, and then this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation processing for moving images is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), still image data created from the moving image data for B after branching is included as a drawing target, A drawing list in which parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, decoding processing executed by the moving picture decoder 93 of the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The decoding process is activated when any decoding designation information is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72. The decoding process is started asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 13) executed by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 and the output process (FIG. 49) executed by the display circuit 94.

  First, in step S3001, the address of the moving image data specified this time is grasped from the information of the transfer destination address specified in the drawing list. In subsequent step S3002, the area of the development destination of the moving image data is grasped from the information of the development destination address designated in the drawing list.

  In subsequent step S3003, the moving image data is read from the address grasped in step S3001, and the moving image data is decoded. Then, each still image data of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S3002. Thereafter, the decoding process is terminated.

  Next, moving image setting processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The moving image setting process is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). In addition, when moving image designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting processing for the moving image is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the moving image designation information is set in association with the still image data to be drawn, the setting processing for moving images is performed with the drawing order of the still image data in the current drawing list. It is activated when it becomes.

  Note that in the drawing order in the drawing list, still image data is set as an order prior to the image data for symbols, and therefore, after the setting processing for the moving image is executed and the still image data is drawn, The pattern is drawn.

  First, in step S3101, information on the address where the still image data to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In subsequent step S3102, the still image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S3101. In a succeeding step S3103, the parameter of the still image data is grasped from information set in the drawing list. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  By executing the setting process for moving images as described above, still image data in a state in which parameters are applied to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b in the subsequent writing process (step S505). Is drawn. In addition, since the image data for symbols is also set in the current drawing list, the image data for symbols is rendered so that the symbols are displayed in front of the still image corresponding to the still image data. . Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, whereby an image for one frame constituting the super reach display is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, since a series of images corresponding to the super reach display is displayed using the moving image data PD54 to PD56, the images for each frame of the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are individually set as still image data. Compared to the storage structure, the super-reach display effect is performed using live-action video and high-definition images while suppressing the storage capacity required to store image data in the NAND flash memory 102. be able to.

  Further, in the super reach display, the pre-branch presentation is performed until the branch timing, and after the branch timing, the content of the destination presentation is switched according to the operation mode for the presentation operation device 48. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the super reach display from being uniform and provide various effects.

  In this case, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are pre-branch moving image data PD54 corresponding to the pre-branch effect, post-branch A moving image data PD55 corresponding to the post-branch A effect, and post-branch B. It is set separately from the after-branch B-use moving image data PD56 corresponding to the production effect. Therefore, until the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the pre-branch moving image data PD54 is sequentially drawn in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54. A pre-production can be performed. In addition, after the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target among the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branches is set in the moving image data PD55 and PD56. The target post-branch effect can be performed simply by sequentially drawing in the order of frames.

  When still image data for a plurality of frames is created by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branching in moving image data. In addition, both a single moving image data in which a pre-branch effect and a post-branch A effect are set and a single moving image data in which a pre-branch effect and a post-branch B effect are set are prepared in advance. The structure to keep is also considered. However, since it is necessary to output moving image data from still image data corresponding to the first sequence of frames, it is difficult to output still image data from an intermediate sequence of frames. Then, when super reach display is started, it becomes necessary to decode both moving image data. In this case, there is a concern that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and the storage capacity of the VRAM 75 will need to be increased. By comparing and preparing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 as described above as compared with each assumed configuration, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used are switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Therefore, the super reach display as described above can be suitably executed.

  When super-reach display is started, decoding is performed on the pre-branch video data PD54, and post-branch A video data PD55 and post-branch B video data PD56. Do not decode. As a result, the processing load when starting the super reach display can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which all the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are decoded together.

  In addition, the determination of whether to distribute to the post-branch A effect or the post-branch B effect is performed in the middle of execution of the pre-branch effect and before the branch timing. Of the moving image data PD 55 for A and the moving image data PD 56 for B after branching, only the moving image data corresponding to the distribution destination effect is decoded. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly start a new moving image display after completion of the pre-branch effect. In addition, the processing load related to decoding can be suppressed and the storage capacity required for decoding in the VRAM 75 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the post-branch video data is decoded.

  In addition, even if it applies the structure which distinguishes and memorize | stores moving image data PD54-PD56 as mentioned above with respect to the effect different from the effect in which the effect of advancing destination is arbitrarily selected according to the situation to a branch timing. Good. For example, in a configuration in which a first effect (first reach display) and a second effect (second reach display) that are common from the start timing to the middle and are different from each other in the middle are set. It is good also as a structure which has the 1st moving image data for displaying the image from the start to the middle, and the 2nd moving image data and 3rd moving image data corresponding to the aspect from the middle. In this case, since the first moving image data can be used in common, the entire data capacity can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the entire moving image data is individually provided for each effect.

  In addition, for example, as a display effect, when only normal reach display is performed, when the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, and after the normal reach display is performed, the second super reach display is performed. In the configuration in which the display is set, moving image data for normal reach display, moving image data for first super reach display, and moving image data for second super reach display are set. It is good also as a structure. In this case, in the game times in which normal reach display is performed, still image data created from moving image data for normal reach display may be sequentially displayed. Further, in the game times in which the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the normal reach display moving image data is sequentially displayed, and then the first super reach display moving image. The still image data created from the data may be displayed sequentially. Further, in the game times in which the second super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the normal reach display moving image data is sequentially displayed, and then the second super reach display moving image. The still image data created from the data may be displayed sequentially.

  According to this configuration, since the game times for performing the first super reach display and the game times for performing the second super reach display may be used in common, the moving image data for normal reach display may be used in common. Compared to a configuration in which the contents of normal reach display are included in each of the moving image data of the super-reach display and the moving image data of the second super-reach display, the entire data capacity can be suppressed.

  In addition, the display effect may be set such that the after-branch A effect is performed without using the before-branch effect, and the after-branch B effect is performed without using the before-branch effect. May be configured. Even in the configuration in which these display effects are set, the moving image data PD55 for A after branching is set separately from the moving image data PD54 for before branching. Similarly, the moving image data for before branching is set. In addition to the image data PD54, the post-branch B moving image data PD56 is set, so that the production can be started in the post-branch A effect unit and the post-branch B production unit. Can start.

  Further, a configuration in which I picture data as reference data exists for each predetermined effect period may be applied to a series of effects that do not cause branching as described above. For example, in a configuration in which a series of moving images is displayed over the entire production period when the overall series production is started, the first production corresponding to the front side of the overall production period. The first moving image data and the second moving image data may be set separately for the period and the second effect period corresponding to the rear side. In this case, by using the first moving image data and the second moving image data, it is possible to perform a series of effects for the whole, and in the second effect period without passing through the first effect period. It is possible to produce an effect. By the way, in the above-mentioned overall series of effects, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined character moves in front of a predetermined background. In this case, an I picture is used for both the first moving image data and the second moving image data. A predetermined background image is set in the data.

  Further, the aspect after the pre-branch effect or after the common effect is not limited to two patterns, and may be three patterns, four patterns, or five patterns or more. In this case, the effect of having the moving image data PD54 to PD56 individually as described above is further enhanced.

  Further, the moving picture decoder 93 may be configured to execute a process corresponding to the decoding process (FIG. 54A) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using a program. Further, the moving picture decoder 93 may not be built in the VDP 76 but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the moving picture decoder 93 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path. A moving picture decoder 93 may be provided above.

  Further, in the configuration in which the determination timing of the effect after branching is the same as or close to the branch timing, the moving image data PD55 for branching A and the data for B after branching during the period when the effect before branching is being executed. The decoding may be performed on both the moving image data PD56.

  Further, the configuration using a plurality of types of moving image data as described above may be applied not to the reach effect but to the jackpot effect or the pre-reach notice effect.

<About the configuration related to the transmission effect>
Next, a configuration related to the transmission effect will be described.

  The transmission effect is prepared so that two images are prepared and disappears by gradually transmitting from the state where one image is displayed, while the other image is gradually projected from the state where the other image is transmitted. Is an effect displayed while overlapping. In view of the fact that one image displayed earlier disappears and the other image is displayed later, one image is an image at the previous display timing, and the other image is an image at the subsequent display timing. It can be said that.

  In the transmission effect, a uniform α value is used so that the images gradually change while being overlapped. As described above, the uniform α value is transmission information applied to all dots of one image data. “0” corresponds to complete transmission information and “1” is non-transmission. It corresponds to information. The transmission effect is performed by controlling a uniform α value for each of the two images.

  As an example of the transmission effect, a specific processing configuration in the case of performing the transmission effect by the girl character image will be described. For convenience of explanation, the sprite data corresponding to “one image (pre-display image)” is set as the first sprite data, and the sprite data corresponding to “the other image (post-display image)” is the second sprite data. Will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the transmission effect calculation processing executed by the display CPU 72. The transmission effect calculation process is executed when the currently set data table is a data table corresponding to the transmission effect in the effect calculation process of step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15).

  First, in step S3201, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the transmission effect based on the currently set data table. Specifically, it is determined whether or not information specifying that it is the start timing of the transmission effect is set in the currently set data table.

  If it is the start timing, the processing of steps S3202 to S3206 is executed. In steps S3202 to S3206, both the image data corresponding to the previously displayed image and the image data corresponding to the image to be displayed later are set in the drawing list, and the uniform α value of both is set to be different.

  In detail, first, in step S3202, a process of grasping first sprite data corresponding to an image displayed in advance, that is, an image that gradually transmits and disappears is executed. In step S3203, a process of grasping the second sprite data corresponding to the image to be displayed later, that is, the image gradually displayed is executed.

  In the subsequent step S3204, a process of setting coordinates for displaying an image that is a target of the transmission effect when the transmission effect is performed is executed. In this case, the coordinate data of the first sprite data and the second sprite data are set to be the same.

  In step S3205, uniform α value initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first sprite data (hereinafter, also referred to as the “previous display-side uniform α value”) is set to “1”, which is the opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second sprite data (hereinafter, “ The rear display side uniform α value) is set to “0” which is complete transmission information. As a result, the color information set in advance for all the pixels corresponding to the first sprite data is applied as it is, whereas the α value of “0” is set for all the pixels corresponding to the second sprite data. Is applied uniformly.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3206, and other parameters are derived by calculation, and the information for control is updated by writing the derived other parameter information. In a succeeding step S3207, the transmission effect designation information is stored, and this calculation process is ended.

  When the above processing is executed, the first sprite data and the second sprite data are set as drawing targets in the drawing list, and both are drawn in a state where the α value is uniformly reflected on the same coordinates. Is set. Further, transmission effect designation information indicating that a transmission effect is performed is set in the drawing list.

  In the drawing list, background data corresponding to the backmost image is set in addition to both sprite data. The drawing order of the background data is set before both sprite data.

  If it is not the start timing of the transmission effect (step S3201: NO), it means that the transmission effect is being executed. In this case, a process for updating the uniform α value and reflecting the updated uniform α value in the parameter information is executed.

  Specifically, the first sprite data is grasped in step S3208, the second sprite data is grasped in step S3209, and both are set to the same coordinate in step S3210. Thereafter, uniform α value update processing is executed in step S3211. Specifically, the presently set uniform α value is grasped, and a process of subtracting 0.01 from the grasped uniform α value by the previous display side uniform α value is executed, while the rear display side uniform α value is executed. Is added, and the calculated uniform α value is set as parameter information.

  Here, a dedicated storage area of 1 byte is secured for each uniform α value. Actually, however, a decimal number “0 to 100” is associated with “0 to 1” which is the numerical range of the uniform α value. Is set. Then, a process of adding or subtracting “1” to the set numerical information is executed. According to this configuration, when updated 50 times, both the uniform α values are reversed, and when updated 100 times, the front display-side uniform α value is “0”, and the rear display-side uniform α value is Is set to “1”.

  The data format of the uniform α value is not limited to this, and may be stored as binary numerical information of a floating-point number type or a fixed-point number type. In this case, 0.01 is converted into binary numerical information, and a process of adding / subtracting the converted numerical information is executed.

  After the update process is executed, other parameters are updated in step S3212. In step S3207, the transmission effect designation information storage process is executed, and then the calculation process is terminated.

  When the above update processing is executed, both sprite data are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and a uniform α value applied to both sprite data is set. Is done. In this case, the drawing list created in the current calculation process has a uniform α value different from the drawing list set in the previous calculation process. That is, the sprite data set in the drawing list is the same over a plurality of frames (100 frames) in which a transparent effect is performed, and the uniform α value corresponding to the sprite data is updated for each frame. . In the drawing list, background data corresponding to the backmost image is set in addition to both sprite data. The drawing order of the background data is set before both sprite data.

  Next, the transmission effect setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The transmission effect setting process is executed in the content grasping process in step S504 in the drawing process (FIG. 13).

  First, in step S3301, a process of determining whether or not a transmission effect is designated is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not transmission effect designation information is set in the drawing list set this time. If the transmission effect designation information is not set, the present setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the transmission effect designation information is set, the process proceeds to step S3302, and the overlay process is executed. Specifically, the first sprite data and the second sprite data are read, and the data are set so that the whole of them is overlapped in the front and rear.

  In the subsequent step S3303, the corresponding parameter information is grasped for each sprite data, and this setting process is terminated.

  By executing such processing, each sprite data is drawn in the writing process in step S505 with the above parameters applied to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b.

  Specifically, first, the frame area 82a. In 82b, the numerical information set in the unit area to be updated this time is grasped. Here, in the drawing list, the backmost image is set as a drawing target prior to both sprite data, so the numerical information of each unit area is updated to numerical information corresponding to the backmost image. Thereby, numerical information of the backmost image is grasped.

Then, fusion (blending) of the numerical value information of the grasped backmost image and the numerical information of the first sprite data displayed in advance is executed. Specifically, grasping the numerical information of the first sprite data corresponding to the unit area to be updated this time,
“Numerical information of the rearmost image” × (“1” − “first display side uniform α value”) + “numerical information of the first sprite data” × “first display side uniform α value”
The first blending calculation process is executed, and the numerical information calculated by the calculation process is updated.

After that, further grasp the numerical information of the second sprite data corresponding to the unit area to be updated this time,
“Numerical information calculated by the first blending calculation process” × (“1” − “back display side uniform α value”) + “numerical information of the second sprite data” × “back display side uniform α value”
The second blending calculation process is executed, and the numerical information calculated by the calculation process is updated.

  Since numerical value information for each of RGB is set in the numerical value information, the numerical value information for each of the RGB is calculated. And the said arithmetic processing is performed about each unit area used as the object of superimposition.

  By executing the above arithmetic processing, the first sprite data and the second sprite data are displayed in a state where the color information and the degree of brightness are reflected on the backmost image as a background. It becomes.

  Next, the state of the transmission effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transmission effect, and FIG. 57 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image displayed on the display screen G at the start timing of the transmission effect, and FIG. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image displayed on the display screen G when the update process of the uniform α value is performed only 25 times in the transmission effect, and FIG. 57 (c) is only 50 times in the transmission effect. FIG. 57D is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image displayed on the display screen G when the uniform α value update process is performed, and FIG. 57D illustrates the uniform α value update process performed 75 times in the transmission effect. FIG. 57E illustrates an image displayed on the display screen G when the uniform α value is updated 100 times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

  When the transmission effect is started, in the initial setting process of the uniform α value (step S3205), the previous display-side uniform α value applied to the first sprite data is set to “1”. ), A first character image CP1 corresponding to the first sprite data and showing a girl waving his hand is displayed. On the other hand, since the post-display-side uniform α value applied to the second sprite data is set to “0”, it is an image corresponding to the second sprite data, and shows a state in which the girl raised his hand. Character image CP2 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) to 57 (d), as the uniform α value is sequentially updated, the first character image CP1 is gradually transmitted while the second character image CP2 is gradually transmitted. It is projected on. In this case, since both coordinates are the same, both are displayed overlapping.

  When the uniform α value is updated a plurality of times (100 times), the front display side uniform α value becomes “0” and the rear display side uniform α value becomes “1”. As shown, the first character image CP1 disappears and the second character image CP2 is displayed. In this case, the transmission effect period is a period corresponding to 100 frames from the start of the transmission effect until the update is performed 100 times.

  As described above, by controlling the uniform α value, the pre-display image is gradually changed while overlapping the pre-display image (first character image CP1) and the post-display image (second character image CP2). While disappearing, it is possible to perform a transition effect in which the image of the rear display is gradually projected. In other words, through the display of the intermediate image between the pre-display image and the post-display image as shown in FIGS. 57B to 57D, the pre-display image is displayed in the post-display state. It is possible to produce an effect of shifting to a state in which the image is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to smoothly express the movement of the girl from the state of waving to the state of raising his hand.

  Here, in order to execute smooth transition, a plurality of image data in the middle of the transition is prepared separately, and the image data in the middle corresponding to the update timing is set in the drawing list every time the update timing is reached. The structure which performs is considered. However, with such a configuration, there is a concern about an increase in the volume of image data. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, smooth transition of the image can be realized only by the first display image and the rear display image without separately preparing intermediate stage image data. Thereby, the said inconvenience can be avoided.

  Further, an intermediate image related to both is displayed using the first display image and the rear display image. Thereby, compared with the image created using only one of them, it is easy to become familiar with the transition mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player when changing.

  The transmission effect period is determined by the value to be added or subtracted in the uniform α value update process. Specifically, if the value to be added or subtracted is increased, the transmission effect period is shortened and the speed of transition is increased. On the other hand, if the value to be added or subtracted is reduced, the transmission effect period becomes longer and the speed of transition becomes slower. That is, the period of the transmission effect can be adjusted by adjusting the value to be added / subtracted. Thereby, when the circumstances which change the aspect of a transmission effect arise in a production stage, it can respond easily.

  The uniform α value is updated every frame, but is not limited to this. For example, the α value may be updated every plural frames. Specifically, an update counter is provided separately, and if it is determined that the transmission effect is being executed in the transmission effect calculation process (step S3201: NO), whether or not the update counter is “0”. It is good to execute the process which determines. When the update counter is “0”, the α value is uniformly updated and the update counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, “2”). On the other hand, when the update counter is not “0”, a process of subtracting “1” from the update counter is executed, and the transmission effect calculation process is terminated. As a result, the α value is uniformly updated every plural frames. In this case, since it is not necessary to store information for specifying the update timing in the data table, the amount of data stored in the data table can be reduced. However, from the viewpoint of the processing load of the display CPU 72, it is preferable to store the information specifying the update timing in advance in the data table.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the transmission effect of the character image, but can also be applied to the transmission effect of the design image, and the target image of the transmission effect is arbitrary.

  Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of updates of the uniform α value is set in the data table in the transmission effect. In this case, a process of determining whether or not the actual number of updates is a predetermined number of updates in the data table with reference to the data table is executed.

  In this transmission effect, two individual images are displayed and both the front display side uniform α value and the rear display side uniform α value are updated. However, two individual images are displayed and only one of them is displayed. It is good also as a structure which updates.

  Also, in the writing process, after blending the numerical information of the backmost image and the numerical information of the first sprite data of the first display, the numerical information calculated by the blending and the numerical information of the second sprite data of the subsequent display However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, numerical information calculated by blending after numerical information of first sprite data and numerical information of second sprite data is executed first. And the numerical information of the rearmost image may be blended.

  Specifically, for the numerical information of the area where the first sprite data and the second sprite data overlap, numerical information obtained by multiplying the numerical information of the first sprite data by the uniform α value on the display side, and the second sprite Blending is performed to add the numerical information obtained by multiplying the numerical information of the data by the uniform α value on the rear display side, and the numerical information calculated by the blending is updated. On the other hand, for numerical information of a region where the first sprite data and the second sprite data do not overlap, that is, a region where only one sprite data is set, the uniform α value of the one sprite data is used. Blending of the numerical information of the sprite data and the numerical information of the backmost image is executed, and the numerical information calculated by the blending is updated.

<Configuration for enlarged display>
Next, a configuration for enlarging display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of image data used when performing enlarged display.

  The enlarged display is a kind of display mode in which, when an individual image is displayed on the display screen G, the individual image is gradually displayed larger. The display period of the enlarged display is divided into an enlarged period in which the individual image gradually increases and a stop display period in which the display of the enlarged individual image is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the enlarged display includes initial symbol sprite data SPD1 which is image data before enlargement (initial state), and an enlarged image of initial symbol sprite data SPD1 as shown in FIG. 58 (b). The enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2, which is data, is used. The enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is sprite data enlarged twice as much as the initial symbol sprite data SPD1. The enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 has a resolution twice that of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1. That is, it can be said that the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is a higher definition image than the initial symbol sprite data SPD1. The enlarged display is executed by displaying the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 first and then displaying the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2. In other words, it can be said that the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is the first display sprite data SPD1, and the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is the rear display sprite data SPD2.

  In addition, in order to perform an aspect in which enlargement is gradually performed during enlargement display, scale information is used among parameter information set in the drawing list. As already described, the scale information is information indicating the magnification at the time of writing in the frame regions 82a and 82b with respect to the size set as the initial state of the image data. The scale information is set to be changeable.

  A specific processing configuration for executing enlarged display using the image data and scale information will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an enlarged display symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The symbol calculation process for enlarged display is executed when the currently set data table is a data table corresponding to the enlarged display in the symbol calculation process of step S617 in the task process (FIG. 15). The data table is set to execute enlarged display over a plurality of frames (specifically, 150 frames), and the symbol calculation processing for enlarged display is performed 150 times after the enlarged display is started. Repeatedly executed.

  First, in step S3401, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the start timing of the enlarged display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not information specifying that it is the start timing of the enlarged display is set in the currently set data table. If it is the enlarged display start timing, the process advances to step S3402.

  In steps S3402 to S3406, an initial setting process for performing enlarged display is executed. Specifically, in step S3402, a process for grasping the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is executed, and in step S3403, coordinate data for specifying a place where the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is drawn is set.

  Thereafter, initial setting of scale information is performed in step S3404. Specifically, the scale information is set to “1” which is an initial value. As a result, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is displayed on the display screen G in the same size (same size). In step S3405, other parameters are updated.

  In the calculation buffer area, a storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as an area for storing scale information, but in actuality, any numerical information of “0 to 200” is set in decimal. Yes. The numerical range (“0 to 200”) of the scale information corresponds to “0.00 to 2.00” of the scale information.

  In the subsequent step S3406, the value of the enlargement counter stored in the enlargement counter storage area provided in the work RAM 73 is set to the initial value “0”. The enlargement counter is used when the scale information of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is changed, and is used for grasping the enlargement display end timing, and can take numerical information of “0 to 255”. Thereafter, in step S3407, the enlarged display designation information is stored, and the present calculation process is terminated.

  When the above processing is executed, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the enlarged display is information indicating that the enlarged display should be performed. The specified information is set. The scale information of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is set to “1” which is an initial value.

  On the other hand, when it is not the enlarged display start timing (step S3401: NO), it means that the enlarged display is being performed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3408, and it is determined whether it is an expansion period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the enlargement counter is “99”. Since the enlargement counter is a counter that is incremented by “0” as an initial value every processing time, that is, every 1 frame, whether or not it is the processing time of the 100th frame after the enlarged display is started. Means that it is determined. That is, the enlargement period is a period from the start of the enlarged display to the 100th frame, and the period from the 101st frame to the 150th frame corresponds to the stop display period. If it is during the expansion period (the value of the expansion counter <99), the processing of steps S3409 to S3413 is executed. In this process, the information specified at the enlarged display start timing is grasped and the scale information is updated.

  Specifically, in step S3409, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is grasped. In subsequent step S3410, the currently set coordinates are grasped.

  In step S3411, the enlargement counter is updated. Specifically, a process of adding “1” to the value of the enlargement counter is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S3412, scale information update processing is executed. Specifically, using the value of the enlargement counter updated in step S3411, changed scale information applied to the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is calculated, and the scale information is updated to the changed scale information. The value X of the changed scale information is derived from the equation “X = 1 + 0.01 × c”, where c is the currently set enlargement counter value.

  Here, the value of the enlargement counter is initially set to “0” in step S3406, and is incremented by 1 every time the enlargement update timing is reached. Increases every "0.01". That is, the change scale information is an even number sequence that is incremented by “0.01” for each frame (every time the enlarged update timing is reached), with the first term being “1”.

  Thereafter, in step S3413, other parameters are updated. In step S3407, the enlarged display designation information is stored, and the present calculation process is terminated.

  When the above processing is performed, initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is set as a drawing target and enlarged display designation information is set in the drawing list created in the drawing list output processing. The scale information of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is set as changed scale information.

  If it is not the expansion period (step S3408: NO), it means that it is a stop display period. As already described, since the entire period (150 frames) in which the enlarged display is executed is set longer than the enlarged period (100 frames), the period (50 frames) obtained by subtracting the enlarged period from the entire period is the stop display period. It corresponds to. During the stop display period, processing for rendering the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 in place of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is executed.

  Specifically, the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is grasped in step S3414. It should be noted that at a timing prior to the grasping, the process for the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 to be controlled instead of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 has already been completed. Specifically, in the task process (FIG. 15), the process for starting the control for the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 has already been completed. In this case, the buffer area corresponding to the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 may be overwritten with the data corresponding to the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure an empty buffer area.

  In the following step S3415, the coordinate data of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is grasped, and the coordinate data is set as the coordinate data of the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2. Thereafter, in step S3416, the scale information is set to “1” which is an initial value. As a result, the image corresponding to the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is displayed as it is (at the same magnification) at the position where the image corresponding to the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 was displayed.

  In the subsequent step S3417, other parameters are calculated and updated. In step S3407, the enlarged display designation information is stored, and the present calculation process is terminated.

  When the above processing is performed, the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is set as a drawing target and enlarged display designation information is set in the drawing list created in the drawing list output processing. The scale information of the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is set to the initial value “1”.

  That is, during the enlargement period, specifically, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is set in the drawing list over 100 frames from the enlargement display start timing. The enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is set in the drawing list created during the stop display period.

  In the second and subsequent processing in step S3415, processing for maintaining the coordinate data set in the previous processing time is executed.

  Next, an enlarged display symbol setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The enlarged symbol setting process is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 15).

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not enlarged display designation is set. If the enlarged display designation is not set, it means that the enlarged display is not being executed or does not start, so this setting process is ended as it is.

  If enlargement display designation is set, the process advances to step S3502 to grasp the address information of the symbol sprite data set in the current drawing list and read the symbol sprite data. Then, in step S3503, the grasped symbol information of the symbol sprite data is grasped, and this setting process is ended.

  Here, since the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 and its parameter information are set in the drawing list created during the enlargement display start timing and the enlargement period, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is stored during the enlargement display start timing and the enlargement period. To grasp. As for the scale information, the initial setting value “1” is grasped at the enlarged display start timing, while the changed scale information is grasped during the enlargement period.

  Further, since the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 and its parameter information are set in the drawing list created during the stop display period, the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 and its parameter information are grasped during the stop display period. In this case, for the scale information, the initial setting value “1” is grasped.

  By executing the above-described enlarged display symbol setting process, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the symbol sprite data is applied to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b in a state where the above parameters are applied. Drawn. When the scale information is changed scale information, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 corresponding to the changed scale information is displayed on the display screen G.

  Specifically, when it is the start timing of the enlarged display, since the scale information of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is initially set to “1”, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is displayed at the same magnification.

  In the expansion period, since the scale information is updated to the changed scale information, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is displayed at the magnification of the changed scale information.

  In the stop display period, since the scale information of the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is initially set to “1”, the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is displayed at the same magnification.

  When the changed scale information is applied to the symbol sprite data, linear interpolation processing corresponding to the changed scale information is performed. Thereby, it is possible to cope with an increase in the number of pixels accompanying enlargement. Note that the linear interpolation processing is as described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the enlarged display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the enlarged display. FIG. 61A shows the display screen G at the enlarged display start timing, and FIG. 61B shows the display when updating for 30 frames is performed. FIG. 61C shows the display screen G when the update for 60 frames is performed, and FIG. 61D shows the case where the update for 100 frames is performed, that is, in the stop display period. A display screen G is shown. In FIG. 61, the rearmost image and the effect image are omitted, but actually, the rearmost image and the effect image are displayed on the back side of the symbol.

  At the enlarged display start timing, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is set in the drawing list and the scale information is set to “1”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. An initial symbol image CP3 corresponding to the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is displayed at the same magnification.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 61B and 61C, the initial symbol image CP3 is gradually displayed larger as the frames overlap. In this case, the image quality of the initial symbol image CP3 is reduced as the initial symbol image CP3 is enlarged.

  In the stop display period, since the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is set in the drawing list, an enlarged symbol image CP4 corresponding to the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is displayed on the display screen G as shown in FIG. It is displayed in double. Then, the state where the enlarged symbol image CP4 is displayed is maintained over a predetermined period.

  As described above, by gradually increasing the scale information of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1, smooth enlarged display can be realized without preparing image data in the middle of enlarged display. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a smooth enlarged display while suppressing an increase in image data, and a variety of display modes can be achieved.

  In other words, when performing smooth enlarged display, a plurality of intermediate design sprite data (symbol sprite data having a size between the initial design sprite data SPD1 and the enlarged design sprite data SPD2) in the middle of the normal stage is prepared. A configuration is conceivable in which symbol sprite data corresponding to the update timing is set in the drawing list each time. However, with such a configuration, image data required for enlarged display increases, and there is a concern about an increase in capacity. On the other hand, according to this configuration, smooth enlarged display is realized by displaying the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 over a plurality of frames while changing the scale information.

  Here, in the expansion period in which the symbols gradually expand, the distinguishability of the symbols is low compared to the stop display period in which the symbols are stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the image enlargement process including the linear interpolation process is executed, the initial symbol image CP3 whose image quality has deteriorated, specifically, the blurred initial symbol image CP3 due to the smoothed edge portion is displayed. Even so, the degradation of the image quality is not noticeable.

  On the other hand, in the stop display period in which the symbols are stopped and displayed as compared with the expansion period, the design distinguishability is high. For this reason, when the initial symbol image CP3 whose image quality is reduced by the enlargement process is displayed, the deterioration of the image quality is conspicuous and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. However, if the configuration is such that high-order interpolation processing (high-precision interpolation processing) is executed from the viewpoint of suppressing deterioration in image quality, there is a concern about an increase in processing load.

  On the other hand, according to this configuration, during the stop display period, the enlarged symbol image CP4 is stopped and displayed at the same magnification in place of the initial symbol image CP3 whose image quality has deteriorated. Can be avoided.

  Further, when the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is displayed in a reduced size, there may be a disadvantage that the details of the enlarged symbol image CP4 are crushed by thinning out the pixels of the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 in accordance with the reduction magnification. This inconvenience is difficult to avoid even in a configuration that executes linear interpolation processing. This is because the edges are smoothed by the linear interpolation process. On the other hand, if it is a configuration that expresses a state in which the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is gradually enlarged only by the enlarged display, the inconvenience that the details are crushed is less likely to occur, and thus the inconvenience can be avoided.

  Further, the enlargement period and the enlargement speed in the case of enlargement display can be adjusted by adjusting a numerical value (“0.01” in this configuration) to be multiplied by the enlargement counter. Thereby, when the expansion period or the expansion speed is changed in the development stage, it is possible to easily cope with the change by adjusting the numerical value.

  Note that the display is not limited to the enlarged display of the symbol image, but can be applied to the enlarged display of the character image, and the target image for the enlarged display is arbitrary.

  Further, the enlarged display has been described, but the same applies to the reduced display. In this case, the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 may be set at the start timing, and the scale information of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 may be set to decrease every time the processing is repeated during the reduction period. During the stop display period, the initial symbol image CP3 may be displayed at the same magnification.

  In addition, when the scale information is applied to the symbol sprite data, the linear interpolation process is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interpolation process such as the linear interpolation process may not be performed. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to image display during the enlargement period. However, if attention is paid to the image quality of the image displayed on the display screen G during the enlargement period, a configuration in which linear interpolation processing is performed is preferable.

  Further, the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is configured to have a resolution twice that of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gradation of the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is set to the initial symbol sprite data SPD2. You may set higher than the gradation of SPD1. In this case, even if the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 and the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 have the same resolution, the deterioration of the image of the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 when enlarged is less noticeable than the deterioration of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity.

<Another form for enlarged display>
Another mode for performing enlarged display will be described.

  In this different form, the enlarged period is divided into a first period as a first period and a second period as a second period, and the symbol sprite data used in each period is changed and enlarged display is performed. Specifically, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is enlarged and displayed in the first period, and the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is reduced and displayed in the second period.

  An enlarged display symbol calculation process in another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an enlarged display symbol calculation process in another embodiment. Steps S3601 to S3607 are the same as steps S3401 to S3407, and steps S3620 to S3623 are the same as steps S3414 to S3417, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In step S3608, it is determined whether it is during the expansion period. If it is during the expansion period, the process advances to step S3609 to determine whether it is the first period. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the enlargement counter is greater than “49”. In view of the fact that the enlargement counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 every processing time after the enlarged display is started, it is determined whether or not 50 frames have elapsed since the enlarged display was started. I can say that.

  If it is the first period, processing for enlarging and displaying the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is executed. This process is the same as steps S3409 to S3413. Specifically, in step S3610, the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is grasped, and in step S3611, the currently set coordinate data is grasped. In step S3612, a process of adding 1 to the value of the enlargement counter is executed. In step S3613, change scale information relating to the current processing is calculated using the enlargement counter. Update to

  Thereafter, other parameters are updated in step S 3614, enlarged display designation information is stored in step S 3607, and this calculation process is terminated.

  When the above processing is performed, initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is set as a drawing target and enlarged display designation information is set in the drawing list created in the drawing list output processing. The scale information of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is set as changed scale information.

  On the other hand, when it is not the first period, it means the second period. In this case, a process of reducing and displaying the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is executed. Specifically, the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is grasped at step S3615, the coordinates of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 are grasped at step S3616, and the coordinates are set as the coordinates of the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2. Note that the currently set coordinate data is grasped in the process of step S3616 after the second time (after the 51st frame).

  After that, in step S3617, a process of adding 1 to the value of the enlargement counter is executed. In step S3618, the change scale information relating to the current processing time is calculated using the enlargement counter, and the scale information is changed. Update to scale information.

  Specifically, the value X of the change scale information is derived from the equation “X = 1−0.005 × (100−c)”, where c is the currently set value of the enlargement counter. In the case of c = 50, X = 0.75, and by adding 1 to the enlargement counter, X is added by 0.005. That is, in the second period, the changed scale information is an arithmetic sequence of “0.75” for the first term and “0.005” for the intersection.

  Thereafter, other parameters are updated in step S3619, enlarged display designation information is stored in step S3607, and the present calculation process is terminated.

  When the above processing is performed, the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is set as a drawing target and enlarged display designation information is set in the drawing list created in the drawing list output processing. The scale information of the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is set to the changed scale information updated in step S3618. The changed scale information is scale information indicating the reduction ratio.

  In the writing process (step S505), drawing data is created based on the drawing list. As a result, the symbol sprite data is drawn with the above parameters applied to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b.

  In addition, when the change scale information is the reduction magnification, that is, in the writing process when the symbol sprite data is reduced, a process of thinning out pixels set in the symbol sprite data is executed according to the reduction magnification. Specifically, the pixel information setting is skipped at a specific interval corresponding to the reduction ratio. For example, if the process of setting the numerical information of 7 pixels continuous in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction in the unit setting area is executed in the pattern sprite data, the numerical information of the next pixel is not set in the unit setting area. By applying the processing to the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, an image reduced to (7/8) × (7/8) ≈0.76 times is obtained. In addition, about the process in the case of reducing, it is not restricted to this, For example, you may perform a linear interpolation process.

  Here, since the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 is twice as large as the initial symbol sprite data SPD1, the size of the enlarged symbol image CP4 displayed on the display screen G when the changed scale information is applied is Based on the size of the sprite data SPD1, “2.0 × X”. When the start timing of the second period, that is, the value of the enlargement counter is “50”, the size of the enlarged symbol image CP4 displayed on the display screen G is about 1.50 times the initial symbol image CP3. It becomes. Thereafter, each time the enlargement counter is updated, it increases by about 0.01, about 1.51, about 1.52,.

  From the above, a state in which the initial symbol image CP3 gradually increases over the first period and the second period is displayed. The boundary between the first period and the second period will be described. The magnification of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 when the enlargement counter in the first period is the maximum value, that is, when the enlargement counter is “49” is 1.49 times. On the other hand, when the enlargement counter in the second period is the minimum value, that is, when the enlargement counter is “50”, the enlargement reduced to 1.50 times the initial symbol sprite data SPD1. The symbol image CP4 is displayed.

  Here, since the number of pixels to be interpolated increases as the magnification increases, the image quality deteriorates. In this regard, when performing enlarged display only by enlarging the initial symbol sprite data SPD1, it is necessary to double the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 at maximum. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the maximum magnification of the initial symbol sprite data SPD1 is 1.50 times, and a larger magnification image is expressed by reducing the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2. Thereby, compared with the structure which expands and displays the initial symbol sprite data SPD1, the present embodiment can suppress the deterioration of image quality. Therefore, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be suppressed.

  The enlarged symbol image CP4 is stopped and displayed during the stop display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by updating the coordinate information applied to the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2, the enlarged symbol image CP4 becomes a predetermined symbol. You may display so that it may move to a direction gradually. That is, the parameter information applied to the enlarged symbol sprite data SPD2 may be gradually changed during the stop display period.

  In addition, a high-order interpolation process such as a bicubic process may be performed when the image is reduced. As a result, it is possible to avoid inconvenience that details are crushed when the image is reduced. However, if attention is paid to an increase in processing load, the configuration for performing the thinning process is superior.

<About the configuration when performing curtain production>
Next, a configuration for performing a curtain effect will be described.

  The curtain effect is an effect performed over a plurality of frames. The curtain effect is displayed in a state where the curtain is opened in the display screen G, and is performed after the opening / closing operation effect. It is a two-stage animation production consisting of a fluctuation production in which the curtain fluctuates. Both have different operating scales. Specifically, the opening / closing operation effect is an effect that expresses a large movement of opening / closing of the curtain, and the fluctuation effect is an effect of expressing a relatively small movement compared to opening / closing of the curtain such as fluctuation of the curtain.

  In this pachinko machine, image data for curtain production used for curtain production is set. The contents of the image set in the curtain effect image data will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the curtain effect image data, opening / closing operation image data for expressing the curtain effect opening / closing operation effect and fluctuation image data for expressing the curtain effect fluctuation effect are set. Specifically, as the image data for opening / closing operation, as shown in FIG. 63A, open image data IMD1 in which an open image IM1 indicating the open state of the curtain is drawn is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 63C, closed image data IMD3 in which a closed image IM3 indicating the closed state of the curtain is drawn is set. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), in-operation image data IMD2 in which an in-operation image IM2 showing a state during the transition from the open state of the curtain to the closed state is drawn is set. The curtain is changed from the open state to the closed state by sequentially switching the image to be displayed on the display screen G in the order of the active image IM2 and the closed image IM3 every time a predetermined update timing comes from the state in which the open image IM1 is displayed. Expresses the opening and closing movement effects.

  On the other hand, as the fluctuation image data, as shown in FIGS. 63D, 63E, and 63F, the curtain is gradually displaced slightly in a predetermined direction (right direction) with respect to the closed image IM3. The first fluctuation image data IMD4 on which the first fluctuation image IM4 is drawn, the second fluctuation image data IMD5 in which the second fluctuation image IM5 is drawn, and the third fluctuation image data IMD6 in which the third fluctuation image IM6 is drawn. Is set. The fluctuation images IM4, IM5, IM6 and the closing image IM3 are similar. Using the closed image IM3 as a reference, an image to be displayed on the display screen G like a flip book is sequentially switched to each of the fluctuation images IM4, IM5, and IM6, thereby expressing how the curtain is fluctuating.

  Which of these images is displayed at which timing is preset in the data table for curtain production. The curtain effect data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data table for curtain production.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the curtain effect data table includes pointer information for grasping the time series, and a curtain effect image to be controlled for curtain effect in a one-to-one correspondence with the pointer information. Data specific information is set. The display CPU 72 grasps the specific information of the curtain effect image data corresponding to the current pointer information of the data table in the task processing, and sets the image data corresponding to the specific information of the curtain effect image data as a drawing instruction target. recognize. Then, a drawing list including the image data is created.

  In the curtain effect data table, other information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the pointer information. In the other information, information for specifying other image data to be rendered at that time and other parameter information such as scale information applied to the image data are set.

  In addition to the information set in correspondence with the pointer information, the curtain effect data table includes program data for executing processes related to curtain effects (calculation processing for curtain effects, which will be described later). It is set separately.

  Here, the pointer information and the image for one frame have a one-to-one correspondence, and when the pointer information is updated, an image corresponding to the next frame is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 64, program data related to a drawing target to be displayed on the display screen G at the curtain production start timing is set in correspondence with the pointer information A (1), and the pointer information A (2). Corresponding to the above, program data relating to a drawing target to be displayed on the display screen G when one frame has elapsed from the start timing of the curtain effect is set. That is, the pointer information is information for specifying the frame number with the curtain effect start timing as the first frame.

  The specific information of the curtain effect image data will be described in detail. The specific information B corresponding to the open image data IMD1 is associated with the start timing of the curtain effect, that is, the pointer information A (1) indicating the first frame of the curtain effect. (1) is set.

  In the pointer information A (2) corresponding to the timing when one frame has elapsed from the start timing of the curtain effect, that is, the pointer information A (2) in the second frame, the specific information B (1) corresponding to the open image data IMD1 Are associated. The specific information B (1) is set from pointer information A (1) of the first frame to pointer information A (m-1) of the (m-1) th frame. Note that m is a natural number of 3 or more.

  Specific information B (2) corresponding to the in-operation image data IMD2 is set in correspondence with the pointer information A (m) of the mth frame. As a result, the image data to be drawn is switched from the open image data IMD1 to the operating image data IMD2. The specific information B (2) corresponding to the operating image data IMD2 is set up to the (m + n−1) th pointer information A (m + n−1). Note that n is a natural number of 2 or more.

  Specific information B (3) corresponding to the closed image data IMD3 is set in correspondence with the pointer information A (m + n) of the m + n frame. As a result, the image data to be drawn is switched from the operating image data IMD2 to the closed image data IMD3. Therefore, the opening / closing operation effect in the curtain effect ends. That is, the specific information B (2) of the image data corresponding to the opening / closing operation effect is set from the first frame to the m + n frame.

  Here, the closing image data IMD3 is set as image data corresponding to both the opening / closing operation effect and the fluctuation effect. That is, the (m + n) th frame is not only the end timing of the opening / closing operation effect but also the start timing of the fluctuation effect. As a result, switching from the opening / closing operation effect to the fluctuation effect is performed without a sense of incongruity.

  The specific information B (3) corresponding to the closed image data IMD3 is set from the m + n frame to the m + n + k−1 frame pointer information A (m + n + k−1). That is, the specific information B (3) is set over k frames. Note that k is a natural number of 2 or more.

  Specific information B (4) corresponding to the first fluctuation image data IMD4 is set in correspondence with the pointer information A (m + n + k). As a result, the image data to be rendered switches from the closed image data IMD3 to the first fluctuation image data IMD4. The specific information B (4) corresponding to the first fluctuation image data IMD4 is set up to the pointer information A (m + n + 2k-1) of the m + n + 2k-1 frame. That is, the specific information B (4) is set over k frames.

  Specific information B (5) corresponding to the second fluctuation image data IMD5 is set in correspondence with the pointer information A (m + n + 2k). As a result, the image data to be rendered switches from the first fluctuation image data IMD4 to the second fluctuation image data IMD5. The specific information B (5) corresponding to the second fluctuation image data IMD5 is set up to the pointer information A (m + n + 3k−1) of the m + n + 3k−1 frame. That is, the specific information B (5) is set over k frames.

  Specific information B (5) corresponding to the third fluctuation image data IMD6 is set in correspondence with the pointer information A (m + n + 3k). As a result, the image data to be drawn is switched from the second fluctuation image data IMD5 to the third fluctuation image data IMD6. Further, in the other information C (m + n + 3k) corresponding to the pointer information A (m + n + 3k), information specifying the curtain effect end timing is set. By grasping the information, a process for ending the curtain effect is executed. That is, the specific information B (3) to B (6) corresponding to the fluctuation effect is set from the m + n frame to the m + n + 3k frame.

  From the above, specific information B (1) -B (3) corresponding to the opening / closing operation effect is set in the frame before the m + n frame, and the fluctuation effect is supported in the frame after the m + n frame. Specific information B (3) to B (6) is set. The m + n-th frame is a frame that switches between effects, and is a frame that supports both effects.

  Here, the relationship between the number of frames will be described. The number of frames corresponding to the opening / closing operation effect is set to be the same as the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation effect. Specifically, since the number of frames corresponding to the opening / closing operation effect is m + n and the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation effect is 3k + 1, each of m, n, and k is set so that m + n = 3k + 1.

  A specific processing configuration performed using the curtain effect data table set as described above will be described.

  Calculation processing for curtain production will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The curtain effect calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process in step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15). The curtain effect calculation processing is activated when the curtain effect data table is set.

  First, in step S3701, the curtain effect image data to be drawn is grasped based on the curtain effect data table. Specifically, specific information corresponding to the currently set pointer information is grasped by referring to the curtain effect data table, and the image data is grasped based on the grasp result.

  When the image data is switched, the process for switching the image data at the switching destination to be a control target has already been completed at a timing before the grasping process related to the switching. Specifically, in the task process (FIG. 15), the process for starting control for the image data to be switched to has already been completed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the data corresponding to the image data at the switching destination is overwritten in the buffer area corresponding to the image data before the switching. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure an empty buffer area.

  Thereafter, in step S3702, the parameters of the image data grasped in step S3701 are calculated and derived, and the control information is updated by writing the derived parameter information. Then, this calculation process ends. In updating the parameter for the curtain effect calculation process, the update for changing only the parameter information for the same curtain effect image data is not performed.

  When the above processing is executed, curtain rendering image data corresponding to the frame (pointer information) is set in the drawing list created in the drawing list output processing in step S408 of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11). . Then, in the drawing process of the VDP 76 (FIG. 13), drawing data corresponding to the curtain effect image data set in the drawing list is created, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output, whereby the display screen G is displayed. An image for curtain production is displayed.

  By repeatedly executing the above processing, the image is updated for each frame, and a curtain effect is expressed. A mode in which the curtain effect is expressed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a timing chart showing a curtain effect.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), at the timing of t15, which is the curtain production start timing, an image set in the first frame in the curtain production data tail, that is, an open image corresponding to the specific information B (1). IM1 is displayed.

  When the specific information of the same curtain effect image data is set over a plurality of pointer information, the same curtain effect image is displayed over a plurality of frames. Here, since the specific information B (1) is set up to the (m-1) th frame, the display of the open image IM1 is maintained up to the (m-1) th frame. That is, the open image IM1 is displayed on the display screen G over m frames.

  At the timing t16 when the image of the mth frame is displayed, the specific information of the curtain effect image data is specified from the specific information B (1) corresponding to the open image data IMD1 to the specific information corresponding to the operating image data IMD2. The information B (2) is switched (updated). As a result, the operating image IM2 is displayed on the display screen G instead of the open image IM1. Since the specific information B (2) corresponding to the operating image data IMD2 is set up to the (m + n−1) th frame, the operating image IM2 is displayed on the display screen G over the n frames.

  Thereafter, the specific information of the curtain effect image data is changed from the specific information B (2) corresponding to the operating image data IMD2 to the closed image data IMD3 at the timing t17 which is the timing at which the image of the m + n frame is displayed. The corresponding specific information B (3) is switched. As a result, the closed image IM3 is displayed on the display screen G instead of the operating image IM2 as shown in FIG. 66 (c).

  By performing the above processing, a state in which the curtain shifts from the open state to the closed state from the first frame to the m + n frame is expressed. That is, the period from the timing t15 to the timing t17 becomes the opening / closing operation effect period Tx corresponding to the opening / closing operation effect. The opening / closing operation effect period Tx is a period corresponding to m + n frames.

  After the timing of t17, a fluctuation effect is performed. Specifically, the specific information of the curtain effect image data changes from the specific information B (3) corresponding to the closed image data IMD3 to the first fluctuation at timing t18, which is the timing at which the image of the m + n + k frame is displayed. The specific information B (4) corresponding to the image data IMD4 is switched. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 66 (d), the first fluctuation image IM4 is displayed on the display screen G instead of the closed image IM3, and the display state is maintained.

  Thereafter, at the timing t19 when the image of the m + n + 2k frame is displayed, the specific information of the curtain effect image data is changed from the specific information B (4) corresponding to the first fluctuation image data IMD4 to the second fluctuation image data IMD5. To specific information B (5) corresponding to. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 66E, the second fluctuation image IM5 is displayed on the display screen G instead of the first fluctuation image IM4, and the display state is maintained.

  The third fluctuation image IM6 is displayed instead of the second fluctuation image IM5 at the timing t20, which is the timing at which the image of the m + n + 3k frame is displayed (see FIG. 66 (f)), and the curtain effect ends. To do.

  By performing the above processing, a state in which the curtain gradually swings in a predetermined direction (right direction) is expressed. In this case, the period from the timing t17 to the timing t20 is a fluctuation effect period Ty corresponding to the fluctuation effect. The fluctuation production period Ty is a period corresponding to 3k + 1 frames. As described above, since m, n, and k are set so that m + n = 3k + 1, the opening / closing operation effect period Tx and the fluctuation effect period Ty are set to be the same.

  Here, the image data used for the opening / closing operation effect is three frames of the open image data IMD1, the operating image data IMD2, and the closed image data IMD3. On the other hand, the image data used for the fluctuation effect is four frames of the closed image data IMD3 and the first to third fluctuation image data IMD4, IMD5, and IMD6. The closed image data IMD3 is used for both effects.

  According to this configuration, when performing the opening / closing operation effect, the average number of frames in which image data for one frame is used is (m + n) / 3. On the other hand, in the case of performing a fluctuation effect, the average number of frames in which image data for one frame is used is (3k + 1) / 4. Since m, n, and k are integers of 2 or more, one frame of image data is used over a plurality of frames.

  Here, when the display mode is switched smoothly, image data corresponding to a display mode showing a state in the middle between the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change is prepared for each frame. A configuration in which each frame is sequentially updated is preferable. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern about an increase in image data. In particular, when performing an effect such as movement of a specific character, as described above, it can be expressed by preparing sprite data and updating coordinate data corresponding to the sprite data. When the entire screen changes like this, since it is necessary to prepare image data indicating the state of the change, the capacity of the image data is likely to increase.

  On the other hand, according to this configuration, image data for one frame is used over a plurality of frames. Thereby, it is possible to reduce image data when performing an effect in which the display mode changes.

  Here, since m + n = 3k + 1, the average number of frames when performing the opening / closing operation effect is larger than the fluctuation effect. That is, the average number of frames in which one image data is used differs depending on the contents of the effect.

  The relationship between the contents of the production and the average number of frames will be specifically described. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the frame rate is 50 fps and m + n = 3k + 1 = 50 fps. In this case, the opening / closing operation effect period Tx and the fluctuation effect period Ty are each 1.0 (s). That is, the curtain closes in 1 second, and then the curtain swings over 1 second.

  The change in the display mode of the image displayed on the display screen G per unit time differs between the opening / closing operation effect and the fluctuation effect. That is, the image content is greatly different between the open image IM1 and the closed image IM3, but the image content is similar between the closed image IM3 and the third fluctuation image IM6. It can be said that it is larger than the change of the display mode in the fluctuation effect. In particular, since the opening / closing operation effect period Tx and the fluctuation effect period Ty are set to be the same, the change in the display mode per unit period is larger than the fluctuation effect. For this reason, the curtain closes quickly and then the curtain appears to swing slowly. In other words, when the period required for the production is the same, the larger the change between the display mode at the start of the production and the display mode at the end of the production, the faster the display mode changes. In this case, the image distinctiveness in appearance is low.

  In an effect that makes it seem that the display mode has been switched quickly, the distinction of the image according to the appearance is low, and therefore the mode of the switching is difficult to grasp. Thereby, even if the image data indicating the display mode in the middle is reduced in order to increase the average number of frames, the fact is hardly recognized by the player. Therefore, when the display mode is switched quickly, it is possible to reduce the image data indicating the display mode in the middle.

  On the other hand, when the display mode changes slowly, as in the effect of the curtain swinging, the appearance of the image is highly distinguishable, so that the state of the change is easily grasped. In this case, if the image data indicating the display mode in the middle is reduced in order to increase the average number of frames, it becomes noticeable as a backlash when the display mode is switched. On the other hand, when the switching of the display mode is slow, the average number of frames is adjusted to be small by preparing a lot of image data indicating the display mode in the middle. Thereby, the change of a display mode can be expressed smoothly.

  From the above, by adjusting the average number of frames according to the contents of the effects, it is possible to reduce the image data while appropriately performing the effects.

  Also, the image displayed at the end of the opening / closing operation effect was used as the image at the start of the fluctuation effect. Accordingly, it is possible to recognize a series of effects without giving a sense of incongruity when effects of different modes are switched, and it is possible to reduce the volume of image data.

  Although the opening / closing operation effect period Tx and the fluctuation effect period Ty are set to the same period (m + n = 3k + 1), the present invention is not limited to this and may be set to be different from each other. In short, it is only necessary to set the average number of frames in the opening / closing operation effect to be larger than the average number of frames in the fluctuation effect, and specifically, m so that (m + n) / 3> (3k + 1) / 4. , N, k may be set.

  Although the curtain effect has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of image data indicating that the design image rotates about the vertical direction as a rotation axis may be prepared and displayed by switching every plural frames. As a result, it is possible to express the effect that the three-dimensionally formed symbol image rotates as if the vertical direction is the rotation axis. In short, it is preferable to apply this configuration to an effect in which an image in the middle of the transition cannot be created by changing the parameter information applied to the image data.

  Further, the resolution or gradation of the image data used for the opening / closing operation effect may be set smaller than the image data used for the fluctuation effect. Thereby, the data amount per image data can be reduced. In this case, the player may feel uncomfortable with the deterioration of the image. However, since the switching of the display mode is difficult to grasp in the opening / closing operation effect, the deterioration of the image is hardly noticeable. Thereby, the amount of data can be reduced without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Further, the image data corresponding to the specific information is grasped at each update timing (for each frame) and the parameters are updated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same image data and the same parameters are used. In some cases, the process of grasping the image data (step S3701) and the parameter updating process (step S3702) may not be executed. In this case, in the data table, information for grasping that each of the above processes is not executed may be set in advance, and a process for determining whether or not the information is set before executing the above process may be executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The NAND flash memory 102 provided in the display control device 70 has a lower data transfer speed than the NOR flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, since the boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, which requires a faster reading speed than the NAND flash memory 102, supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started. If the pachinko machine 10 is reset in some cases, the display CPU 72 can quickly start the initial activation process. Therefore, compared with the configuration in which the program data for initial activation is stored in the NAND flash memory 102, the control in the display CPU 72 can be started smoothly.

  Further, the ROM 53 of the main controller 50 uses a random accessible memory such as a NOR flash memory, and the NAND flash memory 102 is used for the memory module 74 of the display controller 70, so that upstream control means can be used. While simplifying the configuration relating to reading of control program data for a certain main control device 50, the display control device 70, which is a downstream control means, is configured with an emphasis on increasing the capacity of data that can be stored in advance. Can do.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, the display CPU 72 is not included in the display target on the display screen G in a predetermined frame, but may be included in the display target on the display screen G in a subsequent frame. Control start processing for parameter derivation is performed in advance on the image data corresponding to the individual image having the characteristics. Thereby, it is possible to distribute the control start timing so that there are not many individual images to be controlled in one processing time, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing loss.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames is stored in advance as a plurality of divided part data, so that the NAND flash memory 102 can obtain a single image data. There is no need to set the size that can be stored excessively large. In addition, if the background data for scrolling is transferred as a single image data, the transfer time becomes longer, but since it can be transferred in divided part data units, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, when displaying an animation for displacing a small unit group, each small unit group is not controlled as an individual sprite, but a plurality of small unit images are set together. In this configuration, the still images are sequentially switched. Thereby, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load on the display CPU 72.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26, when the effect data PD17 is set in the frame regions 82a and 82b, an addition process is executed. Thereby, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is displayed in a state in which the color information and the brightness level of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed are reflected. Since the effect image CH2 is an image that allows the back side to pass through, such as light or water droplets, a sense of incongruity occurs when displayed without regard to the background image. On the other hand, by performing the addition process, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state in which the background image is reflected, which is visually preferable without causing the above-mentioned uncomfortable feeling.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29, in the unit area in which the effect data PD18 is drawn, the numerical information already stored in the unit area is reduced by the ratio of the α value of the partial addition data PD19. The numerical information obtained as a result of adding the numerical information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical information after being set is set. Thereby, after rendering of the effect data PD18, it is possible to suppress the numerical value information of RGB in the unit areas of the frame regions 82a and 82b from being the maximum value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, composite data for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effect images is created, and the composite data is used for subsequent use. As a result, the processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a plurality of effect data is drawn every time the execution timing of a plurality of effect effects is reached.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37, partial display of individual images such as symbols and characters is performed using α data and α palette data. Thereby, the partial display of the individual image can be performed in a configuration in which the image data cannot be partially handled by the VDP 76. These α data and α palette data have a smaller data capacity than image data. Therefore, compared with a configuration in which image data for whole display and image data for partial display are individually prepared for individual images to be partially displayed, an increase in storage capacity necessary for storing image data is suppressed. Partial display of individual images can be performed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42, the background image switching mode is gradually changed over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect, thereby making the background image switching mode novel. In addition, the background image switching mode can be diversified. In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image at the front display timing are linked, and the α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect are combined with the linked image data. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the alpha data for wipe switching effects is individually synthesized for each of the image data PD39 to PD42.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, as image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, the first sprite data that is shifted by half a dot in the moving direction of the sprite CH5. The PD 48 and the second sprite data PD49 are stored. These sprite data PD48 and PD49 are used alternately. As a result, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement can be displayed as if it is progressing by half a dot with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b for each frame or as much as the corresponding amount with reference to the display screen G. The sprite CH5 can be moved and displayed smoothly.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, a zoom-in effect can be performed using the scaler 97, and a zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. . For example, it is possible to similarly perform a zoom-in effect by drawing each image data in an enlarged state when drawing in the frame regions 82a and 82b. In this case, however, all the image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 are enlarged. The processing needs to be executed, and the processing load on the VDP 76 is increased. In addition, for example, a configuration in which image data for normal size and image data for enlarged size are set in advance for the same image is conceivable. In this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, processing for enlarging and displaying an image is performed not by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 but by the display circuit 94. Therefore, it is possible to perform a zoom-in effect or a zoom-out effect while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity necessary for storing the image data.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are pre-branch moving image data PD54 corresponding to the pre-branch effect and post-branch A data corresponding to the post-branch A effect. The moving image data PD55 is set separately from the after-branch B moving image data PD56 corresponding to the after-branch B effect. Therefore, until the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the pre-branch moving image data PD54 is sequentially drawn in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54. A pre-production can be performed. In addition, after the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target among the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branches is set in the moving image data PD55 and PD56. The target post-branch effect can be performed simply by sequentially drawing in the order of frames.

  When still image data for a plurality of frames is created by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branching in moving image data. In addition, both a single moving image data in which a pre-branch effect and a post-branch A effect are set and a single moving image data in which a pre-branch effect and a post-branch B effect are set are prepared in advance. The structure to keep is also considered. However, since it is necessary to output moving image data from still image data corresponding to the first sequence of frames, it is difficult to output still image data from an intermediate sequence of frames. Then, when super reach display is started, it becomes necessary to decode both moving image data. In this case, there is a concern that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and the storage capacity of the VRAM 75 will need to be increased. By comparing and preparing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 as described above as compared with each assumed configuration, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used are switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Therefore, the super reach display as described above can be suitably executed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 66, the same image data is set over a plurality of frames in the display effect (transmission effect, enlarged display, curtain effect). Thereby, compared with the structure which prepares image data for every flame | frame, the reduction of the image data required in order to display a display effect can be aimed at. Therefore, it is possible to diversify display modes while suppressing an increase in image data.

  In particular, the transmission effect and the enlarged display are configured such that an intermediate image indicating a transition state is displayed by changing parameter information applied to the image data. Thereby, it is possible to suitably display the state of changing without preparing image data corresponding to the intermediate image.

  Further, as described in the curtain effect, the update interval of the image data is set according to the display mode. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the image data while reducing the uncomfortable feeling given to the player.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

  The configuration shown in FIG. 67 includes the main controller 50 as in the first embodiment. The main control device 50 includes a payout control device 55 for controlling the payout device 56, a power supply for driving and controlling the game ball launching mechanism 58 and a function of supplying power to each device including the main control device 50. The firing control device 57, the main display unit 33 for displaying the result of the game times, and the accessory display unit 34 for displaying the result of the electric character release lottery are electrically connected. In addition, a sound emission control device 60 is provided that controls driving of the various light emitting units 35, 36, 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 and receives an operation signal from the effect operating device 48. Furthermore, a display control device 130 for controlling the symbol display device 31 based on a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 is provided.

  The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 is different from that of the display control device 70 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to an input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137. Is done. Note that the display CPU 131 receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 is not limited to a structure that directly receives a command from the sound light emission control device 60, and includes a structure that receives a command relayed to the relay board. It is.

  The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via a bus. Based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60, the display CPU 131 stores various data stored in the memory module 133 in the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134. The transfer instruction to transfer is performed. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and performs a drawing instruction for displaying a 3D image on the symbol display device 31 based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described.

  The memory module 133 stores in advance control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data, and also stores in advance various image data (image information) for displaying a 3D image. It is a storage means. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for memory retention, and in detail, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM).

  Various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes image data for objects such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, texture image data to be pasted on the object, and one frame worth of data. Image data for the back surface constituting the image on the back surface.

  Here, an object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system (world space), which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. It is. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to the object image data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object as the origin. That is, in the image data for each object, the relative position (that is, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

  A texture is an image to be pasted on each polygon of an object, and a texture image is pasted on an object, thereby generating a display image including an image corresponding to the object, for example, a design or a character. The manner of holding the image data for texture is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette table referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Yes.

  The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image. The manner of holding the image data for the back is arbitrary, but for example, it is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which two-dimensional still image data is compressed. Incidentally, a plate polygon is used when the image data for the back side is arranged in the world coordinate system.

  The work RAM 132 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 133 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133, control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance until the processing execution timing in the display CPU 131 corresponding to the control data comes. The display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  Incidentally, when the work RAM 132 is compared by reading data of the same capacity, the work RAM 132 is used whose reading speed (transfer speed) is faster than a NAND flash memory 162 described later. In other words, when the work RAM 132 is compared by reading data of the same capacity, a work RAM 132 having a shorter period than that of the NAND flash memory 162 is used.

  The VRAM 134 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and holding, and an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory in detail. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbit, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed satisfactorily. The VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 134 includes a development buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance until the execution timing of the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. The VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135. The VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144, and a mode buffer 145, which will be described later in detail.

  Incidentally, when the VRAM 134 is compared by reading data of the same capacity, the VRAM 134 is used whose reading speed (transfer speed) is faster than a NAND flash memory 162 described later. In other words, the VRAM 134 is used in which the period required for reading is shorter than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when compared by reading data of the same capacity.

  The VDP 135 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the development buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. Yes, it is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 31b incorporated in the design display device 31 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a. Since the VDP 135 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 135 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, and a display circuit 155. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and an I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

  The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 stores a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 in the register 153. Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object specified as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after placing an object in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display screen G.

  Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and attaches a texture to each clipped object to determine the appearance of the object. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on depth information, and renders drawing data for one frame, which is two-dimensional data, as a frame buffer. Created in 142. The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are stored. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute processing according to the contents of the above. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute the process only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using a program.

  Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame regions 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame region 142a and a second frame region 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color method is employed, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration that can display only 256 colors in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b are provided in the frame buffer 142, drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. The creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame regions. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

  In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame region 142a or the second frame region 142b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 through the connected output port 138. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 142 a and 142 b to be output to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 31. Based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

  Further, the display mode control unit 154 executes predetermined processing based on the drawing list stored in the register 153 when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode. The predetermined process will be described later.

<Specific Configuration of Memory Module 133>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 133 will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a block diagram for explaining a hardware configuration of the memory module 133. As shown in FIG. 68, the memory module 133 is configured by packaging a controller 161 and a NAND flash memory 162 into one package.

  The NAND flash memory 162 is provided with a memory cell array. In the memory cell array, a control program area 163 storing control program data for the display CPU 131 and an image displayed on the symbol display device 31 are displayed. An image data area 164 storing image data to be used is provided.

  The image data area 164 includes an object storage area 165 that stores object image data, a texture storage area 166 that stores texture image data, and a back image storage area that stores image data for the back surface. 167. The object storage area 165 is provided with a connected object storage area 165a that stores image data for the connected object. The connected object will be described later in detail.

  The controller 161 includes a main body side I / F 171 that transmits / receives data to / from the display CPU 131 that is the transfer instruction source and the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 that are the data transfer destinations, and a storage side I that transmits / receives data to / from the NAND flash memory 162. / F172, controller CPU 173 which is a control unit for performing data control processing in controller 161 and physical block management processing of NAND flash memory 162, control ROM 174 and control RAM 175, and NAND flash based on transfer instructions from controller CPU 173 A transfer execution circuit 176 that reads data from the memory 162, a cache memory 177 that temporarily stores data read by the transfer execution circuit 176, and a NAND flash memo An error correction circuit 178 performs correction of the read error detection and the detected errors in the data from the 162, and a.

  In general, the NAND flash memory 162 is used avoiding a block including a defect in the memory cell array. And the presence and location of this defective block differ from one solid to another. Therefore, the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133 needs to be associated with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 162, and the association is executed by the controller CPU 173.

  Specifically, the control ROM 174 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) for associating a logical address with an address of each page of the physical block. The address designation command received from the display CPU 131 is temporarily stored in the address designation buffer of the control RAM 175. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 175, the controller CPU 173 reads the address management table from the control ROM 174 and grasps the page address of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, the controller CPU 173 issues a transfer instruction to the transfer execution circuit 176, and the transfer execution circuit 176 transfers the data so that the physical address data related to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177. Processing is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 177 is transferred to the work RAM 132 or VRAM 134.

  Incidentally, as the control ROM 174, a memory such as a mask ROM or a NOR flash memory capable of reading data at random access is used. Further, the cache memory 177 is used that has a read speed (transfer speed) faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when compared by reading data of the same capacity. In other words, the cache memory 177 is used in which the period required for the read is shorter than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when compared with the data read of the same capacity. Specifically, it has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for memory retention, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used.

  The memory module 133 is provided with a boot memory 179 in which boot data for initial startup in the display CPU 131 is stored in advance. As the boot memory 179, a mask ROM is used so that random access is possible, and when the same capacity data read is compared, the read speed (transfer speed) is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162. It is used. In other words, as the boot memory 179, a memory having a shorter read period than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when compared with data read of the same capacity is used.

  The boot memory 179 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data reading speed is faster than the NAND flash memory 162, and may be an internal power source such as a battery. A DRAM unit or an SRAM unit including

  The storage capacity of the boot memory 179 is set to be smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 162. Specifically, the storage capacity is the same, substantially the same as or similar to the storage capacity for one page in the NAND flash memory 162. The boot memory 179 stores boot data for initial startup in advance. When the display CPU 131 executes processing at the time of initial startup, data from the boot memory 179 instead of the NAND flash memory 162 is stored. Is read out. As the boot data for initial startup, an instruction code for initial setting of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 and an instruction code for transferring data stored in the NAND flash memory 162 to the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 are set.

  The controller 161 executes data transfer processing. The contents of the data transfer process are the same as the data transfer process (FIG. 7) of the controller 101 in the first embodiment. In addition, the operational effect of executing the data transfer process is the same as that of the first embodiment.

<Development Buffer 141 of Work RAM 132 and VRAM 134>
Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 to which data is transferred in advance from the memory module 133 will be described.

  First, the work RAM 132 will be described.

  In the work RAM 132, as shown in FIG. 67, while there is a possibility that the transferred data may be used even after it has been used once, specifically, power to itself is stored. There is provided a regular area 132a for storing and maintaining the supply, and a change area 132b to be overwritten when other data is transferred after use.

  Program data necessary for the main processing (FIG. 9), V interrupt processing (FIG. 11), command interrupt processing, and the like to proceed in the display CPU 131 is written in the regular area 132a. By providing the regular area 132a, main processing, V interrupt processing, command interrupt processing, and the like that are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals can be smoothly started.

  When it is necessary to temporarily store data exceeding the storage capacity of the change area 132b, all or a part of the data in the regular area 132a can be used as long as smooth processing in the display CPU 131 is not hindered. May be temporarily erased. In this case, the return of data to the regular area 132a needs to be performed before the start of the corresponding process.

  In the change area 132b, program data necessary for executing a subroutine that is started as necessary in each of these processes is written. In addition, program data necessary for a subroutine to be executed next during execution of a predetermined subroutine may be transferred to the change area 132b. It is done not to erase. By providing the change area 132b as described above, data transfer can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 132 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, backup power is not supplied to the work RAM 132. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the work RAM 132 until then is erased or destroyed.

  Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 will be described.

  The development buffer 141 continues to supply power to itself while the situation where the transferred image data may be used even after it has been used continues. A normal area 141a for storing and holding data and a change area 141b to be overwritten when other image data is transferred after use are provided.

  In the regular area 141a, object image data, texture image data, and back image data used when the symbol display on the symbol display device 31 is started are written. The abnormality notification data used when displaying the abnormality notification image when an abnormality is detected is written. Since the regular area 141a is provided, even if the display CPU 131 suddenly gives a drawing instruction, the VDP 135 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the common area 141a. it can.

  When it is necessary to temporarily store image data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 141b, all or one of the regular areas 141a is within a range that does not hinder smooth image display on the symbol display device 31. The data of the copy may be temporarily erased. In this case, the restoration of the image data to the regular area 141a needs to be performed by the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

  In the change area 141b, object image data, texture image data, back image data, and the like are written. In addition, the image data necessary for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 141b during the execution of the predetermined effect, but the transfer erases the image data required for the effect during the execution. It is done so as not to. By providing the change area 141b as described above, data transfer can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the development buffer 141 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 134. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored in the VRAM 134 until then is erased or destroyed.

<Basic Processing in Display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

  In the display CPU 131, the main process is activated when the supply of operating power is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. The contents of the main process are the same as the main process (FIG. 9) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the following points.

  The initial image data for which a transfer request is made in step S307 is not a mere 3D image data but a combination of 2D still image data and plate polygon image data. In addition, various parameters grasped in step S311 include address information of the area where the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 134, information on the frame regions 142a and 142b in which drawing data should be created using the initial image data, The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 include information for creating drawing data corresponding to the initial image from the initial image data.

  Further, the regular image data for which a transfer request is made in step S314 includes image data for the back surface used when the symbol display on the symbol display device 31 is started, and displays the symbol. The image data for the object and the image data for the texture are included. These back image data and image data for displaying a design are set corresponding to the type of display mode, but the regular image data includes image data in both display modes. In addition, abnormality notification data used when an abnormality notification image is displayed when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected is included. This abnormality notification data is for 2D still image data and plate polygons. It is a combination with the image data.

  By executing the main process in the display CPU 131, it is allowed to execute the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. The contents of the command interrupt process are the same as those in the first embodiment. The contents of the V interrupt process are the same as the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the task process of step S407.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, the task processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the task process, first, in step S3801, a setting process for starting control is executed. In the setting process for starting control, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the display CPU 131 in the current processing time is executed. An individual image is one 2D image defined by still image data such as back image data, or one 3D image defined by a combination of object image data and texture image data. That is.

  Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting control, first, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled in the current processing round. If it exists, the change buffer area 132b of the work RAM 132 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and the individual image recognized as the control start target is searched. An empty buffer area is secured so as to correspond one-to-one. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameters for starting control according to individual images are set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

  In subsequent step S3802, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which the control start process has been completed, and an individual image that may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing time.

  In a succeeding step S3803, background calculation processing is executed. In the background calculation processing, coordinates, rotation angles, scales, light information for adding light and darkness, and projections are applied to the background image and background characters that make up the background image. Processing for calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test designation is executed.

  In a succeeding step S3804, an effect calculation process is executed. In the effect calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the above-described various parameters is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

  In a succeeding step S3805, a symbol calculation process is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the above-described various parameters is performed on a symbol image to be subjected to variable display in each game round.

  Incidentally, in each processing from step S3803 to step S3805, processing for updating the control start parameter set in step S3801 is executed. Further, in each processing from step S3803 to step S3805, animation data set to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 162, and is transferred in advance to the work RAM 132 until the display CPU 131 needs to read it.

  Thereafter, in step S3806, after performing the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, this task process is terminated. In the process of grasping the arrangement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images subjected to the control update by the processes in steps S3803 to S3805. Execute. The grasp is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 are set more than the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S3806. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 135 may be the same. In this case, the process of step S3806 is executed. There is no need.

  In the setting process for starting control in step S3801, the control start timing of each individual image is set in a distributed manner in the same manner as in the first embodiment in order to distribute the processing load of the display CPU 131. Also good.

<Basic processing in the VDP 135>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

  In the VDP 135, a process for setting the value of the register 153 based on a command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process for creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least processing for outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame regions 142a and 142b.

  Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. FIGS. 70A to 70C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer, which is information indicating which one of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created, is set for an image of one frame related to the drawing list. Yes. In addition, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of the various designation information will be described later. If moving image data is included as image data handled by the VDP 135, the header information includes information on the presence / absence of decoding designation and address information to which moving image data to be decoded is transferred. Also good.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system are set when creating the drawing data this time, and information on the drawing order of each image data, Parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be sequential numerical value information, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

  In the drawing list of FIG. 70A, the image data for the back is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. Yes. Also, as the order after the background image data, the effect image data is set, for example, the effect object A is set as mth, the effect object B is set as m + 1, and so on. Yes. Further, as the order after the effect image data, symbol image data is set, for example, symbol object A is set as nth, symbol object B is set as n + 1th,... Yes.

  Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... A plurality of types of parameters are set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the parameter P (1) of the image data for the back side, information on the address of the area to which the image data for the back side is transferred in the VRAM 134, and the image for the back side. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when data is set, and in the world coordinate system when image data for the back is set Rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle, scale information indicating the magnification when setting to the world coordinate system, and image data for the back side with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back side Uniform α value information indicating the entire transmission information (or transparency information) in the case of setting is set.

  Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all pixels of the image data for the object. The coordinate information is set for the object image data, but is not set for the texture image data. In the texture image data, the coordinate value of each pixel is determined in advance in association with each pixel of the object image data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 162 in a state of being attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture. Yes. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 when texture mapping is performed.

  The parameter (P1) renders camera information including the coordinates and orientation information of the virtual camera and image data for the back when the image data for the back is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing. And light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case where the shadow is to be set.

  In addition, in the parameter (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. The Z buffer method refers to each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel) arranged on the Z axis from the viewpoint when a large number of objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z axis direction) in the world coordinate system. Are sequentially referred to, and numerical information set to the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When applying the Z buffer method, a Z buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

  In addition to the Z buffer method, the Z sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and if necessary, the addition processing as described above and the fusion calculation processing as described above are executed. The Rukoto. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, but it is activated when an effect image is displayed.

  In addition, the parameter (P1) is created to display α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and the application target, fog specification information indicating whether or not the fog is applied, and a background image. In addition, information for specifying another save indicating whether or not the drawing data for the background image is stored separately is set.

  Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of 2D still image data or texture image data, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 162 as image data. The alpha data can make the transmission information different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture image data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the α value and α data are set uniformly as described above, the transparency of 2D still image data and texture image data is not controlled finely in units of pixels, but is uniform for all pixels. In a situation where control is required, a uniform α value can be used to reduce the required data capacity, and by applying α data, the transparency can be finely controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

  Further, fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, the Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or inside a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, when a fog similar to that of other objects is applied to an object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction, another fog is set for the object in a situation where the material is not too dark due to being too dark. It may be configured. Thereby, the effect by setting fog can be acquired, without impairing the said texture.

  Further, the separate storage means that the drawn image for the background image once created is written and stored in the mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b in order to use it as it is in subsequent frames. Say. As shown in FIG. 67, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode buffer 145 and a second mode buffer 145 so as to correspond to each display mode on a one-to-one basis. The specific contents of this separate storage will be described in detail later.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), other parameters such as parameter P (2) include object information instead of background image data information among the various types of information shown in FIG. 70 (b). Texture information is set. As such information, information on the address of the area to which the object or texture is transferred is set.

  The drawing process in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, a state in which drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S3901, it is determined whether a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed in step S3902.

  In the background setting process, the image data for the back and the character object for displaying the background image are grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the character object are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If it is not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. Thereafter, the VRAM 134 grasps and reads out the address to which the image data has been transferred in advance, and sets the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data so that the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the drawing list are obtained. A world conversion process for converting the coordinate value of the world coordinate system is executed, and the secured buffer area is set.

  If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. In the background setting process, a control end process for erasing the background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  In the subsequent step S3903, a setting process for production is executed. In the effect setting process, an object for displaying the effect image is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. In the effect setting process, a control end process for erasing effect image data not specified in the current drawing list among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  In the subsequent step S3904, a symbol setting process is executed. In the symbol setting process, an object for displaying a symbol is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the symbol setting process, a control end process is executed to erase the symbol image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  By executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3904, as shown in FIG. 72, it is designated as an arrangement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the rearmost image PC21 and the various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged with the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale specified by the drawing list is completed. In FIG. 72, a state in which the rearmost image PC21 and the various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged is simply shown.

  In a succeeding step S3905, conversion processing to a camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is used as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 72, the viewpoint PC31 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC31 is set.

  Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (the backmost image PC21 and the various objects PC22 to PC30), and actually a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. Thus, by setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image, the viewpoint can be switched individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 72 shows a state where all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  In a succeeding step S3906, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. Thereby, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  In a succeeding step S3907, a clipping process is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S3906 is grasped with a corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. In this state, extraction is performed in step S3906 with reference to a space corresponding to the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 72) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31). Clip each individual image.

  In a succeeding step S3908, a lighting process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows and reflections are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

  In a subsequent step S3909, a texture mapping process is executed. In the texture mapping process, a texture corresponding to each object extracted by the clipping process is pasted to determine the appearance of each object. This texture mapping process includes processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping in addition to the process of simply pasting image data for texture.

  Thereafter, in step S3910 to step S3912, each individual image extracted in step S3907 and further subjected to lighting processing and texture mapping processing is projected onto the screen region PC32 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection). Drawing data is created by projecting.

  Specifically, first, background drawing data creation processing is executed in step S3910. In the drawing data creation process for the background, the drawing data for the background is created by performing projection onto the screen area PC 32 while performing hidden surface removal on the backmost image and the object set as the background image.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 67, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144. The screen buffer 144 is written with a background buffer into which drawing data for background is written and drawing data for presentation. An effect buffer and a symbol buffer into which symbol drawing data are written are set. In the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the design buffer, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC32 is set. The background drawing data created in step S3910 is written into the background buffer. If no background image data is specified in the drawing list, no background drawing data is created.

  In a succeeding step S3911, a rendering data creation process for production is executed. In the rendering data creation process for rendering, the object set as the rendering image is projected onto the screen area PC32 while performing hidden surface removal, thereby creating a rendering buffer in the screen buffer 144. Create drawing data. If no rendering image data is specified in the rendering list, rendering data for rendering is not created.

  In a succeeding step S3912, a drawing data creation process for symbols is executed. In the drawing data creation process for symbols, the drawing for symbols in the symbol buffer in the screen buffer 144 is performed by performing projection onto the screen area PC32 while performing hidden surface removal on the objects set as symbols. Create data. In addition, when the image data for symbols is not designated in the drawing list, the drawing data for symbols is not created.

  Thereafter, in step S3913, the drawing data composition process is executed, and then the drawing process is terminated. In the drawing data composition process of step S3913, the drawing data for background, the drawing data for presentation, and the drawing data for symbols, which are individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes of steps S3910 to S3912, respectively. The synthesized result is written as drawing data for one frame in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn.

  In this case, it is stipulated that the drawing data for the background, the drawing data for the production, and the drawing data for the design are arranged in the order from the back side to the near side. ing. Accordingly, the drawing data for background is first written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, then the drawing data for presentation is written, and finally the drawing data for symbols is written. At this time, if a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel to be rendered, the back image is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. Fusion of the back side image and the near side image at the reference ratio is performed, and when the non-transparent α value is set, the near side image is overwritten with the back side image. In addition, the calculation for fusion as described above is executed.

  By the way, although each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for the blank portion that was not projected in the drawing data for production or the drawing data for design. Has been.

  The drawing data for one frame is generated so as to be completed within a 20 msec cycle. An image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. Since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for one frame after that frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred to every time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. By the switching by the selector circuit, the drawing data The frame regions 142a and 142b that are the drawing targets are restricted so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

  Steps S3902 to S3907 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S3908 to S3913 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  As already described, the Z buffer 143 is used when performing hidden surface removal by the Z buffer method. Here, the hidden surface process using the Z buffer executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The hidden surface process using the Z buffer is started in each drawing data creation process in steps S3910 to S3912 in the drawing process (FIG. 71) when the Z test is designated in the drawing list. Further, when performing the Z test designation, the display CPU 131 sets the camera information of each individual image that is the target of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer so that each viewpoint has the same coordinates and orientation, The direction of the viewpoint is set so as to be the direction of the Z axis direction of the world coordinate system. Accordingly, the Z axis of the screen area PC32 that is a reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer is set to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. Further, only one Z buffer 143 is set, and it has an area having the same number of dots as the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the symbol buffer in the screen buffer 144.

  First, in step S4001, the current projection target dot in the screen region PC32 (see FIG. 72) is used as a reference for the individual image included on the Z axis, and the target pixel of the individual image that is the current test target. The set Z value is grasped. In the subsequent step S4002, the Z value set in the dot area corresponding to the drawing target dot on the one-to-one basis in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

  In subsequent step S4003, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S4001 corresponds to the near side in the Z-axis direction with respect to the Z value of Z buffer 143 grasped in step S4002. If it corresponds to the near side, the process proceeds to step S4004, and the Z value obtained in step S4001 is overwritten on the area of the dot referenced in step S4002 in the Z buffer 143. In subsequent step S4005, drawing numerical information such as the color information set in the pixel referred to in step S4001 is overwritten in the drawing target buffer area in the screen buffer 144 in the current projection target dot area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4006.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4003 that it does not correspond to the near side, the process proceeds to step S4006 without executing the processes in steps S4004 to S4005. That is, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. In addition, the numerical value information for drawing already set is held as it is. On the other hand, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is closer to the Z-axis direction than the Z value already set in the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. The numerical information for drawing is also updated.

  In step S4006, it is determined whether or not the Z test has been completed for all target pixels included on the Z-axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not completed, the process returns to step S4001 to perform a Z test on a new target pixel.

  If completed, it is determined in step S4007 whether or not the Z test has been completed for all dots in the screen area PC32. If not completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S4008, and then the process returns to step S4001 to perform a Z test on the new projection target dot. If completed, the hidden surface process is terminated.

  By executing the hidden surface process as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are arranged on the Z-axis, only the individual images closer to the viewpoint are displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, masking of the background character (that is, partial display) is executed using the hidden surface processing. This masking is performed by setting the Z value of the object for masking in the display CPU 131.

  Hereinafter, the mask calculation processing executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The mask calculation process is the same as the effect calculation process in step S3804 in the task process (FIG. 69) when it is indicated that the mask calculation process should be executed on the area referred to in the data table. Executed.

  First, in step S4101, it is determined whether the current processing time corresponds to the first mask display based on the currently set data table. Here, the first mask display and the second mask display are set as the mask display. The first mask display is a display mode in which the state in which the character is partially displayed is maintained over a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is a plurality of frames in which pixels are masked from the state in which the entire character is displayed. It is a display mode that gradually increases over time and finally disappears.

  If it corresponds to the first mask display, in step S4102, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S4103, the pixel to be masked in the object grasped in step S4102 is grasped based on the currently set data table.

  Thereafter, the Z value setting process is executed in step S4104, and then this calculation process is terminated. In the setting process of the Z value, for the pixel that is the mask target in the object, the Z value is set to be on the back side of the backmost image, and for the pixel that is not the mask target, The Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be originally displayed on the near side of the rearmost image.

  As described above, the mask calculation process is executed, and a drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135. Thus, the VDP 135 uses a Z buffer as a hidden surface process. The hidden surface process (FIG. 73) is executed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display screen G. Specific contents of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 75 shows a 3D image as a 2D image.

  FIG. 75A shows a case in which the character CH10 is displayed as usual without performing the first mask display. FIG. 75 (a-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated in the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10. FIG. 75 (a-2) is a diagram on the display screen G. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 75 (a-1), as shown in FIG. 75 (a-2), the Z value is set so that each pixel is closer to the front than the backmost image. The character CH10 is displayed in its entirety.

  FIG. 75B shows a case where the first mask display is performed. FIG. 75 (b-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 75 (b-1), the Z value is set to be nearer than the rearmost image in a part of each pixel, but the remaining pixels are the rearmost. The Z value is set so as to be behind the image. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 75 (b-2), only the portion corresponding to the pixel for which the Z value is set so that the character CH10 is on the near side is displayed.

  Note that a plurality of Z value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH10 may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, a plurality of types of first mask display modes can be set for the same character CH10.

  Returning to the description of the mask processing (FIG. 74), if it is determined in step S4101 that the current processing time does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing time is the second mask. Since this means that the display is supported, the process proceeds to step S4105. In step S4105, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second mask display based on the currently set data table.

  If it is the start timing, an object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table in step S4106. In the following step S4107, a dedicated table for masking is read based on the currently set data table. This dedicated table for masking is stored and held until the current second mask display is completed. In a succeeding step S4108, the pixels set as the initial erasure target in the mask dedicated table are grasped.

  Thereafter, the Z value setting process is executed in step S4109, and then this calculation process is terminated. In the Z value setting process, in the object, the pixel that is grasped as the initial erasure target in step S4108 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the backmost image, and the initial erasure target is set. For the pixels that are not, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be originally displayed on the near side of the rearmost image.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4105 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S4110. In step S4110, the erasure target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In subsequent step S4111, the data corresponding to the value of the erase target counter updated in step S4110 is confirmed in the dedicated mask table that is currently read, and the erase target pixel is grasped.

  Thereafter, the Z value setting process is executed in step S4112, and then this calculation process ends. In the Z value setting process, in the object, the pixel that is recognized as the erasure target in step S4111 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the backmost image and is not to be erased. For non-existing pixels, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be originally displayed on the near side of the backmost image.

  As described above, the mask calculation process is executed, and a drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135. Thus, the VDP 135 uses a Z buffer as a hidden surface process. The hidden surface process (FIG. 73) is executed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 76 shows a 3D image as a 2D image.

  FIG. 76A shows an image diagram of information set in the dedicated mask table, and FIG. 76B shows a case where the character CH11 is displayed as usual without performing the second mask display. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the object PC 34 corresponding to the character CH11 has a plurality of pixels. In the dedicated table for masking, the plurality of pixels are grouped in groups and each group is divided into groups. On the other hand, the frame order to be erased is set. Specifically, the group indicated as “Z1” is set as the initial erasure target, and thereafter, the group indicated as “Z2” → the group indicated as “Z3” → the group indicated as “Z4” → “Z5”. It will be deleted in the group order.

  In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group indicated as “Z1” is to be erased, the pixel portion corresponding to the group “Z1” is missing as shown in FIG. Character CH11 is displayed. In the subsequent frames, when the group indicated as “Z2” is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 76D, in addition to the “Z1” group, the pixels corresponding to the “Z2” group. Character CH11 is displayed with the portion missing. Then, the character CH11 is not displayed in the frame in which the group finally indicated as “Z5” is to be erased.

  As described above, the object can be masked using the Z buffer 143. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform a masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity necessary for storing image data.

  In addition, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131 so much. In addition, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved by using a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display.

  Further, a Z value on the back side with respect to the rearmost image is set in a non-display portion. Since the rearmost image is an image that always forms the rear surface in any frame, it is an absolute reference for the position in the Z-axis (depth direction). By setting the Z value of the portion to be hidden based on this, it becomes possible to make the setting manner of the Z value in the case of non-display uniform, and the processing relating to the setting of the Z value The processing load can be reduced.

  Note that only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. Further, in the second mask display, the pixel may be erased for each pixel instead of being erased for each of the plurality of pixels, and the pixel to be erased may be set as the display object again. It is good.

  In addition, by reversely setting the Z value, characters are not sequentially erased over a display period for a plurality of frames, but are displayed so that characters appear sequentially over a display period for a plurality of frames. It is good also as a structure to be made.

<Another Form of Mask Processing Using Z Buffer 143>
Another form of mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing another form of the mask calculation process executed by the display CPU 131.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether it is a start timing based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, in step S4202, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S4203, the initial setting is made based on the currently set data table. Read the mask table.

  In subsequent step S4204, a mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, the numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read, and the information to be erased corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S4203. .

  The lottery counter is configured to be updated every time the process of step S202 is executed in the main process (FIG. 9), for example, and when the counter value makes one round, the initial value is selected at random. It becomes the composition which is done. Further, in the initial mask table, information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each counter value of the lottery counter, and the information to be erased includes all the pixels constituting the mask target object. Among these, a plurality of pixels are grouped as one group, and correspond to each group on a one-to-one basis.

  In subsequent step S4205, the pixel to be erased is grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S4204. Thereafter, the Z value setting process is executed in step S4206, and then this calculation process is terminated. In the Z value setting process, in the above object, the pixel that is recognized as the erasure target in step S4205 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the backmost image and is not to be erased. For non-existing pixels, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be originally displayed on the near side of the backmost image.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4201 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S4207. In step S4207, the mask table is rewritten so that the information to be erased that has already been set as the erase target is excluded from the already read initial mask table. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set as the object to be erased is rewritten so as to be assigned to other information to be erased. This assignment may be performed at random, or may be configured to be assigned to information to be erased corresponding to the counter value immediately below in the table.

  Thereafter, using the mask table rewritten in step S4207, the processing of step S4204 to step S4206 is executed, and then this calculation processing is terminated.

  As described above, according to this different mode, pixels to be erased are selected at random, so that the mask display mode can be diversified.

  Note that the mask display using the Z buffer 143 may be applied not to the character for the background but to the character or design for presentation. For example, when applied to a character for presentation, the hidden surface processing is collectively performed on the image data for background and the image data for presentation, so that the rearmost surface is similar to the above configuration. The Z value of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed with reference to the Z value of the image. In addition, when applied to symbols, the hidden surface processing is performed on the image data for background, the image data for presentation, and the image data for symbols in the same manner as in the above configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted based on the Z value of the rearmost image.

  Further, even when the hidden surface processing is performed individually for the background, the effect, and the design, it is determined that the pixel for which the Z value on the back side of the backmost image is set in the VDP 135 is not to be rendered. If it is, the Z value of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed with reference to the Z value of the backmost image as in the above configuration.

  In addition, the Z value of the display target and the non-display target is not distributed based on the Z value of the rearmost image, but, for example, the Z value in front of the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target. The Z value on the back side from the viewpoint may be set as the Z value to be displayed.

  Further, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not on the basis of the Z axis of the world coordinate system but on the basis of the direction of the viewpoint.

  Further, in the configuration for displaying a 2D image as in the first embodiment, when the VDP 76 is configured to be able to manipulate drawing data in units of pixels, information on the depth direction set for each pixel of the image data is displayed. It is good also as a structure which performs partial display of an image by allocating to either target information or non-display target information.

<Configuration related to display mode switching>
Next, a configuration related to display mode switching will be described.

  The display mode is a state in which the standby image displayed until the game round is started and the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is executed are determined to a predetermined type, and a plurality of types are displayed. The display mode is set. Specifically, a first display mode and a second display mode are set.

  The display mode of the background image and the display mode of each symbol are different between the first display mode and the second display mode. Specifically, when comparing symbols with the same number, the outer shape and shape of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and patterns are different. As for the background image, the first display mode and the second display mode are different in the type of the rearmost image, and the number and type of characters displayed in front of the rearmost image are different. More characters are displayed in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

  The display mode is switched based on the operation of the effect operating device 48. Specifically, the display mode is sequentially switched by operating the production operation device 48 in a situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. In addition, switching is performed based on the operation of the presentation operating device 48 under a predetermined condition in a situation where game times are being executed.

  A specific processing configuration relating to switching of the display mode will be described.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an operation generation command response process executed by the display CPU 131. The operation generation command response process is executed in the command response process of step S403 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command for mode switching is received from the sound emission control device 60. If it has not been received, the operation command handling process is terminated, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S4302.

  In step S4302, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period in which neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether it is the first switchable period is set in the data table. In step S4302, it is determined whether or not it is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is the first switchable period, in step S4303, a first switch execution flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132.

  On the other hand, if it is not the first switchable period, the process advances to step S4304 to determine whether or not it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing in the middle of execution in a situation where game times are being executed. Specifically, when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 31, the symbol variation display in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started → high-speed variation display in all symbol columns Z1-Z3 → low-speed variation This includes a display flow of sequentially stopping each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 via the display. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from the start of the symbol variation display in all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 to the timing when the high-speed variation display in all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 ends.

  In addition, as for the variation display mode of symbols, the variation display of symbols in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started → the acceleration period of all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 → high-speed variation display in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (high speed is constant) (Speed) → low-speed fluctuation display (low speed is a constant speed) may be used as a display flow of sequential stop of each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Further, a medium speed fluctuation display may be included between the high speed fluctuation display and the low speed fluctuation display. In other words, the number of specific steps is arbitrary as long as the pattern variation display mode is switched in a plurality of steps such as two steps, three steps, or four steps or more. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of a low-identification stage in which a player has low symbol discrimination among the stages.

  In addition, a specific variation mode is arbitrary as long as it includes a state of variation display in a relatively low discrimination mode → variation display in a high discrimination mode in the flow of symbol variation display, for example, any mode. However, the fluctuation speed is the same, but in the fluctuation display in the low discrimination mode, the pattern is displayed in a state of being transparent, translucent, hollow or partly removed, and in the fluctuation display in the high discrimination mode, the entire pattern is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period during which the variable display in the low identification mode is performed.

  Information for specifying whether or not it is the second switchable period is set in the data table. In step S4304, it is determined whether or not it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is determined that the period is not the second switchable period, the operation generation command response process is terminated as it is, and if it is the second switchable period, a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S4305. Is set to the second switching execution flag.

  After executing either step S4303 or step S4305, the process proceeds to step S4306. In step S4306, the display mode counter is updated.

  The display mode counter is a counter for specifying the current display mode by the display CPU 131, and is provided in the work RAM 132. The counter for the display mode is set with a counter value corresponding to each display mode on a one-to-one basis. In the present embodiment, since the first display mode and the second display mode are set as the display mode as described above, a numerical value of “0” corresponding to the first display mode and the second display are set as the counter value. A numerical value “1” corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the display mode counter is set to “0”, when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the first value is displayed. One display mode is set.

  In step S4306, the display mode counter is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched in accordance with a predetermined order each time the effect operating device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the process of step S4306 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is “0” and the first display mode is set, the second display mode counter is set to “1”. When the process is switched to the display mode and the process of step S4306 is executed in the situation where the display mode counter is “1” and the second display mode is set, the display mode counter is set to “1”. Switch to 1 display mode. After executing the processing of step S4306, the operation occurrence command response processing is terminated.

  Next, the display mode background calculation processing executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The calculation process for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation process in step S3803 in the task process (FIG. 69). In addition, when executing a jackpot effect, the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed, so the calculation processing for the display mode background is not executed, and when the standby image is displayed or when the effect for game times is executed The calculation process for the display mode background is executed.

  First, in step S4401, a display mode counter provided in the work RAM 132 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the display mode is the first display mode. If the display mode is the first display mode, in step S4402, the first backmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S4403, various parameters of the grasped first rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S4404, the object corresponding to the first display mode and the object to be updated for the background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S4405, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated and the control information is updated.

  On the other hand, in the second display mode, in step S4406, the second backmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S4407, various parameters of the grasped second rearmost image are calculated, and the control information is updated. In subsequent step S4408, the object corresponding to the second display mode and the object to be updated for the background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S4409, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

  Note that, at the execution timing of the process in step S4402, the control start setting process (step S3801) for the background object corresponding to the first backmost image and the first display mode is completed. Further, at the execution timing of the process of step S4406, the control start setting process (step S3801) for the background object corresponding to the second backmost image and the second display mode is completed.

  After executing the process of step S4405 or step S4409, it is determined in step S4410 whether either the first switching execution flag or the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If any switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S4411 whether the processing load is high.

  The situation where the processing load is large is that the processing load of the VDP 135 is so large that the processing drop occurs when both the geometry calculation and the rendering for the image data specified in the current drawing list are executed by the VDP 135. This means a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is relatively large even if no drop occurs. Information regarding whether or not the processing load is large is determined in the data table, and the determination in step S4411 is performed based on the information.

  If the processing load is not high, it is determined in step S4412 whether the background image corresponding to the current display mode has been stored separately. Here, the separate saving means that the drawing data for background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is individually saved and the saved state is maintained. In the separate storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 67).

  The mode buffer 145 displays a first mode area 145a in which background drawing data for displaying a background image corresponding to the first display mode is written, and a background image corresponding to the second display mode. And a second mode area 145b in which the background drawing data is written. Also, the VDP 135 reads the background drawing data into either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b and reads the written background drawing data into the screen buffer 144. A display mode control unit 154 having a writing function.

  If it has not been saved separately, execution calculation information for another save is stored in step S4413, and then this calculation process ends. If it has already been saved, this calculation process ends.

  When the calculation process for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process includes the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Image data is set. In addition, when the process of step S4413 is being executed, execution information for separate storage is set. The separate save execution designation information includes information indicating that the separate save is to be executed, and also includes information on the address of the separate save destination.

  On the other hand, if the processing load is high (step S4411: YES), it is determined in step S4414 whether the background image in the display mode of the switching destination has been stored separately. If it has not been saved separately, this calculation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the data has been stored separately, the use designation information of the separately stored data is stored in step S4415, and then this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process includes the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Image data is set. In addition, when the process of step S4415 is being executed, use specification information of another saved data is set. The use specification information of the separate storage data includes information indicating that the separate storage data should be used, and also includes information on an address where the separate storage data is stored.

  Next, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S3805 of the task process (FIG. 69).

  First, in step S4501, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is necessary to execute control update processing for the symbol. A case where a jackpot effect is being executed is included as a case where it is not necessary to execute, and a case where an effect for game times is being executed and a case where a standby image is displayed are included as a case where it is necessary to execute. If it is not necessary to execute the present symbol calculation process, the process is terminated. If it is necessary to execute it, it is determined in step S4502 that the game is being executed based on the currently set data table. Determine whether or not.

  If the game times are not being executed, it is determined in step S4503 whether the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132 or not. If the first switching execution flag is set, in step S4504, the symbol to be controlled is changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. Specifically, only the information on the symbol to be controlled (for example, information on the address of the transfer destination) is maintained while retaining the parameter information for each free buffer area that is secured when performing symbol control in the work RAM 132. Is replaced with information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. Note that the processing of step S4503 and step S4504 may be executed in the control start setting process (step S3801) in the task process (FIG. 69). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4503, or if the process of step S4504 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, based on the currently set data table, the symbol object to be controlled is grasped, and in step S4506, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the symbol calculation process is terminated.

  When the symbol calculation processing is executed as described above, the symbol image data corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode is included in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing. Is set.

  If the game is being executed (step S4502: YES), in step S4507, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not high-speed fluctuation display is being performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. judge. If all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displaying high-speed fluctuations, it is determined in step S4508 whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132.

  If the second switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S4509 whether the control target symbol can be changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. This is because, when the drawing process corresponding to the current drawing list (FIG. 71) is executed by the VDP 135, if the control target symbol is changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination, a process drop occurs. Based on whether or not a process failure occurs, it can be changed, and if a process failure occurs, it is determined that it cannot be changed.

  For example, when background image data corresponding to switching of the display mode is newly set in the current drawing list, it is necessary to newly reset the image data setting in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. The processing load on the VDP 135 is increased. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol cannot be changed. On the other hand, when other saved data is set as background image data in the current drawing list, or when background image data corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode related to the previous drawing list is set In the VDP 135, it is not necessary to newly set the image data to the world coordinate system, so that the processing load on the VDP 135 is relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol can be changed.

  Information about whether or not the change can be made is determined in the data table, and the determination in step S4509 is performed based on the information. Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4508, the second switching execution flag is cleared. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and it is possible to determine whether it is possible to change the symbol to be controlled in accordance with the execution mode of the switching destination. It is good also as a structure performed according to how much it progresses. For example, if the progress of signal output to each dot on the display screen G can be recognized by the display CPU 131 by the signal output from the VDP 135, the above determination may be made based on the content of the signal output.

  If it is determined in step S4509 that it can be changed, the control target symbol is changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination in step S4510. The specific contents of this process are the same as in step S4504. After executing the process of step S4510, the process proceeds to step S4513.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4509 that it cannot be changed, a change standby flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S4511, and the process proceeds to step S4513. . The change waiting flag is a flag for the display CPU 131 to specify that the change of the symbol to be controlled is on standby. If the change waiting flag is set, even if it is determined in step S4508 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process of step S4512 is executed by executing the process of step S4512. Executed. If both the second switching execution flag and the change waiting flag are not set, the process proceeds to step S4513. The change waiting flag is cleared when an affirmative determination is made in step S4512.

  In step S4513, based on the currently set data table, the symbol object to be controlled is grasped, and in step S4514, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the symbol calculation process is terminated.

  When the symbol calculation processing is executed as described above, the symbol image data corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing. The In this case, if it is determined in step S4509 that the symbol cannot be changed to the symbol corresponding to the switching destination display mode, the symbol image data corresponding to the switching source display mode is directly set in the drawing list. The As a result, a symbol that does not correspond to the display mode is finally displayed on the display screen G. However, since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is being displayed at high speed, the player changes the above state. Cannot be recognized or difficult to recognize.

  If the symbol cannot be changed to the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the change standby flag is set, and the change is performed in the subsequent processing times. Thereby, it is possible to satisfactorily switch the display mode while preventing the processing drop in the VDP 135. Note that the processing load of the VDP 135 is adjusted so that the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination is changed within the range where the high-speed fluctuation display is performed.

  If high-speed fluctuation display is not being performed (step S4507: NO), the process proceeds to step S4515. In step S4515, the symbol object to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S4516, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the symbol calculation process is terminated. When the symbol calculation processing is executed as described above, the symbol image data corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing. The

  Next, background setting processing executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background setting process is executed in step S3902 in the drawing process (FIG. 71).

  First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not use designation of another saved data is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S4602, information for setting the other saved data corresponding to the designation as drawing data for the background is stored in the register 153.

  If not set (step S4601: NO) or after executing the process of step S4602, the process proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, the rearmost image designated in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S4604, various parameters designated for the rearmost image are grasped. Thereafter, in step S4605, a setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the rearmost image. The contents relating to this setting are as described above.

  In subsequent step S4606, the background object specified in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S4607, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S4608, the setting process for the background is executed for the object, and then the background setting process is terminated.

  By executing the setting process for the background as described above, drawing is performed not only in the situation where the use designation of the other saved data is not set, but also in the situation where the use designation of the other saved data is set. The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Accordingly, for example, when the current drawing list relates to display mode switching, setting for starting control of image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination can be performed.

  Next, background drawing data creation processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background drawing data creation process is executed in step S3910 in the drawing process (FIG. 71).

  First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the information on setting to use another saved data is set in the register 153. If not set, in step S4702, hidden surface processing is executed, and background drawing data is created in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface processing is as already described.

  In the following step S4703, it is determined whether or not execution designation of another save is set in the current drawing list. If it is not set, the drawing data creation process is terminated. If it has been set, the background mode created in step S4702 is transferred to the target mode area in the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145 in step S4704. Write drawing data. As a result, background drawing data is stored separately. Thereafter, the drawing data creation process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4701 that the use setting information of the other saved data is set in the register 153, the process proceeds to step S4705. In step S4705, the other saved data is read from the mode area designated this time out of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, and the read different saved data is read as the current saved data. The drawing data for the background is written in the screen buffer 144. Thereafter, the drawing data creation process ends.

  By executing the drawing data creation process for the background as described above, the drawing data for the background through the geometry calculation and rendering, or the drawing data for the background related to the other saved data is stored in the screen buffer 144. . In addition, in a frame in which an image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, a drawing data creation process for rendering (step S3911) and a drawing data creation process for symbols (step S3912) are subsequently executed. Drawing data and drawing data for symbols are created, and drawing data synthesis processing (step S3913) is executed to create drawing data for one frame.

  Here, the timing at which the separate storage data for the first display mode and the separate storage data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 83A shows background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 83B shows background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode. 83 (a) shows the power on / off state of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 83 (b) shows the presence / absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 83 (c) shows the presence / absence of the second display mode. FIG. 83 (d) shows the presence / absence of separate storage data for the first display mode, and FIG. 83 (e) shows the presence / absence of separate storage data for the second display mode.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing t1, power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the display CPU 131 starts processing. In addition, since the display mode is set to the first display mode, a drawing list is output from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 in order to display an image corresponding to the first display mode at a timing later than the timing t1. Further, creation of drawing data corresponding to the first display mode is started in the VDP 135 based on the drawing list.

  After that, at the timing of t2, the creation of the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode is completed, so that the drawing data is stored as another saved data for the first display mode in the first mode of the mode buffer 145. Stored in the use area 145a. In the background image by the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the 3D character images indicated by “A” to “F” in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separately stored data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. In addition, the display of the image corresponding to the first display mode is started at the timing t2 or a predetermined timing thereafter.

  Thereafter, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the operation of the effect operating device 48 at the timing t3. Then, drawing data for the second display mode is created, and display of an image corresponding to the second display mode is started. Further, since the creation of the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is completed at the timing, the drawing data is stored as another saved data for the second display mode in the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Is remembered. In the background image by the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the 3D character image indicated by “G” to “J” in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separately stored data stored in the second mode area 145b is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

  Here, the drawing data PD66 for background corresponding to the first display mode has a larger number of objects to be set than the drawing data PD67 for background corresponding to the second display mode. Then, when switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur in the VDP 135. On the other hand, among the two separate storage data, the separate storage data for the first display mode is created using the time during which the initial setting is performed when the power is turned on, which increases the processing load. When the display mode is switched to the first display mode depending on the situation, it is possible to avoid the processing failure by using the separately stored data.

  On the other hand, even if the drawing data PD67 for background corresponding to the second display mode has a low processing load on the VDP 135 and is switched to the second display mode in a situation where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large, It is set so that processing loss does not occur. However, the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode is also stored separately, and the process is switched to the second display mode in a situation where the processing load is relatively large even if no processing loss occurs. The separately stored data is used for the.

  As shown in the timings t4 to t9, when the separate storage data is created as described above, when the display mode is switched repeatedly in a short time, the separate storage data is stored in each display mode. By using the background image to display it, it is possible to prevent the processing from being lost.

  In addition, another storage target is a background image, and does not include an individual image that is subject to variation such as a design. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual image is fluctuating, the movement of the individual image whose fluctuation is noticed is continued even if the image using the separately stored data is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  The display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set to three stages or four or more stages. Even in this case, it is possible to satisfactorily switch display modes by separately storing background drawing data corresponding to each display mode.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which is performed without waiting for the switching of the kind of symbol irrespective of the switching timing of a display mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which a design does not differ between display modes.

  In addition, the effect character may be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the effect character may be configured not to be stored separately, or may be configured to be stored separately.

<Configuration for displaying a 3D image using a connected object>
Next, a configuration for displaying a 3D image using a connected object will be described.

  A connected object is a unit object in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are connected with a connecting part as a joint, and is set to give movement to a character in a 3D image by relatively displacing each part object. Has been. By using the connected object, the character of the 3D image can be smoothly operated. In view of the fact that the connected object has a skeleton part and a joint part, it can also be called a bone model.

  The connected object is set to display a character that performs a predetermined action. Here, in this embodiment, multiple types of connected objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B, in order to display a common character, a first connected object PC35 and a second connected object PC36 are set. Each of the first connection object PC35 and the second connection object PC36 has a plurality of connection portions CT1 and CT2, but the connection portions CT1 and CT2 are set at different locations.

  Specifically, the first connection object PC35 is not provided with a connection portion at the knee portion, but is provided with a connection portion CT1 at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a-1) and (a-2). The operation as shown can be displayed. On the other hand, the second connected object PC36 is not provided with a connecting portion at the elbow portion, but is provided with a connecting portion CT2 at the knee portion, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b-1) and (b-2). The operation can be displayed. Since the connecting portions are set in different places as described above, it is possible to cause the character to perform different actions when using the first connected object PC35 and when using the second connected object PC36. It becomes.

  Although both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at the common place, the connecting objects CT1 and CT2 may not be provided at the common place. In addition, although a common texture is mapped to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, a configuration may be adopted in which textures are set individually. If it is possible to cause the character to perform different actions by preparing a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36, the positions of the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 and the type of character are arbitrary.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying a state in which a character is moving using both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 will be described.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for connected objects executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the connected object is executed in the effect calculation process in step S3804 of the task process (FIG. 69). The calculation process for the connected object is activated when a data table corresponding to a game time in which an effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is executed is set.

  First, in step S4801, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not an effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (the character is being displayed). If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S4802 whether it is the start timing of the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36. If it is not the start timing, the calculation process is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S4803.

  In step S4803, the start designation information of the connected object effect is stored, and in the subsequent step S4804, based on the currently set data table, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets. To do. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process in step S4804, the control start process is completed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S3801). The control information for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 for which control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the current series of effects using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is completed.

  In the subsequent step S4805, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated, and the control information related to the first connected object PC35 is updated. In step S4806, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated, and the control information related to the second connected object PC36 is updated.

  In subsequent step S4807, the designation information of the first effect period is stored. Here, effects using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 are divided into a plurality of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. In the first effect period and the third effect period, the character is displayed using the first connected object PC35, and in the second effect period, the character is displayed using the second connected object PC36. Thereafter, in step S4808, the parameter of the first connected object PC35 out of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is set to be specified in the current drawing list.

  In the subsequent step S4809, based on the currently set data table, other objects for the first presentation period and the object to be updated this time are grasped. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process in step S4809, the control start process for the current update target object is completed in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S3801). Thereafter, in step S4810, the various parameters of the other objects that have been grasped are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated. Then, this calculation process ends.

  When the calculation process for the linked object is executed as described above, both the linked objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawn list. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC35 are set. Moreover, the start specification information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 should be started and the specification information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period are set in the drawing list. Is done.

  On the other hand, when an effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (step S4801: YES), is it in the first effect period based on the currently set data table in step S4811? Determine whether or not. If it is during the first effect period, the processing of step S4804 to step S4810 is executed, and then the calculation processing is terminated. Incidentally, since this time is in the first production period, the first linked object PC35 performs a predetermined first action (see FIG. 84A) as the first production period progresses. In step S4805, the parameter is calculated.

  When the calculation process for the linked object is executed as described above, both the linked objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawn list. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC35 are set. In addition, designation information of the first effect period indicating the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S4811 that it is not during the first effect period, it is determined in step S4812 whether or not it is during the second effect period based on the currently set data table. If it is during the second effect period, in step S4813, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In subsequent step S4814, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated, and the control information related to the first connected object PC35 is updated. In step S4815, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated, and the control information related to the second connected object PC36 is updated. Incidentally, since this time is in the second production period, the second connected object PC36 performs a predetermined second action (see FIG. 84B) as the second production period progresses. In step S4815, the parameter is calculated.

  In subsequent step S4816, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in step S4817, the parameter of the second connected object PC36 among the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is specified in the current drawing list. Set.

  In the subsequent step S4818, based on the currently set data table, other objects for the second effect period and the object to be updated this time are grasped. Here, the second effect period is a state in which the effect is developed more than the first effect period, and the number of objects displayed at least when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is increased. The setting process for starting control (step S3801) for the objects that are increased when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S4818. Thereafter, in step S4819, the various parameters of the other objects ascertained are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated. Then, the calculation process ends.

  When the calculation process for the linked object is executed as described above, both the linked objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawn list. On the other hand, the parameters of the second connected object PC 36 are set. In addition, designation information of the second effect period indicating the second effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S4812 that it is not during the second effect period, this means that it is the third effect period, and thus the process proceeds to step S4820. In step S4820, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In subsequent step S4821, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated, and the control information related to the first connected object PC35 is updated. Incidentally, since this time is in the third effect period, the first linked object PC35 performs a predetermined first action (see FIG. 84A) as the third effect period progresses. In step S4821, the parameter is calculated. In step S4822, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated, and the control information related to the second connected object PC36 is updated.

  In subsequent step S4823, the designation information of the third effect period is stored, and in step S4824, the parameter of the first connected object PC35 of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is specified in the current drawing list. Set.

  In the subsequent step S4825, based on the currently set data table, another object for the third effect period and the object to be updated this time is grasped. Here, the third effect period is a state in which the effect is developed more than the second effect period, and the number of objects displayed at least when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is increased. The setting process (step S3801) for starting the control for the object that has been increased when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S4825. Thereafter, in step S 4826, the various parameters of the other objects that have been grasped are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated. Then, the calculation process ends.

  When the calculation process for the linked object is executed as described above, both the linked objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawn list. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC35 are set. Also, designation information for the third effect period indicating the third effect period is set in the drawing list.

  Next, the connection object effect setting process executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The connection object effect setting process is executed in the effect setting process in step S3903 in the drawing process (FIG. 71). The setting process for the connected object effect is activated when either the start specification of the connected object effect or the specification of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the start specification of the connected object effect is set in the current drawing list. If set, in step S4902, based on the current drawing list, the address to which the first linked object PC35 is pre-transferred in the VRAM 134 is grasped, and the first linked object PC35 is read out. . In step S4903, based on the current drawing list, the VRAM 134 recognizes the address to which the second linked object PC36 has been transferred in advance, and reads the second linked object PC36.

  In the subsequent step S4904, a uniform α value setting process for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “1” which is the opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “0” which is the completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the color information set in advance for all the pixels of the first connected object PC35 (including information on the α value set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is. An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of the two connected objects PC36.

  In the subsequent step S4905, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36. Thereafter, in step S4906, a setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is a processing time related to the start specification of the connected object effect, both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Moreover, although the shape of both connection objects PC35 and PC36 is substantially the same, the connection part of each component object is different. Then, even if an attempt is made to apply the parameters of the first connected object PC35 to the second connected object PC36 as they are, pixels whose coordinate designations do not coincide with each other occur. However, for such pixels, a predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP 135 side. .

  In subsequent step S4907, other objects for the first effect period specified in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S4908, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S4909, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the connected object effect is ended.

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the arrangement of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 simultaneously starts with respect to the world coordinate system. Further, since the same parameter is applied to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged to overlap each other at the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the processing of step S4904 is executed, the second connected object PC36 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering. Therefore, the first connected object of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 is displayed on the display screen G. Only the PC 35 is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4901 that the start specification of the connected object effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S4910. In step S4910, it is determined whether or not designation of the first effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  If it has been set, after executing the processing of step S4904 to step S4909, this setting processing is terminated. In this case, in step S4906, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from information on parameters set in correspondence with the first connected object PC35 in the drawing list. Update.

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, various parameters of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated. However, since the process of step S4904 is executed, the display screen G is connected to both the connected objects. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first linked object PC35 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S4905 corresponds to the first connected object PC35, the first connection is performed so that the first operation is performed on the display screen G as the first effect period progresses. The object PC 35 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S4910 that the first rendering period is not specified in the current drawing list, the process advances to step S4911. In step S4911, it is determined whether or not the designation of the second effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  If set, in step S4912, a process for setting a uniform α value for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “0” that is completely transparent information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “1” that is opaque information. To do. As a result, the color information set in advance for all the pixels of the second connected object PC36 (including the information of the α value set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is. An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of one connected object PC35.

  In the subsequent step S4913, the parameters specified for the second connected object PC36 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36. Thereafter, in step S4914, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is a processing time related to the update of the second rendering period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set in correspondence with the second connected object PC36 in the drawing list. It is grasped from the parameter information that is being updated. In this case, the shapes of the two linked objects PC35 and PC36 are substantially the same, but the linked portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if an attempt is made to apply the parameter of the second connected object PC36 to the first connected object PC35 as it is, a pixel whose coordinate designation does not match is generated, but for such a pixel, a predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP 135 side. .

  In subsequent step S4915, other objects for the second effect period specified in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S4916, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S4917, the setting process for the connected object effect is terminated after executing the setting process for the object in the world coordinate system. Here, when the current processing time is the timing related to switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, and therefore, in step S4917, a process corresponding thereto is executed. .

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, various parameters of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated. However, since the process of step S4912 is executed, the display screen G is connected to both the connected objects. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the second linked object PC36 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S4913 corresponds to the second connected object PC36, the second connection is performed so that the second operation is performed on the display screen G as the second effect period progresses. The object PC 36 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S4911 that the designation of the second effect period is not set in the current drawing list, it means that the designation of the third effect period is set in the current drawing list. The process proceeds to step S4918.

  In step S4918, a uniform α value setting process for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “1” which is the opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “0” which is the completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the color information set in advance for all the pixels of the first connected object PC35 (including information on the α value set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is. An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of the two connected objects PC36.

  In the subsequent step S4919, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list are grasped as parameters of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36. Thereafter, in step S4920, a setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is a processing time related to the update of the third effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set in correspondence with the first connected object PC35 in the drawing list. It is grasped from the parameter information that is being updated.

  In the subsequent step S4921, other objects for the third effect period specified in the current drawing list are grasped, and various parameters designated for the object are grasped in step S4922. After that, in step S4923, the setting process for the connected object effect is ended after executing the setting process for the object in the world coordinate system. Here, when the current processing time is the timing related to the switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, and accordingly, in step S4923, a process corresponding to that is executed. .

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, various parameters of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated. However, since the process of step S4918 is executed, the display screen G is connected to both the connected objects. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first linked object PC35 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S4919 corresponds to the first connected object PC35, the first connection is performed so that the first operation is performed on the display screen G as the third effect period progresses. The object PC 35 is displayed.

  Next, the contents of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connected object effect. FIG. 87 (a) shows the first effect period, FIG. 87 (b) shows the second effect period, and FIG. 87 (c) shows the third effect period. 87 (a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 87 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2) are A display screen G is shown. 87 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2) omit the background image and the pattern, but in practice, the background image is displayed at the back side of each effect image. And a symbol is displayed on the front side.

  In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but a transparency process is performed on the second connected object PC36. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first action is performed as the first effect period progresses. . Characters CH13 to CH15 indicated by “A” to “C” are displayed as images corresponding to other objects.

  In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 87 (b-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the first connected object PC35 is subjected to transparency processing. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 87 (b-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the second connected object PC36 is displayed on the display screen G, and the second action is performed as the second effect period progresses. .

  Here, when comparing FIG. 87 (a-2) and FIG. 87 (b-2), both characters CH12 are shown as having different shapes, but in actuality, both connected objects PC35, The same texture is mapped to the PC 36, and the connecting portion (joint portion) becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first effect period is switched to the second effect period, the same, substantially the same or similar image is displayed on the display screen G with respect to the character CH12, and the player is difficult to recognize the change. . However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be individually set for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  In the second effect period, characters CH13 to CH17 indicated by “A” to “E” are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH13 to CH17 is larger than that in the first effect period.

  In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 87 (c-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC36 is subjected to a transparency process. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 87 (c-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first action is performed as the third effect period progresses. . In the third effect period, characters CH13 to CH19 indicated by “A” to “G” are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH13 to CH19 is larger than that in the second effect period.

  As described above, since a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set for a common character, the connected objects PC35 and PC36 to be displayed can be switched according to the type of motion using the joint portion. . For example, if a plurality of types of actions are to be performed with a single connected object, it is necessary to set the corresponding connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity that can be stored as single image data in the NAND flash memory 162 is exceeded. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time for handling will be prolonged. On the other hand, since it is set as a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of actions without causing the above-described disadvantages.

  In addition, there are many occasions where the production is corrected at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and if the overall movement of the connected object is reviewed every time the movement of the character is corrected, the period required for the design is very long. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of linked objects PC35 and PC36 according to the type of action to be performed as described above, even if it becomes necessary to correct the production, the linked object PC35 that has already been created. , It is not necessary to modify all of the PC 36. Therefore, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of actions while allowing the pachinko machine 10 to be well designed.

  Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object before the timing at which the linked object is switched to display the character is controlled by the display CPU 131 and arranged in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. Be targeted. As a result, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control start process for the switching destination object when the switch timing is reached, but execute the control update process with a processing load smaller than the control start process. Therefore, the processing load at the switching timing is reduced.

  In particular, the switching timing is a timing at which the processing load becomes relatively large for the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 because the production develops and the number of displayed objects increases. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the control start process is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that the display CPU 131 or the VDP 135 may lose processing. However, as described above, the control updating process is performed on the switching destination object. Since it only has to be executed, the occurrence of the processing failure can be prevented.

  In addition, since both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between completely transparent information and non-transparent information, the display CPU 131 has a uniform α value with respect to switching between both. It is only necessary to specify switching, and the VDP 135 may switch the uniform α value to be applied in accordance with the specification. Therefore, the above excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complexity of the processing configurations of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

  Further, the display CPU 131 provides the VDP 135 only with parameter information for the connected object to be displayed among the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system. This reduces the amount of data set in the drawing list. Further, in the VDP 135, the parameters of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 may be updated in the same manner, so that the processing load on the VDP 135 can be reduced.

  In the switching from the first effect period to the third effect period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the action of the character for effect different from the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared. It may be configured to be newly added, or may be configured to start displaying an effect character with a large processing load separately from the character for which the plurality of connected objects are prepared.

  Further, the control start timing of the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC 36 and the control start timing of the VDP 135 may not be the same as those of the first connected object PC 35. For example, although it is before the switching timing from the first effect period to the second effect period, it may be a timing after the control start timing of the first connected object PC35.

  In addition, although the processing load at the switching timing of the production period is greater than that in the above configuration, the control of the second connected object PC 36 may be started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are not arranged in the world coordinate system at the same time, it is not necessary to perform control to switch the display target by adjusting the uniform α value.

  In addition, for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, the display target may be switched by switching the rendering target instead of by uniformly adjusting the α value. In this case, since the connected object on the side that is not the display target is not rendered, the processing load during rendering is reduced as compared with the above configuration.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which the 3rd production period does not have, and it is good also as a structure by which the production period more than the 4th production period is set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the 3 or more connection object is prepared with respect to one character.

  Further, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 may have a configuration in which the number of connected portions is different instead of a configuration in which the connected portions are different. In this configuration, the processing load in the case of arranging and controlling in the world coordinate system is different between the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36. In this case, the linked objects PC35 and PC36 are prevented from being arranged in the world coordinate system at the same time. At the update timing when the processing load is low due to the relationship between the character other than the character represented by the connected objects PC35 and PC36 and the background image, the side having the higher processing load for control is used among the connected objects PC35 and PC36. On the other hand, at the update timing when the processing load is large due to the relationship between the character and the background image, it is preferable to use the side of the connected objects PC35 and PC36 that has the smaller processing load at the time of control.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 77, the object can be masked using the Z buffer 143. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform a masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity necessary for storing image data.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83, the drawing data for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is stored separately, and is sent to the player's presentation operating device 48 in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large. When the display mode is switched based on the above operation, the other stored data is used. As a result, even if the display mode is switched repeatedly in a short time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing failure.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, since a plurality of linked objects PC35 and PC36 are set for a common character, the linked objects to be displayed according to the type of motion using the joint portion. The objects PC35 and PC36 can be switched. For example, if a plurality of types of actions are to be performed with a single connected object, it is necessary to set the corresponding connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity that can be stored as single image data in the NAND flash memory 162 is exceeded. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time for handling will be prolonged. On the other hand, since it is set as a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of actions without causing the above-described disadvantages.

  In addition, there are many occasions where the production is corrected at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and if the overall movement of the connected object is reviewed every time the movement of the character is corrected, the period required for the design is very long. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of linked objects PC35 and PC36 according to the type of action to be performed as described above, even if it becomes necessary to correct the production, the linked object PC35 that has already been created. , It is not necessary to modify all of the PC 36. Therefore, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of actions while allowing the pachinko machine 10 to be well designed.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display control device 190 is different from those in the above embodiments. FIG. 88 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of the display control device 190.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the display control board 191 of the display control device 190 is provided with a first display CPU 193 and a second display CPU 194 as control means for creating a drawing list and transmitting it to the VDP 192. A management CPU 195 is provided to control the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194.

  The management CPU 195 determines the content of the presentation based on the instruction from the sound emission control device 60 received through the input port 196, and based on the determination result, the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 each have one frame worth. Provides information that is the basis for determining the content of an image. The first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 are provided with information corresponding to different frames, respectively, and the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 correspond to an image for one frame based on the received information. The drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 192.

  Control programs for the CPUs 193 to 195 are stored in advance in the NAND flash memory of the memory module 197, and are transferred in advance to the work RAM 198 based on a transfer instruction from the management CPU 195 by the timing required by the CPUs 193 to 195. The Each of the CPUs 193 to 195 executes various processes while accessing the work RAM 198. The memory module 197 stores image data in advance, and the image data is pre-transferred to the expansion buffer 202 of the VRAM 201 based on a transfer instruction from the management CPU 195 by the timing required in the VDP 192. .

  The VDP 192 is provided with a first drawing unit 203 and a second drawing unit 204 in a one-to-one correspondence with the display CPUs 193 and 194. The drawing list transmitted from the first display CPU 193 is transmitted to the first drawing unit 203, and the drawing list transmitted from the second display CPU 194 is transmitted to the second drawing unit 204. Here, each of the drawing units 203 and 204 may be for 2D display as in the first embodiment, or may be for 3D display as in the second embodiment.

  The drawing units 203 and 204 operate individually and simultaneously, and create one frame of drawing data corresponding to the received drawing list in the VRAM 201. The frame buffer 205 of the VRAM 201 is provided with a first frame area 206, a second frame area 207, and a third frame area 208, and drawing data from each drawing unit 203, 204 is stored in any one of the frame areas 206 to 208. Drawn.

  The drawing units 203 and 204 and the frame regions 206 to 208 are connected via the selector unit 211. The selector unit 211 sets the drawing target of the drawing units 203 and 204 to one of the frame regions 206 to 208. The The selector unit 211 is connected not only to the drawing units 203 and 204 but also to the display circuit 212, and the selector unit 211 also switches the frame areas 206 to 208 that are image signal output targets from the display circuit 212.

  In the above configuration, the drawing units 203 and 204 use the drawing period for two frames to create drawing data in the frame regions 206 to 208, and when compared with the drawing units 203 and 204, one drawing is used. The drawing data is created by shifting by the time difference between the drawing periods. That is, the creation of drawing data is completed for each drawing period for one frame. Then, the display circuit 212 outputs an image signal at each update timing with a frame region that is not a drawing target of the drawing units 203 and 204 as an output target. By creating drawing data using the triple buffer method in this way, an image is updated each time the update timing for one frame is reached while securing a drawing period for two frames as a drawing data creation period for one frame. Can be made. Therefore, there is more room in the drawing data creation period than in the above embodiments, and even if the configuration is such that a complex image or a large screen image is displayed, the image can be displayed favorably.

  In the above configuration, the first drawing unit 203 alternately creates drawing data for one frame in the drawing period for one frame for the first frame region 206 and the second frame region 207, and the second drawing unit 204. May be configured such that drawing data for one frame is generated in the third frame region 208 in a drawing period for a plurality of frames. In this case, drawing data can be basically created by the double buffer method, and drawing data corresponding to a particularly complex image can be created over a drawing period of a plurality of frames.

  Further, the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be two and the frame area may be four or more, and the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be three. In addition, four or more frame regions may be provided, or a combination of five display CPUs and drawing units may be provided and six or more frame regions may be provided. . In other words, a plurality of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit are provided, and more than the number of frame areas obtained by adding 1 to the number of combinations is provided, thereby creating drawing data for one frame using a drawing period for a plurality of frames. be able to.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the background arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 is different from that of the second embodiment. The background arithmetic processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S5001, the latest image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S5002, various parameters of the grasped rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S5003, the object to be updated for background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S5004, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

  Thereafter, in step S5005, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the current processing time is a processing time for creating a drawing list corresponding to a frame immediately before the development effect. .

  The development effect is at least one of an effect in which the number of characters for the effect increases, an effect in which the action of the effect character is newly added, and an effect in which an effect character with a large processing load is displayed. It is a production corresponding to. Further, in the development effect, in the effect calculation process (step S3804) in the task process (FIG. 69) of the display CPU 131, an object grasping process corresponding to the development effect and an update process of the control information are executed. In addition, in the rendering setting process (step S3903) in the drawing process (FIG. 71) of the VDP 135, the geometry calculation and rendering as described above for the object corresponding to the developed rendering is performed.

  If it is determined in step S5005 that it is the timing immediately before the development effect, the storage processing execution designation information is stored in step S5006, and then this calculation process ends.

  When the background calculation process is executed as described above, the background image data corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, Separate save execution specification information is set. With respect to this drawing list, the background drawing data creation process (FIG. 82) in the second embodiment is executed in the VDP 135, so that the background drawing data corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is saved separately. Is done. In this case, in this embodiment, a separate storage buffer is provided for the VRAM 134 instead of the mode buffer 145, and the background drawing data is stored separately in this separate storage buffer.

  If it is determined in step S5005 in the calculation process for the background (FIG. 89) that it is not the timing immediately before the development effect, the development effect is being performed based on the currently set data table in step S5007. It is determined whether or not. If the development effect is not being performed, this calculation process is terminated as it is. In this case, by outputting a drawing list corresponding to the drawing list, the VDP 135 creates drawing data for the background as usual using the specified backmost image and object.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5007 that the development effect is being performed, this calculation process is terminated after the use designation information of the separately stored data is stored in step S5008.

  When the background calculation process is executed as described above, at least the use designation information of the other saved data is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. With respect to this drawing list, the background drawing data creation process (FIG. 82) in the second embodiment is executed in the VDP 135, so that at least the drawing data for the background is not rendered. The separately saved background drawing data is used as the drawing data for the background being developed.

  According to the above configuration, rendering of background drawing data is omitted in a situation where the processing load for displaying the effect character is increased. As a result, in the situation where the development effect is performed, the inconvenience that the processing load of the VDP 135 becomes extremely large and the processing drop occurs is suppressed.

  In addition, the background drawing data stored separately corresponds to the background image displayed in the frame immediately before the development effect is started. Thereby, even if the background image is diverted during the development effect, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  When the background image is an image displayed so as to be scrolled in a predetermined direction over a display period for a plurality of frames, scroll display is performed until immediately before the development effect, and scroll display is performed during the development effect. It will be stopped.

  Further, in the above processing configuration, during the development effect, the display CPU 131 may not calculate and update the parameters for the background image data, and the VDP 135 may not perform the geometry calculation. In this case, the processing load can be further reduced.

<Supplementary explanation>
Here, a supplementary explanation of the processing configuration executed by the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 in each of the above embodiments will be given with reference to a flowchart.

<First processing configuration>
First, about the processing contents when the reading process, the game times control process and the game state transition process, which are a part of the processes necessary to advance the game, are set to be distributed to the timer interrupt process and the normal process explain.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Note that this process is periodically started by the MPU 52 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S5101, read processing is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors are read, the states of the various winning detection sensors are determined, and the winning detection information is stored. In addition, when the winning detection sensor corresponding to the generation of the winning ball detects the winning of the game ball, a winning ball command for instructing the payout control device 55 to pay out the winning ball is set.

  In subsequent step S5102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In subsequent step S5103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

  In a succeeding step S5104, a through winning process for winning through the through gate 25 is executed. In the through-winning process, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S5104 is set as the electric power reservation on the condition that the number of the stored bonus items stored in the electric power reservation area is less than four. Store in the area.

  After that, in step S5105, a winning process for the working opening accompanying the winning of the working openings 23 and 24 is executed. In the winning process for the operating opening, if a winning has occurred in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24, the start reserved memory number stored in the holding ball storage area 54b is the upper limit number (for example, “ 4)), the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S5103 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b. . In this case, the data is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current start reserved memory number. After executing the process of step S5105, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Incidentally, the process of step S5105 corresponds to the hold information acquisition process described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is a process that is started after a main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed. As its outline, the processing from step S5201 to step S5209 is executed as a 4 msec cycle processing, and the counter update processing of step S5210 and step S5211 is executed in the remaining time.

  In step S5201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 55. Further, when a predetermined effect command is set, it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  In subsequent step S5202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In a succeeding step S5203, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination, symbol variable display setting by the symbol display device 31, display control of the main display unit 33, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, in step S5204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the gaming state transition process, when the game round corresponding to the big win is completed, the transition process to the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 22 is started. Various commands for the opening / closing execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 when starting the opening / closing execution mode, during the opening / closing execution mode, and when ending the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the success / failure lottery mode transition or the support mode transition is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

  In a succeeding step S5205, a demonstration display process is executed. In the demonstration display process, a predetermined demonstration start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game time after the game time has ended in a state where the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress. A process for determining whether or not the process has been performed is executed. In addition, since a power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined demonstration start start period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed without newly starting a game play. A process for determining whether or not the process has been performed is executed. If it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  In a succeeding step S5206, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric charge 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, the information stored in the electronic combination holding area 54c of the RAM 54 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric combination 24a, to open / close the electric combination 24a, and for the combination Display control of the display unit 34 is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S5207, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 58 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power source and launch control device 57. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S5208, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM. The power interruption flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed, and is deleted in the next main processing.

  If the power interruption flag is not stored, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S5209, that is, the previous process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S5210, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. In step S5211, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S5201 to S5207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5208 that the power interruption flag is stored, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S5212 is executed. That is, in step S5212, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and then the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in step S5213. After the access of the RAM 54 is prohibited in step S5214, the power supply is completely shut down and processed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

  Next, the game times control processing in step S5203 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the game turn control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S5302. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 23 and 24 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S5302 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in a variable display. If the main display unit 33 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S5303 to S5305.

  In the game turn starting process, first, in step S5303, it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is “0”. The case where the starting reserved ball number N is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 54b. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the number N of starting reserved balls is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b for variable display is executed in step S5304. Specifically, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 is shifted in order to the lower area side. Then, after executing the change start process in step S5305, the game times control process is terminated.

  Here, the variation start processing in step S5305 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S5401, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current variation start process corresponds to the big win is executed. Specifically, with reference to the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE and the winning / failing table corresponding to the current winning / losing lottery mode, it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot. judge. Incidentally, the process of step S5401 corresponds to the success / failure lottery process described in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S5402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. If it is a big win, a type determination process is executed in step S5403. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified with reference to the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE.

  In the subsequent step S5404, stop result setting processing corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game times related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 53 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. In the jackpot result stop result table, the types of patterns stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 are set differently for each jackpot result type. In step S5404, the type of pattern is specified in step S5403. Information on the pattern mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 54.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5402 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S5405. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game round relating to the start of the current change is specified from the stop result table for off-time stored in the ROM 53 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing the process of step S5404 or step S5405, in step S5406, a variable display time setting process is executed.

  In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 54a of the RAM 54 is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current variation is a jackpot result, it is determined that reach display occurs. Even if it is not a jackpot result, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table stored in the ROM 53, and the fluctuation Display time information is set in a variable display time counter provided in the RAM 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table stored in the ROM 53. Then, the variation display time information is set in the variation display time counter. Incidentally, the fluctuation display time that can be obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time that can be obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number N of starting reserved balls increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation variation display time table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display time does not vary according to the number N of starting reserved balls and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, a variable display time table may be individually set for each of the case of out-of-bound reach and the case of no reach.

  After the variable display time setting process is executed in step S5406, a variable command and a type command are set in step S5407. The change command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the information on the presence or absence of the reach is not included in the command for use, the sound emission control device 60 as the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, any one of normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, 15R probability variation jackpot result information, and outage result information.

  The variation command and type command set in step S5407 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S5201 in the normal process (FIG. 91). After executing the process of step S5407, the main display unit 33 starts to display the variation of the pattern in step S5408. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 92), when the main display unit 33 is in a variable display, the processes of steps S5306 to S5309 are executed. In this process, first, in step S5306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S5307. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 33 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the variable display time has elapsed, the variable end process is executed in step S5308. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 54 in the process of step S5404 or step S5405 is specified, and the main display unit 33 is displayed so that the pattern form corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 33. Control display.

  In a succeeding step S5309, a change end command is set. The variation end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S5201 in the normal process (FIG. 91). The sound emission control device 60 ends the effect in the game time based on the received variation end command. In addition, a command corresponding to the command is transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 70, and the display control device 70 displays a final combination of final stop symbols in the game times (final stop display). Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

<Second processing configuration>
Next, a description will be given of processing contents when reading processing, gaming time control processing, and gaming state transition processing, which are a part of processing necessary for progressing a game, are integrated into timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 when the supply of operating power is started.

  First, in step S5501, start-up processing associated with power-on is executed. In a succeeding step S5502, access to the RAM 54 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S5503, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 57 is turned on. In subsequent step S5504, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM. In step S5505, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S5506, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data.

  If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the power interruption flag is stored, and the RAM determination value is normal, the power interruption flag is erased from the RAM 54 in step S5507, and the RAM is deleted in step S5508. Erase the judgment value. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S5509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S5510, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S5511. And after performing the process of step S5509-step S5511, it returns to step S5509 and repeats the process of step S5509-step S5511.

  It should be noted that the interrupt prohibition setting may be performed immediately after the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S5509. In this case, the timer interrupt processing to be described later may be configured to wait for execution until the next interrupt permission setting is performed when the start timing is reached in a situation where the interrupt prohibition setting is performed. .

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S5512 to S5513. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shut-off is not set, or when abnormality of data stored and held by the RAM determination value is confirmed, the process proceeds to steps S5512 to S5513.

  In step S5512, the used area of the RAM 54 is cleared to “0”, and in step S5513, initialization of the RAM 54 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to steps S5509 to S5511.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 52 of the main controller 50.

  In the timer interrupt process, processes similar to those in steps S5101 to S5105 of the first process configuration are executed in steps S5601 to S5605.

  Thereafter, in step S5606, update processing of the variation type counter CS is executed, game turn control processing is executed in step S5607, game state transition processing is executed in step S5608, and demo display processing is executed in step S5609. In step S5610, a power combination support process is executed. In step S5611, a game ball launch control process is executed. In step S5612, an external output process is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. The detailed contents of these processes are the same as those in the first process configuration.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied alone to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments in a predetermined combination. Moreover, you may apply the following each structure to embodiment which is not illustrated as an application object of the structure.

  (1) When the display CPUs 72 and 131 and the VDPs 76 and 135 are intended to improve the data reading speed, the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 are not used as the memory modules 74 and 133, but NOR. A configuration relating to data pre-transfer or reading boot data from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to a configuration using a random accessible memory such as a type flash memory.

  (2) When attention is paid to the effect that the initial setting process can proceed smoothly, the boot memories 119 and 179 are not provided, and the boot data is stored in the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. The boot data may be preliminarily transferred to the work RAMs 73 and 132 before the setting process is started. In this case, the wait processing is preferably executed in the display CPUs 72 and 131 until the transfer of the boot data to the work RAMs 73 and 132 is completed. In the case of the above configuration, although the time from the power supply start timing to the display CPUs 72 and 131 to the substantial start timing of the initial setting process is longer than that in each of the above embodiments, the initial setting process can be smoothly advanced. It becomes possible.

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, the program data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. Further, part or all of the image data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162.

  (4) The boot memories 119 and 179 may be provided separately from the memory modules 74 and 133. In this case, the signal path between the boot memories 119 and 179 and the display CPUs 72 and 131, the signal path between the memory modules 74 and 133 and the display CPUs 72 and 131, and the memory modules 74 and 133 and the RAMs 73 and 75 are displayed. , 132, and 134 can be used to transfer data from the memory modules 74 and 133 to the work RAMs 73 and 132 and the VRAMs 75 and 134 using the period during which boot data is read into the display CPUs 72 and 131. It becomes possible.

  (5) The program data of the initial setting process (FIG. 10) may be configured with only boot data without requiring the latter half of the data. In this case, it is necessary to increase the necessary storage capacity in the boot memories 119 and 179 as compared with the above embodiments, but it is not necessary to transfer the program data for the initial setting process during the initial setting process. Incidentally, in this configuration, it is necessary to set program data for instructing transfer of regular program data and regular image data in the boot data.

  (6) In addition to the memory modules 74 and 133, a memory for storing image data in advance may be provided. Specifically, for this configuration, a NOR flash memory is provided as the other memory, and the regular image data is stored in the NOR flash memory. Then, by connecting the NOR flash memory to the VDPs 76 and 135, when displaying an image corresponding to the normal image data, the normal image data may be read from the NOR flash memory. According to this configuration, it is necessary to provide a plurality of types of memories for storing image data in advance. However, even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it does not need to transfer the regular image data. The displayed image can be displayed satisfactorily. Even in this configuration, only the normal image data is stored in the NOR flash memory, and the change image data whose data capacity is likely to increase with the diversification of effects is stored in the memory modules 74 and 133. By adopting the configuration, it is sufficient to use a NOR type flash memory having a small storage capacity. Therefore, the above-described effects can be achieved while reducing the cost. The above configuration may be applied to the regular program data.

  (7) In the above embodiments, when the backup power is not supplied to the RAMs of the display control devices 70 and 130 and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data group stored in the RAM until then is Instead of a configuration that is destroyed or erased, a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the RAM may be employed.

  As the means for supplying the backup power, the power supply and launch control device 57 may also be used as a power interruption unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, etc. An intermediate power supply unit may be provided.

  (8) The storage means to which the program data and the image data are transferred in advance is stored in the RAM, which is a volatile storage means, if the speed required for reading the data is faster than that of the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 and can be overwritten. It is not limited.

  (9) The configuration of advance transfer of program data and image data and the configuration of boot data reading from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to control devices other than the display control devices 70 and 130. For example, the present invention may be applied to the sound emission control device 60. Further, the present invention may be applied to the main control device 50, the payout control device 55, or the power source and launch control device 57. In addition, in the configuration in which a movable object that performs an operation for playing a game is provided instead of the symbol display device 31, the above configuration may be applied to a control device that drives and controls the movable object.

  (10) With respect to an image displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation over a display period for a plurality of frames, after a predetermined sequence of operations is reproduced in the forward direction, the image may be reproduced in reverse. . In this case, since it is not necessary for the first operation and the last operation to have continuity, the creation of image data at the design stage can be facilitated as compared to the case of loop reproduction.

  (11) At the timing when the processing load on the display CPUs 72 and 131 and the VDPs 76 and 135 increases, such as when the effecting characters perform complex actions or when the effecting characters increase, the characters for the background Although the character on the side not attracting attention continues to be displayed, the motion may not be updated. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced.

  (12) A plurality of image data for displaying a predetermined character may be simultaneously set in the frame regions 82a and 82b. Thereby, a plurality of characters can be displayed while suppressing the number of image data stored in advance. In this case, the image data may be set so as to be reversed left and right, and when performing an effect passing through a predetermined position, the coordinates may be set so that the timing of passing through the position is different.

  (13) Image data obtained by combining a plurality of effect images may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, the visual effect by the effect image can be enhanced while suppressing an increase in processing load.

  (14) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is individually set for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system. Instead, all the cameras arranged in the world coordinate system are used. A single camera may be commonly set for image data.

  (15) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, the effect image, and the design image. May be configured to be projected together, may be configured to be projected together in units of effect images and design images, or may be configured to be projected all together.

  (16) In the second embodiment, when texture mapping processing is performed, a structure may be used in which a texture is pasted only on a projected surface of a single object. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, the texture mapping may be performed after the projection instead of performing the texture mapping before the projection.

  (17) In the second embodiment, the symbol display may be performed on the basis of placing data obtained by pasting two-dimensional image data on a plate polygon in the world coordinate system. In this case, the display may be performed as if the design is illuminated by light by sequentially changing the vertex colors of the four corners of the plate polygon.

  (18) In the second embodiment, by combining the camera work in the world coordinate system and the enlargement / reduction of the object, the distance the character moves is displayed while displaying a predetermined character in a certain size. You may perform the display effect to show for a long time.

  (19) When attention is paid to the characteristic configuration related to display control using image data in each of the above embodiments, NAND flash memories 102 and 162 are used as storage means for storing program data and image data in advance. The configuration and the configuration that is pre-transferred to the reading RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134 are arbitrary, and a storage means capable of random access such as a NOR flash memory is used as a storage means for storing program data and image data in advance. The above-described characteristic configuration relating to display control may be applied to a configuration that is configured or a configuration that does not have prior transfer to the RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134.

  (20) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 has priority. The structure digested may be applied, and conversely, the structure in which the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 23 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 24 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launching handle 41.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 33 is acquired based on the first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the winning of the lower operating port 24. A second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is correct may be provided. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 24 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (21) A player in the case where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 becomes a target of the success / failure determination and the case where the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 becomes a target of the success / failure determination. It is good also as a structure from which the profit which is obtained differs. In the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in each of the above embodiments, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (22) Based on the command output from the main control device 50, instead of the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command output from the main control device 50, The display control devices 70 and 130 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 60. In this case, based on the command output from the main controller 50, the display controllers 70 and 130 may determine the content of the effect. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be employed. In this case, the aggregated control device may determine the content of the effect based on the command output from the main control device 50.

  Further, one function of the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 may be integrated into the main control device 50, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 50. Good. The configuration of commands output from the main controller 50 to the sound emission controller 60 is also arbitrary.

  Further, the object to which the production operation device 48 is electrically connected is not limited to the sound emission control device 60, and may be connected to the main control device 50, for example, and connected to the display control devices 70 and 130. May be. However, since the operation of the production operation device 48 is performed at the time of selection of production, etc., it is preferably connected to a control device that determines the content of the production. For example, in the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 control the sound emission control device 60 as described above, a configuration in which the effect operation device 48 is connected to the display control devices 70 and 130 is preferable. In addition, in the configuration in which one control device in which the functions of the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are integrated, the content of the effect is determined by the control device. The production operation device 48 is preferably connected to the control device.

  Further, in a control device that executes a predetermined process such as selection of an effect according to the operation status of the effect operating device 48, when the operation of the effect operating device 48 is performed a plurality of times during a unit period, the operation is performed. It is good also as a structure in which the filter means which reduces the frequency | count which recognizes is provided. For example, when the production operation device 48 is operated once, the operation of the production operation device 48 may be invalidated over a predetermined invalid period from the timing when the operation is recognized. .

  (23) A configuration including a display CPU and a VDP having both a function of displaying a two-dimensional image as in the first embodiment and a function of displaying a three-dimensional image as in the second embodiment. It is also possible to have a configuration that includes both the above functions and an element in which the functions of the display CPU and VDP are integrated. In this case, the effect using the two-dimensional image as in the first embodiment and the effect using the three-dimensional image as in the second embodiment can be switched according to the progress of the game. It becomes possible.

  (24) In each of the embodiments described above, every time the image on the display screen G is updated, signal output is performed on all the dots on the display screen G, and the setting of the image for one frame is repeated. There is no limitation, and signal output is performed for a range of dots at a predetermined update timing (for example, 2 msec), and setting of a part of the image is repeated. A configuration may be adopted in which signal output is performed for dots in other ranges at different update timings (for example, 4 msec), and settings of the remaining images are repeated.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, as image data for displaying a specific type of character or a specific type of background image, the first image data that has a relatively high processing load in use and the processing load in use. Second image data that is relatively small is set, and a specific type of individual image is displayed at an update timing with a small processing load due to the relationship between individual images other than the specific type of individual image corresponding to the image data. On the other hand, it is preferable to use the second image data to display the specific type of individual image at the update timing when the processing load is large due to the relationship between the individual images other than the specific type of individual image. . For example, when high-resolution image data is set as the first image data and low-resolution image data is set as the second image data, the processing load for displaying an image for one frame is increased. At a small update timing, it is possible to display a specific type of individual image as a high-resolution image and improve the appearance of the specific type of individual image, while processing load for displaying an image for one frame. When the update timing is large, the appearance of a specific type of individual image is reduced, but the effect can be made flashy due to the relationship between other individual images.

  (26) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, non-ballistic gaming machines, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels as a plurality of rotating bodies with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, start rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and stop Slot that gives a player a privilege such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by operating the switch The present invention can also be applied to a machine. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various types of control of the slot machine, and the present invention is applied to control related to image display in the display control device in a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in addition to the reel. Can be applied.

  In addition, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that have a take-in device and start rotation of a reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which is integrated.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. First storage means (NAND type flash memories 102 and 162) for storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine equipped with
A second storage unit that stores information read from the first storage unit and has a shorter period of time required to read information than the case of reading from the first storage unit when compared by reading information of the same capacity. Work RAM 73, 132),
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used in executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. (Controllers 101 and 161);
In the case where the initial activation information used when executing the initial activation process in the control means based on the predetermined initial activation state is stored in advance and compared by reading information of the same capacity A third storage means (boot memories 119 and 179) having a period required for reading information shorter than that when reading from the first storage means;
With
The control means includes
Specific control execution means (function to execute V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the specific information stored in the second storage means and executing the specific control;
Initial execution means for reading out the initial activation information stored in the third storage means and executing the initial activation processing (function for executing the processing of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit that has a shorter period of time for reading the information than when the information is read from the first storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. The control unit is configured to read the specific information stored in the second storage unit and execute the specific control. Therefore, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be shortened, and the specific control can be performed smoothly.

  In addition, the initial startup information used when executing the initial startup process is not stored in the first storage unit, but is stored in advance in the third storage unit in which the period required for reading the information is shorter than that in the case of reading from the first storage unit. Has been. The initial activation process is executed by reading the initial activation information from the third storage means. As a result, when the initial startup process is executed, there is no waiting time for transferring the initial startup information to the second storage unit, so that the initial startup process is started after the initial startup state is reached. The time is shortened.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used exclusively for reading information when the control unit executes control, and stores and holds information even when no operating power is supplied from the outside. Storage means for performing is included. The same applies to the following independent features.

Feature A2. First storage means (NAND type flash memories 102 and 162) for storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine equipped with
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory,
Furthermore, the information read out from the first storage means is stored, and when compared with information reading of the same capacity, the second storage in which the period required for reading out the information is shorter than when reading from the first storage means Means (work RAM 73, 132);
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used in executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. (Controllers 101 and 161);
In the case where the initial activation information used when executing the initial activation process in the control means based on the predetermined initial activation state is stored in advance and compared by reading information of the same capacity A third storage means (boot memories 119 and 179) having a period required for reading information shorter than that when reading from the first storage means;
With
The control means includes
Specific control execution means (function to execute V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the specific information stored in the second storage means and executing the specific control;
Initial execution means for reading out the initial activation information stored in the third storage means and executing the initial activation processing (function for executing the processing of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A2, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage unit, the capacity can be easily increased as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. In addition, the specific information is stored at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means in the second storage means, which is shorter than the time required for reading the information from the first storage means, and the control means The specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when a NAND flash memory that requires a relatively long period for reading is used as the first storage unit, the time required for reading the specific information in the control unit can be shortened and the specific control can be performed smoothly. be able to.

  In addition, the initial startup information used when executing the initial startup process is not stored in the first storage unit, but is stored in advance in the third storage unit in which the period required for reading the information is shorter than that in the case of reading from the first storage unit. Has been. The initial activation process is executed by reading the initial activation information from the third storage means. As a result, when the initial startup process is executed, there is no waiting time for transferring the initial startup information to the second storage unit, so that the initial startup process is started after the initial startup state is reached. The time is shortened.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

Feature A3. The specific control execution means starts the specific control after the execution of the initial activation process is completed,
Further, the initial activation information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit,
The initial execution means transfers the specific information to the transfer means by referring to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the initial activation process. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the processing to be executed (the processing in step S310 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) is executed.

  According to the feature A3, since information for transferring the specific information is set in the initial activation information, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control during the execution of the initial activation process. Instruction is given. Thereby, specific control can be started favorably.

Feature A4. The control means reads post-startup information transferred to the second storage means and executes post-startup processing after the initial start-up processing (steps S307 to S307 in the display CPUs 72 and 131). A function of executing the process of S314),
The initial startup information includes post-startup information reference information indicating that the post-startup information should be read from the first storage means and transferred to the second storage means,
The initial execution unit transfers the post-startup information to the second storage unit to the transfer unit by referring to the post-startup information reference information as at least a part of the initial start-up process. (Step S304 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) is executed.
Furthermore, the completion of execution of the initial activation process and the post-activation process completes the initial activation setting based on the initial activation state in the control means, and the specific control execution The game machine according to Feature A1 or A2, wherein the means starts the specific control upon completion of the execution of the initial activation process and the activation process.

  According to the feature A4, information used for executing and completing the initial activation setting in the control means is set by dividing into information for initial activation and post-activation information. The initial activation information to be used first is stored in advance in the third storage unit, and the post-startup information to be used later is stored in advance in the first storage unit. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the third storage unit, compared to a configuration in which the initial startup information and post-startup information are collectively stored in the third storage unit in advance.

  Even in this configuration, since the information for transferring the post-startup information is set in the initial start-up information, the subsequent post-startup process is executed during the initial start-up process. A necessary post-startup information transfer instruction is issued. Thereby, the post-startup process can be favorably started.

Feature A5. The initial activation information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit,
The post-startup execution means transfers the specific information to the second storage means by referring to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the post-startup processing. The gaming machine according to Feature A4, which executes the process to be performed (the process of Step S310 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).

  According to the feature A5, since information for transferring the specific information is set in the initial activation information, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control during the execution of the post-activation process. Instruction is given. Thereby, specific control can be started favorably.

Feature A6. The transfer means selects a storage area corresponding to the transfer instruction information from among a number of storage areas included in the first storage means based on the transfer instruction information transmitted by the control means, and the selected storage Management means (controller CPU 113, 173) for reading information stored in advance in the area,
When the control unit reads the initial activation information from the third storage unit, the control unit transmits transfer instruction information corresponding to the information to the management unit, and based on this, the information is read from the third storage unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein:

  According to the feature A6, since the management unit is provided, the information transfer from the first storage unit is favorably performed in response to the transfer instruction from the control unit. In this case, the control means may transmit the transfer instruction information to the management means even when information is read from the third storage means. Thereby, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control unit are collected, and the configuration relating to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

  Feature A7. The management unit, the first storage unit, and the third storage unit are provided as storage modules (memory modules 74 and 133) having a common port unit (I / F 111 and 171) for the control unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A6.

  According to the feature A7, the control means uses the common port of the storage module both in the case of instructing transfer from the first storage means to the second storage means and in the case of reading information from the third storage means. The transfer instruction information may be transmitted to the part. Thereby, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means are aggregated, and the configuration relating to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

Feature A8. The first storage means is a NAND flash memory;
The transfer means includes
Management information storage means (control ROMs 114 and 174) for storing management information in which physical address information of the first storage means is associated with logical address information transmitted by the control means;
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the logical address information transmitted by the control means is executed, and a plurality of storage areas included in the first storage means are stored. Management means (controller CPU 113, 173) for executing a read process for reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address specifying process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, comprising:

  According to the feature A8, a bad block may be generated in the NAND flash memory. However, since the physical address for the logical address transmitted from the control unit is specified in the management unit, the information of the information from the NAND flash memory is not stored. Reading is performed satisfactorily.

Feature A9. The transfer means stores information read from the storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the information of the logical address, and a period required for reading the information when compared by reading information of the same capacity is When storage means (cache memories 117, 177) shorter than the case of reading from the first storage means is provided and information corresponding to the logical address information is transferred to the transfer destination, the information is transferred after being stored in the storage means. Configuration,
When the management means reads information corresponding to the logical address information transmitted by the control means from the first storage means and stores it in the storage means, the management means corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. The game according to Feature A8, further comprising prediction start means (function of executing the processing of step S107 in the controller CPU 113, 173) for starting transfer of information from the storage area of the physical address to the storage means Machine.

  According to the feature A9, when the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means to the storage means and is only transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination. Instead, the logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be the logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means. As a result, when information corresponding to each of a plurality of associated logical addresses is read, information on the logical address from the control means is transmitted from the control means for information corresponding to the logical address on the back side. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required for reading such information can be shortened.

  However, in the above configuration, reading of information corresponding to the first logical address largely depends on the reading speed of the NAND flash memory. On the other hand, since it has the configuration of the feature A1 and the initial startup information is stored in advance in the third storage unit instead of the first storage unit, the initial startup process is started after the initial startup state is reached. This shortens the time until

Feature A10. Comprising display means (design display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
The specific control execution means is configured to perform display control of an image to be displayed on the display screen as the specific control.
The initial execution means is a process for displaying an image (initial image) for a stage before the display of an image based on the specific control is started (the steps S311 and S312 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) as the initial activation process. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the processing is executed.

  According to the feature A10, since the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial activation process, the image on the display screen is displayed until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. Compared to a configuration in which is not displayed at all, display of an image on the display screen can be started at an earlier timing.

Feature A11. Comprising display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G), wherein the control means is configured to control display of an image to be displayed on the display screen;
The first storage means stores in advance control program data used when executing various processes in the control means and image data used when displaying an image on the display screen,
The control means causes the transfer means to perform transfer while adjusting the timing of information transfer so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, further comprising means (a function of executing steps S306, S309, and S313 in display CPUs 72 and 131).

  According to the feature A11, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in the first storage unit in advance, the storage destinations of these information can be aggregated. In this configuration, since the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap, the hardware configuration related to the transfer of each information It is possible to transfer each information satisfactorily while suppressing complexity.

Feature A12. A plurality of types of the control program data are stored, and the type of image data required for displaying an image based on the processing using the control program data differs depending on the type of the control program data,
The transfer adjusting unit is configured to transfer control program data corresponding to the image data in preference to image data transfer, and does not use the image data in processing using the control program data. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the image data is transferred while the process is being executed.

  According to the feature A12, since the control program data corresponding to the image data is transferred in preference to the transfer of the image data, the waiting for processing is suppressed. In addition, since the image data is transferred while the processing not using the image data is executed in the processing using the control program data, the display of the image using the image data is not hindered. It becomes possible to.

Feature A13. The initial execution means is a process (steps S311 and steps in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for displaying an image for an earlier stage (initial image) where image display is started based on the specific control as the initial activation process. S312) is executed,
The transfer adjustment means is an image corresponding to the image for the previous stage after the transfer of the initial activation information is completed and before the transfer of the control program data used in the specific control is started. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, wherein data is transferred.

  According to the feature A13, since the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial activation process, the image on the display screen is displayed until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. Compared to a configuration in which is not displayed at all, display of an image on the display screen can be started at an earlier timing.

Feature A14. The control means is a downstream control means that performs the specific control in accordance with instruction information transmitted based on execution of upstream processing in the upstream control means (main control device 50),
Further, the first storage means is a NAND flash memory, and the upstream storage means (ROM 53) preliminarily storing control program data used when the upstream control means performs the upstream processing is random. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, which is an accessible memory.

  According to the feature A14, the upstream control means can be randomly accessed for the reading of the control program data, thereby simplifying the configuration relating to the reading of the control program data, while the downstream control means is large. It can be set as the structure which attaches importance to capacity.

Feature A15. First storage means (NAND type flash memories 102 and 162) for storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine equipped with
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory,
Furthermore, the information read out from the first storage means is stored, and when compared with information reading of the same capacity, the second storage in which the period required for reading out the information is shorter than when reading from the first storage means Means (work RAM 73, 132);
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used in executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. (Controllers 101 and 161);
With
The control means includes
Specific control execution means (function to execute V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the specific information stored in the second storage means and executing the specific control;
An initial activation process is executed based on a predetermined initial activation state, and is required for reading information when compared with information read out transferred to the second storage means or of the same capacity Initial execution means (steps S302 to S302 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that read the initial activation information stored in advance in another storage means that has a period shorter than that read from the first storage means and execute the initial activation processing. The function of executing the process of S306),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A15, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage unit, the capacity can be easily increased as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. In addition, the specific information is stored at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means in the second storage means, which is shorter than the time required for reading the information from the first storage means, and the control means The specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when a NAND flash memory that requires a relatively long period for reading is used as the first storage unit, the time required for reading the specific information in the control unit can be shortened and the specific control can be performed smoothly. be able to.

  Further, the initial startup information used when executing the initial startup process is read after being transferred to the second storage unit, or the period required for reading the information is shorter than the case of reading from the first storage unit. Read from the storage means. As a result, the initial startup process can be executed satisfactorily.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

Feature A16. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G), first storage means (NAND flash memories 102, 162) for storing information in advance, and stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine comprising display control means (display CPUs 72, 131, VDPs 76, 135) for controlling display of an image to be displayed on the display screen based on the information being
The first storage means stores in advance control program data used when various processes are executed in the display control means, and image data used when an image is displayed on the display screen,
A second storage unit that stores information read from the first storage unit and has a shorter period of time required to read information than the case of reading from the first storage unit when compared by reading information of the same capacity. Work RAM 73, 132, VRAM 75, 134),
Transfer means (controllers 101, 161) for reading the necessary information from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing prior to the timing required by the display control means;
With
The display control unit is configured to execute processing using the control program data transferred to the second storage unit and to display an image using the image data transferred to the second storage unit. ,
Further, a transfer adjustment means (display) for causing the transfer means to perform transfer while adjusting the timing of information transfer so that a period during which the control program data is transferred and a period during which the image data is transferred are not overlapped. A function of executing steps S306, S309, S313 and the like in the CPUs 72 and 131);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A16, the information is stored in the second storage means whose time required for reading the information is shorter than that required when the information is read from the first storage means at a timing before the timing required by the display control means, and is displayed. The control means performs processing using the information stored in the second storage means and displays an image. Therefore, the time required for reading information in the display control means can be shortened, and the image can be displayed smoothly.

  Further, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in advance in the first storage means, the storage destinations of these information can be aggregated. In this configuration, since the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap, the hardware configuration related to the transfer of each information It is possible to transfer each information satisfactorily while suppressing complexity.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

Feature A17. First storage means (NAND type flash memories 102 and 162) for storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means In a gaming machine equipped with
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory,
Furthermore, the information read out from the first storage means is stored, and when compared with information reading of the same capacity, the second storage in which the period required for reading out the information is shorter than when reading from the first storage means Means (work RAM 73, 132);
Transfer means for reading out the specific information used in executing the specific control from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means. (Controllers 101 and 161);
With
The transfer means includes
Management information storage means (control ROMs 114 and 174) for storing management information in which physical address information of the first storage means is associated with logical address information transmitted by the control means;
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the logical address information transmitted by the control means is executed, and a plurality of storage areas included in the first storage means are stored. Management means (controller CPU 113, 173) for executing a read process for reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address specifying process,
Storage means (cache memories 117 and 177) for storing information read from the storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the logical address information;
And when transferring the information corresponding to the information of the logical address to the transfer destination, the information is transferred after being stored in the storage means,
When the management means reads information corresponding to the logical address information transmitted by the control means from the first storage means and stores it in the storage means, the management means corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. A gaming machine comprising prediction start means (function to execute the processing of step S107 in the controller CPU 113, 173) for starting transfer of information from a storage area of a physical address to the storage means.

  According to the feature A17, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage unit, the capacity can be easily increased as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. In addition, the specific information is stored at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means in the second storage means, which is shorter than the time required for reading the information from the first storage means, and the control means The specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when a NAND flash memory that requires a relatively long period for reading is used as the first storage unit, the time required for reading the specific information in the control unit can be shortened and the specific control can be performed smoothly. be able to.

  In addition, a bad block may occur in the NAND flash memory, but the physical address is specified for the logical address transmitted from the control means in the management means, so that reading of information from the NAND flash memory is good. Done.

  Further, when information on the logical address is transmitted from the control means, the information corresponding to the logical address is not only read from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination, but also A logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be a logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means. As a result, when information corresponding to each of a plurality of associated logical addresses is read, information on the logical address from the control means is transmitted from the control means for information corresponding to the logical address on the back side. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required for reading such information can be shortened.

  The invention of the above-described feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and an element such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. . A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory. Also, in recent years, the degree of attention to images has been increased by diversifying the presentation mode of images or using complex moving images or live-action images as images, and accordingly, attention to games has been increased. Attempts have been made.

  Here, when an image drawing instruction is generated, it is preferable to display the image at an early stage. As a method for displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. As another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of a CPU that performs image processing is conceivable. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom of memory selection decreases at the gaming machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to image display, and similarly occurs in configurations related to other controls.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features A1 to A17, the following features B1 to B13, the following features C1 to C10, the following features C′1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. -F15, the following features G1-G9, the following features G'1-G'2, the following features H1-H11, the following features I1-I10, the following features J1-J13, the following features K1-K9, and the following features L1-L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means and updating the contents of the image at a predetermined update timing. When,
In gaming machines equipped with
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen (function for executing write processing in VDP 76, step S1901, step S1905, step in VDP76) S2001, Step S2005, Step S2101 to Step S2104)
When the plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the transparency value set in a part of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the near side corresponds to the individual image on the back side. By setting the overlapping portion of the image data to be a display target, the transparent value adjusting means for performing partial display of the individual image on the near side (function for executing the processing of steps S1904, S2004, and S2107 in the VDP 76) )When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the transparency value of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the near side. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to prepare image data for partial display and image data for full display separately, so that the storage capacity of the display storage means can be reduced.

Feature B2. The image data has many unit image data (pixels) associated with color information,
The display storage means includes transparent value adjustment data (partial α data PD22 to PD25, partial α data PD30 to PD33, α pallet data) in which a transparent value is set corresponding to each unit image data of the image data. , Α data for part PD37, PD38) are stored in advance,
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the transparent value adjusting means causes the partial display to be performed by applying the transparent value adjusting data to the image data corresponding to the individual image on the near side. .

  According to the feature B2, since the partial display is performed simply by reading the transparent value adjustment data from the display storage unit and applying it to the image data, the processing configuration for performing the partial display becomes complicated. Is suppressed.

Feature B3. The transparency value adjustment data is higher in the transparency of the contour portion than the adjacent portion on the inner side of the unit image data corresponding to the contour portion of the region partially displayed in the individual image on the near side. The transparency value is set so that
Further, the individual images displayed as the individual images on the front side include the first front side individual image and the second front side individual image, and each of the front side individual images has a one-to-one correspondence. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the transparent value adjustment data is provided correspondingly.

  According to the feature B3, since the transparency value adjustment data is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first near-side individual image and the second near-side individual image, partial display is performed on these individual images. Can do. In addition, since each transparency value adjustment data is set so that the transparency of the contour portion of the corresponding individual image is higher than the adjacent portion on the inner side, the transparency value adjustment is performed to perform partial display. In the case where the application data is applied, it is possible to reduce jaggies of the partially displayed image at the same time.

Feature B4. The individual images displayed as the individual images on the front side include a first front individual image (an individual image corresponding to the symbol sprite data PD26) and a second front individual image (an individual image corresponding to the symbol sprite data PD27). Image)
The transparent value adjustment unit is configured to perform the common transparent value adjustment both when the partial display of the first near-side individual image is performed and when the partial display of the second near-side individual image is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the game data (partial α data PD30 to PD33) is applied.

  According to the feature B4, partial display can be performed for each of the first near-side individual image and the second near-side individual image while suppressing the storage capacity necessary for storing the transparency value adjustment data. it can.

Feature B5. The transparent value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of the unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the near side, and transparent value information is set in each unit adjustment area. And
The transparent value adjusting means applies the transparent value information included in each unit adjustment region of the transparent value adjustment data to the color information associated with the corresponding unit image data in the image data, thereby The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, wherein display is performed.

  According to the feature B5, when partial display is performed, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data is applied to the color information associated with the corresponding unit image data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complication of processing related to the application.

Feature B6. The image data setting means is configured to display an image based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and sets the image data in the setting storage means , Specifying the coordinate information in the setting storage means for a part of the unit image data included in the image data, and setting the image data at a position according to the coordinate information,
Further, the transparent value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to the large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the near side, and transparent value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Has been
The transparent value adjusting means applies the transparent value information included in each unit adjustment region of the transparent value adjustment data to the color information associated with the corresponding unit image data in the image data, thereby The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, wherein display is performed.

  According to the feature B6, when the image data is set in the setting storage unit, it is not necessary to specify the coordinate information for all the unit image data of the image data, so that the complexity of the processing configuration related to the specification can be suppressed.

  In this configuration, the transparent value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to the large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the near side, and transparent value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Data structure. As a result, even if the coordinate information is not individually specified for all the unit image data of the image data, the transparent value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparent value adjustment data is changed to the corresponding unit. The present invention can be applied to color information associated with image data.

Feature B7. The image data setting means is configured to display an image based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and sets the image data in the setting storage means , Specifying parameter information including coordinate information in the setting storage means of the image data, and setting the image data according to the identification result,
The transparent value adjusting unit is configured to set the image data according to the specified parameter information when image data corresponding to the individual image on the near side is set in the setting storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, wherein the transparent value adjustment data is applied to the image data at a previous timing.

  According to the feature B7, a predetermined parameter is applied to the image data to which the transparent value adjustment data is applied, and the application result data is set in the setting storage means. As a result, it is not necessary to specify the parameters for setting the transparent value adjustment data in the setting storage means, so that the processing load for specifying the parameters can be suppressed.

Feature B8. Identification information is individually set for each unit image data,
In the transparent value adjustment data, a combination of color information and transparent value information of unit image data in which the identification information is set is set in association with the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 to B4.

  According to the feature B8, the transparency value for partial display can be applied in accordance with setting color information for each unit image data.

  Feature B9. The transparent value adjusting means adjusts the transparent value so that the transparency of the contour portion of the region partially displayed in the individual image on the near side is higher than the adjacent portion on the inside thereof. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

  According to the feature B9, when the transparency value is adjusted to perform partial display, it is possible to reduce jaggies of the partially displayed image.

  Feature B10. The transparent value adjusting means switches the range in which the transparent value for displaying the overlapping portion of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side is set, thereby displaying the partial display area in the front individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B9, wherein the game machine makes a transition.

  According to the feature B10, it is possible to perform a display effect in which a region that is partially displayed in the front individual image changes by simply switching the applied transparency value.

Feature B11. Partition area control means (function to execute the process of step S1806 in the display CPU 72) for controlling the display means so that a partitioned area (partial display area PL5) in which a part of the display screen is partitioned is displayed. Prepared,
The individual image on the front side is an individual image used to be displayed in the partition area, and the individual image on the back side is an individual image used to be displayed in a surrounding area including the periphery of the partition area. Image
The transparent value adjusting means is configured to prevent the near-side individual image from protruding into the surrounding area when the near-side individual image is displayed so that a part of the boundary of the partition area is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein an individual image on the front side is partially displayed.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to perform a display effect in which an individual image is displayed within the range of the partition area only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B12. Character color change control means (character transition processing in VDP 76) that displays a plurality of character images arranged in a specific direction on the display screen and controls the display means so that the colors of the plurality of character images are sequentially changed. Function to execute)
The individual image on the near side is an individual image including the plurality of character images,
The individual image on the back side is an individual image that includes the plurality of character images and is set so that the color of each character image is different from the individual image on the near side,
The image data setting means is configured to display an image based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and has a display effect in which the color of the character image is sequentially changed. If performed, the image data corresponding to the front individual image is set before the image data corresponding to the back individual image,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics B1 to B10, wherein the transparent value adjusting unit is configured to partially display the individual image on the near side when the display effect is performed.

  According to the feature B12, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the color of the character image is sequentially changed only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B13. Pattern determining means (a function for executing the processing of step S403 in the display CPU 72) for determining display effect pattern information constituted by images for a plurality of update timings based on the establishment of a predetermined pattern determination condition;
Deriving means for deriving parameter information when using image data corresponding to the individual image displayed at each update timing based on referring to the determined display effect pattern information (function for executing task processing in the display CPU 72) )When,
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the image data setting unit sets the image data in a state where the parameter information derived by the deriving unit is applied. .

  According to the feature B13, the parameter information of the image data corresponding to each update timing is derived based on referring to the previously determined display effect pattern information, and the setting of the image data is performed with the parameter information applied. By doing so, in the configuration in which images for each update timing are displayed, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as described in the feature B1 and the like.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature B group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying characters and characters. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying characters and characters in front of the background is created in a storage means such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters or characters are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, for example, when displaying an image as if the character or character is moving in a predetermined manner in front of the background, each time the display device is updated, the coordinates corresponding to the predetermined movement or Drawing data in which the character or character data is set in a form is created.

  Here, as a display effect in the display device, the inventor makes a transition from a state in which the entire character or character is displayed to a state in which only a part is displayed in the process of movement of the character or character. I came up with a display effect.

  However, it is not preferable that the capacity of the image data memory is extremely increased in order to perform the display effect, and it is necessary to be able to perform the display effect while suppressing the increase in the capacity to some extent. .

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features B1 to B13, the features A1 to A17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features C′1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. -F15, the following features G1-G9, the following features G'1-G'2, the following features H1-H11, the following features I1-I10, the following features J1-J13, the following features K1-K9, and the following features L1-L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
An image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in predetermined setting storage means (frame regions 82a and 82b), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the contents of the image;
In gaming machines equipped with
In the display storage means, a plurality of divided image data (divided part data PD2 to PD10, divided data groups PD12 to PD15) are stored in advance.
The display control means sets the plurality of divided image data to be set in the setting storage means according to a predetermined relative position, so that the same type of display mode corresponds to each divided image data. Set setting means for displaying a series of images that straddle the boundaries of the individual images for division (a function for executing arithmetic processing for scroll background in the display CPU 72 or a function for executing arithmetic processing for displacement background in the display CPU 72; A gaming machine having a function of executing setting processing of divided parts data in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature C1, image data for displaying a series of images is divided and stored as a plurality of divided image data. As a result, the data unit when individually setting the setting storage means can be reduced, and the processing load for handling single image data can be reduced.

  Feature C2. When the first divided image data (divided part data PD5) and the second divided image data (divided part data PD6) that are adjacent to each other are set in the setting storage unit, The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein an overlapping area (overlapping area PA1) of both data is generated over the entire boundary portion of the divided image data.

  According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which each divided image data is individually set in the setting storage unit, for example, there is a concern that a gap may be generated between the two data depending on the individual size adjustment of each divided image data. Is done. On the other hand, since both data are set in the setting storage unit so that an overlapping area is generated, the above-described gap is not generated, and the effect of storing each divided image data is good. Can be demonstrated.

  Feature C3. The game according to Feature C2, wherein color information that is the same as each other is associated with a portion constituting the overlap area in the first divided image data and the second divided image data. Machine.

  According to the feature C3, since the same color information is associated with the portions constituting the overlapping area in both divided image data, for example, the same magnification is applied to each divided image data. Even if the size adjustment is performed individually and the width of the overlapping region is slightly shifted, it is expected that the color information to be displayed as the overlapping region is reflected in the shifted portion. Therefore, even if each divided image data is an image obtained as a result of being individually set in the setting storage unit, a good display mode can be obtained.

Feature C4. The image data has many unit image data associated with color information,
The gaming machine according to Feature C2 or C3, wherein the overlapping area is configured by unit image data for one column in each of the first divided image data and the second divided image data. .

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to achieve an effect that each divided image data is set so that the overlapping area is generated while suppressing the data capacity allocated to generate the overlapping area as much as possible.

  Feature C5. When each of the divided image data is set on a predetermined scale, the series of images formed thereby is created so as to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing among the update timings to be set at the predetermined scale, a division size such that a part of each of the divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein

  According to the feature C5, since the series of images generated by setting all the divided image data is configured to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen, the image can be set in a range exceeding the size of the display screen. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that this is being done, and to increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, at least at a specific update timing, a part of each divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the divided image data that is not included in the predetermined range from being set in the setting storage unit at the specific update timing, and the processing is compared with the configuration in which all the divided image data are always set. The load can be reduced.

Feature C6. The image data has many unit image data associated with color information,
When setting the image data in the setting storage unit, the display control unit performs color rendering information on the unit image data by executing a predetermined drawing process on each unit image data of the image data. Even when the unit image data of the image data set as the setting storage unit is set in the setting storage unit and protrudes from the setting storage unit, the color information of the unit image data is Although not set in the setting storage unit, the drawing process is executed.
When each of the divided image data is set on a predetermined scale, the series of images formed thereby is created so as to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing among the update timings to be set at the predetermined scale, a division size such that a part of each of the divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein

  According to the feature C6, when the display control means sets the image data in the setting storage means, even if the image data includes unit image data that protrudes from the setting storage means, On the other hand, the same drawing process is executed. As a result, the display control unit does not need to execute a dedicated process for the unit image data protruding from the setting storage unit.

  In addition, the series of images generated by setting all the divided image data is configured to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen, so that the image is set in a range exceeding the size of the display screen. Can be recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the image can be increased. However, in the configuration in which the same drawing process is executed for the unit image data protruding from the setting storage unit as described above, the image data forming the series of images is provided as a single image. In such a case, the frequency of wastefully executing the drawing process increases, and the processing load increases.

  On the other hand, at least at a specific update timing, a part of each divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the divided image data that is not included in the predetermined range from being set in the setting storage unit at the specific update timing, and the processing is compared with the configuration in which all the divided image data are always set. The load can be reduced.

Feature C7. The set setting means includes:
A division image grasping means (a function for executing a calculation process for scroll background in the display CPU 72) for grasping a part of the divided image data included in the predetermined range to be updated among the divided image data;
Division image setting means (a function for executing division part data setting processing in the VDP 76) for setting the divided image data grasped by the division image grasping means in the setting storage means;
A gaming machine according to Feature C5 or C6, wherein

  According to the feature C7, at least at a specific update timing, the divided image data not included in the predetermined range is not set in the setting storage unit. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which all divided image data is always set.

Feature C8. Parameter information specifying means (function for executing scroll background calculation processing in the display CPU 72) for specifying parameter information including information on coordinates in the setting storage means of the image data;
The display control unit is configured to set the image data in the setting storage unit in a state in which parameter information according to the identification result of the parameter information identification unit is applied.
When the parameter information specifying unit specifies the parameter information for image data constituting an image for the predetermined range corresponding to at least the specific update timing, the parameter information specifying unit also includes a partial region in the image for the predetermined range. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7, wherein the parameter information is not specified for the divided image data corresponding to the divided individual images.

  According to the feature C8, the parameter information is not specified for the divided image data not included in the predetermined range at least at a specific update timing. As a result, the processing load can be reduced compared to a configuration in which parameter information is always specified for all divided image data.

  Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the series of images are images that are scroll-displayed in a predetermined direction over an image display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings.

  According to the feature C9, a series of images can be scroll-displayed, and the scroll display can be favorably performed by including the configuration of the feature C1 and the like.

Feature C10. The divided image data is created so that each individual image for division includes a plurality of unit images, and the display mode of the plurality of unit images changes sequentially over a plurality of update timings. A plurality of the divided image data are provided corresponding to each division position so that display can be performed,
In each division position where the individual images for division are displayed side by side, the setting storage unit is set so that the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes over a display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, further comprising image switching means (a function for executing arithmetic processing for displacement background in the display CPU 72) for switching each divided image data.

  According to the feature C10, display of a plurality of unit images is controlled collectively in units of divided image data, instead of individually setting image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images in the setting storage unit. Thus, a display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images change sequentially can be performed. Thereby, in addition to the excellent effect as described in the feature C1, a display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images sequentially change can be executed while reducing the processing load.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. ing. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, a large-size image has a large capacity of image data. For example, a background image that is scroll-displayed and only a part of the area is displayed on the display screen for each frame is a character image that is displayed on the display screen as a whole in an initially set size. The capacity of image data is larger than

  In this case, depending on the capacity, it is assumed that the image data cannot be stored in advance in the image data memory as one unit of image data. Even if the data can be stored, if there are many areas that are not actually displayed on the display screen, the amount of calculation for display per frame increases, and the processing load increases. On the other hand, for a large image as described above, a configuration in which the image data at the initial setting is always enlarged and displayed is conceivable. However, this causes a reduction in image quality.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features C1 to C10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the following features C′1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. -F15, the following features G1-G9, the following features G'1-G'2, the following features H1-H11, the following features I1-I10, the following features J1-J13, the following features K1-K9, and the following features L1-L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature C '>
Feature C′1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
An image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in predetermined setting storage means (frame regions 82a and 82b), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the contents of the image;
In gaming machines equipped with
The display storage unit stores in advance aggregated image data (divided data groups PD12 to PD15) used for displaying a plurality of unit images together, and a plurality of display modes of the plurality of unit images. A plurality of the aggregate image data are stored so that a display that sequentially changes over the update timing is stored,
Further, aggregated image switching means (displacement in the display CPU 72) for switching aggregated image data set in the setting storage means so that the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes over a display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings. A gaming machine comprising a function for executing background arithmetic processing).

  According to the feature C′1, image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images is not individually set in the setting storage unit, but the display of the plurality of unit images is collectively performed in units of divided image data. By controlling, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images change sequentially. Thereby, the display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images change sequentially can be executed while reducing the processing load.

  The invention according to the feature C′1 is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. ing. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, the processing load for each frame increases as the number of unit images included in the image for one frame increases. On the other hand, if the number of unit images included in an image for one frame is decreased, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the image may decrease.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one configuration of the feature C′1, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following feature F1. -F15, the following features G1-G9, the following features G'1-G'2, the following features H1-H11, the following features I1-I10, the following features J1-J13, the following features K1-K9, and the following features L1-L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In gaming machines equipped with
As image data of an individual image for operation (smoothly moving sprite CH5) displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction, the at least a part is moved by less than 1 dot in the specific direction. A configuration capable of acquiring a plurality of corresponding operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49),
The display control means, when at least a part of the individual operation image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, displays the operation image data used for displaying the individual operation image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching means (a function for executing smooth movement calculation processing in the display CPU 72 and a function for executing smooth movement setting processing in the VDP 76) that sequentially switches over the image update timing. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D1, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to a state of moving by less than one dot is sequentially switched as a use target so that at least a part of the operation individual image moves in a specific direction. Displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the image so as to move in units of less than one dot, and the movement of the individual image for operation can be facilitated.

Feature D2. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In gaming machines equipped with
The display storage means has at least a part of 1 in the specific direction as image data of an individual image for operation (smoothly moving sprite CH5) displayed so that at least a part thereof moves in a specific direction. A plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to the state of moving by less than a dot is stored,
The display control means, when at least a part of the individual operation image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, displays the operation image data used for displaying the individual operation image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching means (a function for executing smooth movement calculation processing in the display CPU 72 and a function for executing smooth movement setting processing in the VDP 76) that sequentially switches over the image update timing. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D2, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to the state of moving by less than one dot is sequentially switched as a use target so that at least a part of the operation individual image moves in a specific direction. Displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the image so as to move in units of less than one dot, and the movement of the individual image for operation can be facilitated.

  Further, in this configuration, it is only necessary to sequentially switch a plurality of operation image data used for displaying the operation individual images, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize smooth movement of the individual images for operation.

Feature D3. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
The image data is set in setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen,
In gaming machines equipped with
As image data of an individual image for operation (smoothly moving sprite CH5) displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction, the at least a part is more than the unit setting area that is one in the specific direction. It is a configuration capable of acquiring a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to a state where they have moved by a small size,
The display control means, when at least a part of the individual operation image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, displays the operation image data used for displaying the individual operation image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching means (a function for executing smooth movement calculation processing in the display CPU 72 and a function for executing smooth movement setting processing in the VDP 76) that sequentially switches over the image update timing. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D3, at least one of the individual images for operation can be obtained by sequentially switching a plurality of pieces of operation image data corresponding to the states moved relative to each other by a size smaller than one unit setting area. The part is displayed as moving in a specific direction. Accordingly, it is possible to display the image so as to move in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the individual image for operation.

Feature D4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
The image data is set in setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen,
In gaming machines equipped with
The display storage means includes at least a part of the display data as image data of an individual image for operation (smoothly moving sprite CH5) displayed so that at least a part thereof moves in a specific direction. A plurality of image data for operation (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to a state in which they have moved relative to each other by a size smaller than the unit setting area,
The display control means, when at least a part of the individual operation image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, displays the operation image data used for displaying the individual operation image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching means (a function for executing smooth movement calculation processing in the display CPU 72 and a function for executing smooth movement setting processing in the VDP 76) that sequentially switches over the image update timing. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D4, at least one of the individual images for operation is obtained by sequentially switching a plurality of pieces of operation image data corresponding to the states moved relative to each other by a size smaller than one unit setting area. The part is displayed so as to move in a specific direction. Accordingly, it is possible to display the image so as to move in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the individual image for operation.

  Further, in this configuration, it is only necessary to sequentially switch a plurality of operation image data used for displaying the operation individual images, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize smooth movement of the individual images for operation.

Feature D5. The display control means is coordinate information determination means (steps S2405 and S2411 in the display CPU 72) for determining coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means. A function of executing the processing of S2416)
When the operation image data used for displaying the individual image for operation is sequentially switched over a plurality of specific update timings, the coordinate information determination unit is configured for all of the operation image data. The gaming machine according to Feature D3 or D4, wherein information of the same coordinate is applied.

  According to the feature D5, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to a state in which they have moved relative to each other by a size smaller than one unit setting area are sequentially set with respect to the same coordinates. It is possible to display the operation individual images as if they are moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the operation individual images.

Feature D6. The display control means is coordinate information determination means (steps S2405 and S2411 in the display CPU 72) for determining coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means. A function of executing the processing of S2416)
The coordinate information determination unit updates the next coordinate information after the same coordinate information is applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, and the next coordinate information before the update. The gaming machine according to the feature D3 or D4, wherein the game machine is updated so as to become information of coordinates shifted to a side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction by one unit setting area from the coordinates.

  According to the feature D6, a plurality of pieces of operation image data corresponding to a state in which they have moved relative to each other by a size smaller than one unit setting area are sequentially set with respect to the same coordinates. It is possible to display the operation individual images as if they are moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the operation individual images.

  Further, after the same coordinate information is applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, the next coordinate information is updated, and in the next coordinate information, the first coordinate is updated from the coordinates before the update. The unit setting area is updated so as to be coordinate information shifted to the side corresponding to the movement in a specific direction. As a result, the state in which the individual operation images are moving in units corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area is repeated. Therefore, it becomes possible to smooth the movement of the individual image for operation.

Feature D7. The display control means is to update the content of the image at a predetermined update timing,
The operation image switching means is configured to display the plurality of operation image data when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction over a display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings. The game machine according to any one of features D3 to D6, characterized in that is repeatedly set in a predetermined order with respect to the setting storage means.

  According to the feature D7, the processing image data set for the setting storage unit may be repeatedly switched in a predetermined order, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Feature D8. The plurality of operation image data may be set such that at least a part of the specific image is specified by changing a transparency value indicating a transmission ratio of image data overlapping on a back side in a portion constituting an edge portion of a corresponding operation individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D7, wherein the gaming machine corresponds to a state in which the unit moves in a direction smaller than the unit setting area.

  According to the feature D8, for a plurality of operations corresponding to a state in which they move relative to each other by a size smaller than one unit setting area by a simple method of differentiating the transparency values of the portions constituting the edge portion Image data can be provided.

  Feature D9. The plurality of operation image data are stored in advance in the display storage unit, and the first operation image data (first sprite data PD48) and the first operation image data are more than the first operation image data. And at least a portion of the second operation image data (second sprite data PD49) corresponding to a state in which the image is moved by a size smaller than one unit setting area in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D8.

  According to the feature D9, only the first operation image data and the second operation image data are stored in advance in the display storage unit as the operation image data for smoothing the movement of the operation individual images. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the storage capacity necessary for storing the operation image data in the display storage unit.

  Feature D10. The second operation image data corresponds to a state in which the at least part of the second operation image data is moved in the specific direction by half or substantially half the size of the unit setting area. The gaming machine according to Feature D9, wherein:

  According to the feature D10, when the setting target in the setting storage unit is switched from the first operation image data to the second operation image data, and from the second operation image data to the first operation. The movement amount of the individual operation image can be made the same or substantially the same when switched to the image data for operation.

  Note that the configuration limited by any one of the features D5 to D10 may be applied to the feature D1 or D2. In this case, the configuration defined on the basis of “one unit setting area” may be applied as a configuration defined on the basis of “one dot”.

  The invention of the feature group D is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. ing. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, for example, when displaying an image as if a character or the like is moving in a predetermined manner in front of the background, every time the display device is updated, the coordinates or form corresponding to the predetermined movement are used. Thus, drawing data in which data such as the character is set is created. Each time drawing data is created, a new signal is output to the display device, and the image on the display screen is updated so that the character or the like moves in a predetermined manner.

  Here, on a display screen configured by arranging a large number of dots, for example, when trying to move a character or the like in a predetermined direction, the minimum movement unit that can be set at one update timing is limited to one dot. The If it does so, even if it is going to move a character etc. smoothly to a predetermined direction, a restriction will arise. The same applies to a case where a character or the like is to perform a predetermined action. In order to solve this problem, a measure to increase the number of dots included in the unit area can be considered. However, as the number of dots increases, the cost of the display device increases.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. -F15, the following features G1-G9, the following features G'1-G'2, the following features H1-H11, the following features I1-I10, the following features J1-J13, the following features K1-K9, and the following features L1-L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 133) for storing image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame regions 142a and 142b), drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display screen,
In gaming machines equipped with
The display control means includes
For a plurality of individual images displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, depth information determining means for determining information in the depth direction of the image data corresponding to each individual image (processing of steps S3803 to S3805 in the display CPU 131) Function to execute)
The image data corresponding to each individual image is set in the setting storage unit by applying the information in the depth direction determined by the depth information determination unit, so that each individual image is displayed in the depth direction on the display screen. Image data setting means (a function for executing hidden surface processing using a Z buffer in the VDP 135) to be displayed so as to overlap
The partial display of the specific individual image is performed by determining that the information in the depth direction applied to a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image is information for partial display. Partial display setting means (function for executing masking arithmetic processing in the display CPU 131),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, the partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the information in the depth direction of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to prepare image data for partial display and image data for full display separately, so that the storage capacity of the display storage means can be reduced.

  Feature E2. The partial display setting means switches a range in which partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching a range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the partial display information in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, which is characterized.

  According to the feature E2, a range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image is switched using a single specific image data. Thereby, it is possible to perform a display effect of switching a range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage unit.

  Feature E3. The partial display setting means displays the specific individual image for a plurality of update timings by stepwise switching a range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the partial display information in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, wherein the gaming machine is gradually erased or gradually appears over a period of time.

  According to the feature E3, since the display effect in which a specific individual image is gradually erased or gradually appears over a display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings, the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of a specific individual image increases according to the number of update timings in the process of gradually erasing or gradually appearing. The display mode is switched in the depth direction of the specific image data. It is not necessary to prepare specific image data corresponding to each display mode. Therefore, the display effect as described above can be performed while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

Feature E4. The image data of the object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the image data is projected on the projection plane set based on the line of sight from the given viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and is projected on the projection plane. Storage means (frame regions 142a, 142b) for storing generated data (drawing data) generated based on the acquired data;
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes
Arranging means for arranging the image data of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3904 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the process of step S3905 in the VDP 135);
Distance information determining means for determining distance information corresponding to the relative distance from the viewpoint in the direction in which the viewpoint is facing (a function of executing the processing of steps S3803 to S3805 in the display CPU 131);
The generation data is generated using projection data created by projecting the image data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and a plurality of the image data are arranged in a direction in which the viewpoint faces. In this case, the distance information is compared in each lined-up portion, and drawing setting means (priority surface processing using a Z buffer in the VDP 135 is executed to preferentially reflect the portion having the shorter relative distance in the generated data. Function)
By making the distance information determined by the distance information determining means for a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image to be information for partial display, Partial display setting means for performing partial display (function for executing masking arithmetic processing in the display CPU 131);
A game machine characterized by displaying the image generated by the above-mentioned display means.

  According to the feature E4, partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the distance information of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to prepare image data for partial display and image data for full display separately, so that the storage capacity can be reduced. In particular, according to the present configuration, the above-described excellent effect can be achieved by using a hidden surface erasing configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

  Feature E5. The partial display setting unit is configured to switch a range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching a range in which the distance information is determined as the partial display information in the specific image data. The game machine according to Feature E4, wherein the game machine generates data.

  According to the feature E5, the range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image is switched using a single specific image data. As a result, it is possible to perform a display effect of switching the range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image while suppressing the storage capacity.

  Feature E6. The partial display setting means switches the specific individual image in a display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings by gradually switching a range in which the distance information is determined as the partial display information in the specific image data. The game machine according to the feature E4 or E5, characterized in that the generation data is generated so as to be gradually erased or gradually appear.

  According to the feature E6, since a display effect in which a specific individual image is gradually erased or gradually appears over a display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings, the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of a specific individual image increases according to the number of update timings in the process of gradually erasing or gradually appearing. The display mode is switched in the depth direction of the specific image data. It is not necessary to prepare specific image data corresponding to each display mode. Therefore, the above display effect can be performed while suppressing the storage capacity.

  Feature E7. The information for partial display is set as distance information corresponding to the fact that the relative distance is longer than the back image data constituting the back image, according to any one of features E4 to E6, Gaming machine.

  Since the back image is an image that always forms the back surface, it is an absolute reference for the position in the depth direction. In this case, according to the feature E7, the partial display information is set as the distance information corresponding to the fact that the relative distance is farther than the back image data, so that the partial display of the specific individual image is performed. In this case, the processing load related to the setting of partial display information can be reduced.

Feature E8. The display screen of the display means is configured with a large number of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and the generated data includes a large number of unit generated data,
The display control unit outputs an image signal corresponding to each unit generation data in the generation data to the display unit, so that an image output corresponding to each unit generation data is output to each dot corresponding to each unit generation data. Is to be done,
The distance information determining means determines the distance information corresponding to each of a large number of unit image data constituting the image data,
Further, when generating the generation data, the comparison data has a large number of comparison areas corresponding to the large number of unit generation data, and distance information referred to in the drawing setting means is stored in each comparison area. Storage means (Z buffer 143) is used,
The drawing setting means includes:
When a plurality of the image data are arranged in the direction in which the viewpoint faces, the distance information is individually compared with each of the unit generation data, and
When performing the individual comparison, if the distance information referenced at a later timing is closer than the distance information previously referenced and stored in the corresponding comparison area, The distance information referenced at the timing is overwritten in the comparison area, and the unit image data for which the distance information is determined is reflected in the unit generation data corresponding to the comparison area. The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7.

  According to the feature E8, an excellent effect as described in the feature E4 and the like can be obtained by using the configuration of hidden surface removal by using the comparison storage unit.

  The feature E group invention is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a texture-attached polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

  Here, when the individual image such as a character or a character that appears individually is made to appear on the display screen or is erased, the inventor makes a partial display and partial display of the individual image. I came up with a display effect to switch between displays.

  However, if a plurality of types of image data are required for the same type of individual image in order to perform the display effect, the switching mode between the overall display and the partial display becomes multi-stage. The number of types of image data stored in advance increases. This is not preferable because the necessary storage capacity of the image data memory increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the display of a three-dimensional image, and similarly occurs when a two-dimensional image is displayed.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features E1 to E8, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the following features F1. -F15, the following features G1-G9, the following features G'1-G'2, the following features H1-H11, the following features I1-I10, the following features J1-J13, the following features K1-K9, and the following features L1-L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory modules 74 and 133) for storing image data in advance;
Based on the setting of the image data in predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b and frame areas 142a and 142b), an image is displayed on the display screen and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display CPU 72, 131, VDP 76, 135) for updating the content of the image,
In gaming machines equipped with
The display storage means stores in advance a plurality of types of image data corresponding to different individual images,
The display control means includes
Grouping means for grouping a plurality of types of image data (a function for executing the process of step S1705 in the VDP 76, a function for executing the process of step S2306 in the VDP 76, and a function of executing the process of step S4704 in the VDP 135);
Grouped data setting means for setting the grouped data formed by grouping in the setting storage means (function for executing the process of step S1706 in VDP76, function for executing the process of step S505 in VDP76, The function of executing the process of step S4705),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of image data as a single data by grouping a plurality of types of image data. As a result, the processing load can be reduced compared to a configuration in which image data is always handled individually. Further, since the plurality of types of image data are individually stored in the display storage means, the image data can be handled independently. This makes it possible to handle image data flexibly. Furthermore, the storage capacity required for the display storage unit can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which data obtained by grouping the plurality of types of image data is stored in advance in the display storage unit.

  As described above, when a plurality of individual images are displayed at the same time, it is possible to reduce the processing load for performing the display.

Feature F2. A storage area for grouping (synthetic data area 81c, mode buffer 145) for storing the grouped data grouped by the grouping means;
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means.

  According to the feature F2, the grouping data is stored in the grouping storage area, and is read from the grouping storage area and set in the setting storage unit as necessary. Thereby, grouped data can be used over a plurality of update timings.

  Feature F3. The grouping unit performs grouping on the plurality of types of image data when a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are set to the setting storage unit, and after the grouping, The game machine according to Feature F2, wherein image data is stored as the grouped data in the grouping storage area.

  According to the feature F3, when a plurality of types of image data to be grouped becomes a setting target in the setting storage unit, the plurality of types of image data are grouped to obtain grouped data. Stored in the grouping storage area. This eliminates the need to set the processing timing for grouping independently.

Feature F4. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of update timings, the first display effect and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen are increased from the first display effect, or the setting storage unit And a second display effect in which an individual image is displayed in which the processing load of the display control means when setting image data is larger than the individual image displayed in the first display effect. ,
The grouping means performs the grouping in a period in which a process for displaying an image at an update timing included in the first display effect is performed, and the grouped data is converted into the grouped data. Is stored in the grouping storage area as
The grouping data setting means stores the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in a period in which processing for displaying an image at an update timing included in the second display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to F2 or F3, wherein the gaming machine is set in the setting storage unit.

  According to feature F4, grouped data is created in a situation where the processing load on the display control means is relatively small, and the grouped data is used in a situation where the processing load on the display control means is relatively large. Thereby, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed using the grouped data.

Feature F5. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of update timings, a first display effect and a second display that increases the processing load of the display control means when setting the image data in the setting storage means Production and are set,
The grouping means performs the grouping in a period in which a process for displaying an image at an update timing included in the first display effect is performed, and the grouped data is converted into the grouped data. Is stored in the grouping storage area as
The grouping data setting means stores the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in a period in which processing for displaying an image at an update timing included in the second display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to F2 or F3, wherein the gaming machine is set in the setting storage unit.

  According to feature F5, grouped data is created in a situation where the processing load on the display control means is relatively small, and the grouped data is used in a situation where the processing load on the display control means is relatively large. Thereby, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed using the grouped data.

Feature F6. The display control means sets the image data to create drawing data in the setting storage means and outputs an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means based on a predetermined value on the display screen. It is a configuration that displays images for a range,
The image for the predetermined range at least at the start timing in the second display effect includes a plurality of types of common individual images displayed in the image for the predetermined range at the end timing in the first display effect. And
When the drawing data corresponding to the end timing is created based on the fact that the image data corresponding to each of the common individual images is set in the setting storage unit, the grouping unit generates the common individual images. Grouping image data corresponding to images and storing them in the grouping storage area as the grouped data;
The grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means when the drawing data corresponding to the start timing is created. The gaming machine described in the feature F4 or F5.

  According to the feature F6, even when a plurality of types of common individual images are displayed using the grouping data at the start timing in the second display effect, the grouping data is based on the end timing in the first display effect. Therefore, the display between both timings corresponds. Thereby, while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable, an excellent effect as described above can be achieved.

  Feature F7. The gaming machine according to Feature F6, wherein the plurality of types of common individual images are individual images forming a background image.

  According to the feature F7, since the grouped data is applied to the background image, even if a common individual image used at different update timings is displayed, it becomes inconspicuous and the player feels uncomfortable. As described above, the excellent effects as described above can be achieved.

Feature F8. The display control means creates the drawing data in the setting storage means by setting the image data, and outputs an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means based on the image on the display screen. Is displayed, and
A plurality of types of display modes in which display modes of images on the display screen are different from each other are set,
An operation accepting means (production operation device 48) for accepting an operation by the player;
A display mode switching means (a function for executing an operation generation command corresponding process in the display CPU 131) for sequentially switching the display modes based on the reception of the operation by the operation receiving means;
With
The grouping means includes the group for a plurality of types of image data used to display an image corresponding to one update timing included in the display mode for at least a specific display mode among the plurality of types of display modes. And storing the grouped image data in the group storage area as the grouped data,
The grouping data setting means is stored in the grouping storage area when the drawing data corresponding to the update timing immediately after the switching is created when the mode is switched to the specific display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F7, wherein the grouped data corresponding to the specific display mode is set in the setting storage means.

  According to the feature F8, since a plurality of types of display modes in which display modes of images on the display screen are different from each other are set, the display modes can be diversified. In this case, grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is created, and when the drawing data corresponding to the update timing immediately after the switching is created when switching to the specific display mode, the grouping is performed. Data is used. Thereby, even if switching to the specific display mode is performed at an arbitrary timing based on an operation at an arbitrary timing on the operation receiving means, the processing load at that time can be reduced.

Feature F9. In each of the multiple types of display modes, a display effect is set in which the individual image for variation is variably displayed in front of the background image over a period corresponding to a plurality of update timings.
The plurality of display modes are set so that at least the types of the background images are different from each other,
The gaming machine according to Feature F8, wherein the grouped data corresponding to the specific display mode is a group of a plurality of types of image data for displaying a background image of the specific display mode.

  According to the feature F9, even when switching to the specific display mode is performed at an arbitrary timing based on an operation at an arbitrary timing to the operation receiving unit, the grouped data is used for the background image. Processing load can be reduced. In addition, even when switching to the specific display mode occurs in the situation where the variation display of the variation individual image is performed, the grouped data corresponds to the background image as described above. While maintaining the display, only the background image can be switched while suppressing the processing load.

Feature F10. The plurality of display modes are set so that at least the types of the background images are different from each other, and the types of the individual images for variation are also different from each other.
Further, in the variation display mode of the individual image for variation, after the individual image for variation is variably displayed in a low identification mode that is relatively difficult to identify, the individual image for variation is relatively easily identified. The mode that is displayed in a variable manner is included,
In the case where the individual image for variation is switched to the specific display mode in a state where the individual image for variation is variably displayed in the low identification mode, and the drawing data corresponding to the update timing immediately after the switching is created, Adjustment means immediately after mode switching that causes the setting storage means to set the grouped data corresponding to the specific display mode stored in the grouping storage area without changing the type of the individual image for change ( The gaming machine according to F9, wherein the display CPU 131 has a function of executing arithmetic processing for display mode background and arithmetic processing for symbols.

  According to the feature F10, when switching to the specific display mode in a situation where the variation individual image is variably displayed in the low identification mode, the grouped data is used for the background image, and the variation individual image is used until then. The data set in the display mode is used. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the mode is switched to the specific display mode. In addition, in the situation where the individual image for variation is displayed in a variable manner in the low identification mode, the individual image for variation is low, so the type of individual image for variation is switched to one corresponding to the specific display mode as described above. Even if not, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature F11. When displayed on the display screen, the individual image includes an effect image that is displayed in a state in which the color information of the individual images that overlap on the back side is reflected,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the plurality of types of image data grouped by the grouping means include image data corresponding to the effect image.

  According to the feature F11, a plurality of types of effect images can be used individually, and a plurality of types of effect images can be used in a grouped state.

Feature F12. When grouping the plurality of types of image data, the grouping means performs grouping by performing the grouping using a part of the plurality of types of image data as reference image data and the rest as subordinate image data. Create
When the grouped data setting unit sets the grouped data in the setting storage unit, the parameter information specified for the reference image data is the reference image data and the subordinate image subordinate thereto. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11, wherein the gaming machine is set in the setting storage unit in a state of being applied to data.

  According to the feature F12, when multiple types of image data are handled, if parameter information is set in the reference image data, it is also applied to the dependent image data, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F13. The display storage means includes a plurality of types of front image data (image data PD39 to PD42) used for displaying a front image included in an image corresponding to one update timing, and the one update timing. A plurality of types of rear image data (image data PD43 to PD45) used for displaying a rear image included in an image corresponding to an update timing later than the first image,
The grouping means creates grouped data by grouping the plurality of types of front-side image data,
The grouped data setting means includes
The plurality of types of rear image data are set in the setting storage means, and the grouped data to which parameter information is applied so that a part of the front image is not displayed Overlap setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2305 in the VDP 76) to set the image data to overlap before the side image data;
Switching means (function for executing the process of step S2308 in the VDP 76) for performing the setting by the overlap setting means so that the non-display range is widened over a display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, comprising:

  According to the feature F13, it is possible to perform a wipe effect while reducing the processing load.

Feature F14. The display control means includes
Setting object grasping means (function for executing the processing of step S1702 in the VDP 76) for grasping image data to be set in the setting storage means;
With respect to the image data grasped by the setting object grasping means, derivation means for deriving parameter information for determining a setting mode when the image data is set in the setting storage means (the process of step S1603 in the display CPU 72 is executed). Function)
Image data setting means for setting the image data grasped by the setting object grasping means in the setting storage means in a state where the parameter information derived by the deriving means is applied (function for executing the processing of step S505 in the VDP 76) )When,
With
The game according to any one of features F1 to F13, wherein the grouping unit groups a plurality of types of image data to which the parameter information derived by the deriving unit is applied. Machine.

  According to the feature F14, since parameter information has already been applied to a plurality of types of image data in a grouped state, when using grouped data, the plurality of types of image data included therein are individually There is no need to apply parameter information. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F15. The image data includes image data of an object that is three-dimensional information for displaying an image,
The display control means includes
Arrangement means for arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3904 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the process of step S3905 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for setting the drawing data in the setting storage means using the projection data created by projecting the image data onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint (step S3910 in the VDP 135) The function of executing the processing of S3913),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14, wherein the grouping means groups data after the plurality of types of image data are projected onto the projection plane.

  According to the feature F15, when using grouped data, it is not necessary to perform geometry calculation or rendering for a plurality of types of image data included in the grouped data. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced.

  The feature F group invention is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a texture-attached polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

  Here, the image displayed on the display screen is updated at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created and the display device is updated in time for the update cycle. Signal output needs to be performed. For example, in a configuration in which only one frame buffer for creating drawing data is set for the VRAM, drawing data is created within the range of one update cycle and a signal output based on the drawing data is output. It needs to be completed. For example, in a configuration in which a plurality of frame buffers are set, in response to a signal output based on drawing data created in one frame buffer, it corresponds to the next update cycle for other frame buffers. It is necessary to create drawing data.

  In any of the above configurations, in order to display individually defined individual images on the display screen at the same time, the coordinates and size are specified for each individual image, and all of the individual images are drawn in the frame buffer. If it is necessary to do this, the processing load required to create drawing data for one frame increases. Then, if the processing load exceeds the update cycle, processing failure occurs.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features F1 to F15, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G′1 to G′2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Arranging means for arranging the image data of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3904 in the VDP 135) and viewpoint setting means for setting the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (step S3905 in the VDP 135) And a setting unit for drawing (in the VDP 135) that projects the image data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generates generation data based on the data projected onto the projection plane. A function for executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3913), and storage means (frame regions 142a and 142b) for storing the generated data (drawing data) generated by
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In gaming machines equipped with
The object includes a connected object having a plurality of partial objects so as to sandwich a predetermined connecting part therebetween and capable of displacing the relative position of the partial objects with reference to the connecting part. ,
The connected objects used when displaying the same type of special characters include a plurality of types of special connected objects (connected objects PC35 and PC36) having different positions where the connecting parts are set,
The display control means is a connected object switching means (step S4807, step S4816, step S4823 in the display CPU 131) for switching the connected object used when displaying the special character to one of the plurality of types of special connected objects. A game machine that displays on the display means an image corresponding to the generated data generated by using the function of executing the process (1).

  According to the feature G1, any one of a plurality of types of special connected objects is used to display the same type of special character. These plural types of special connected objects have different positions where the connecting portions are set. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the special connection object alone compared to a configuration in which a single special connection object in which these connection parts are set together is provided, and reading of one special connection object is possible. Can be performed satisfactorily. In addition, by providing a plurality of types of special connection objects as described above at the development stage of the gaming machine, it becomes easier to adjust the movement of the special character when developing the gaming machine.

  As described above, it is possible to handle the connected object satisfactorily.

Feature G2. The plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36).
The connected object switching means is configured to switch an object for displaying the special character from the first connected object to the second connected object at a specific display switching timing.
In the situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character, the arranging means arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space. In addition, there is provided overlapping arrangement means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4902 and S4903 in the VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, characterized by:

  According to the feature G2, when the specific display switching timing is reached, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing before a specific display switching timing. Thereby, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the placement of the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the second connected object that has already been placed is updated. Just do it. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which both the arrangement process and the update process of the second connected object are performed at the specific display switching timing.

Feature G3. Parameter update means for updating the parameter information including at least the coordinates and angle information of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in order to change the display content of the image (processing in steps S4905, S4913, and S4919 in the VDP 135) Is used when generating the generated data,
The processing load for updating the parameter information of the object is smaller than the processing load when starting the placement of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space,
Further, the plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36).
The connected object switching means is configured to switch an object for displaying the special character from the first connected object to the second connected object at a specific display switching timing.
In the situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character, the arranging means arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space. In addition, there is provided overlapping arrangement means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4902 and S4903 in the VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, characterized by:

  According to the feature G3, when the specific display switching timing is reached, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing before a specific display switching timing. Thereby, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the placement of the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the second connected object that has already been placed is updated. Just do it. Therefore, the processing load at a specific display switching timing can be reduced.

  Feature G4. The parameter updating means is a situation where both the first connected object and the second connected object are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the first update object at a timing before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to Feature G3, wherein not only a connected object but also parameter information of the second connected object is updated.

  According to the feature G4, not only the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing, but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated. As a result, when the specific display switching timing is reached, the parameter information that has been updated so far can be used, and the processing load at that timing can be reduced.

Feature G5. Deriving means for deriving the parameter information of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the display content of the image to be updated (function for executing arithmetic processing for connected objects in the display CPU 131) is the generated data Used to generate
The parameter updating unit updates the parameter information derived by the deriving unit as parameter information of an object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and also includes the first connected object and the first object in the virtual three-dimensional space. The parameter information determined by the derivation means for the first connected object at a timing before the specific display switching timing in a situation where both of the two connected objects are arranged is the first connected object. The game machine according to Feature G4, wherein the game machine is updated as parameter information of both the second connected object and the second connected object.

  According to the feature G5, in the configuration in which the parameter information of the second connected object is updated even before the specific display switching timing, the parameter information of the first connected object is used as the parameter information for the second connected object. Is done. Thereby, compared to the configuration in which the parameter information is individually applied to each of the first connected object and the second connected object at the timing before the specific display switching timing, the timing before the specific display switching timing. The processing load at the timing can be reduced.

  Feature G6. The overlapping arrangement unit arranges the second connected object so that the second connected object is arranged at the same coordinates as the coordinates where the first connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature G6, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing, the second connected object is arranged at the same coordinates as the first connected object. Compared to the configuration in which coordinates are individually specified for the second connected object, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature G7. By adjusting the transparent value information applied to the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the transparent value setting means (in the VDP 135, for setting the object to be displayed or not displayed on the display screen) Step S4904, the function of executing steps S4912, and S4918) is used when generating the generated data.
The connected object switching means includes transparent value information in which the first connected object is the display target and the second connected object is the non-display target at the timing before the specific display switching timing. Further, after the specific display switching timing, the transparent value information in which the first connected object becomes the non-display target and the second connected object becomes the display mode is set in the connected objects. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G6.

  According to the characteristic G7, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged before the specific display switching timing, switching of the display target connected object before and after the specific display switching timing is applied to each connected object. This is done simply by switching the transparent value information. As a result, the processing load related to the switching of connected objects to be displayed can be reduced.

Feature G8. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of update timings, a first specific display effect (first effect period) and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen are increased as compared to the first specific display effect. Or a second specific display effect (second effect period) in which an individual image is displayed that has a larger processing load when displaying an image than the individual image displayed in the first specific display effect. Is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

  According to the feature G8, since the switching from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect is performed at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern about an extreme increase in processing load at the timing. Since the configuration such as G2 is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature G9. As a display effect over a display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings, a first specific display effect (first effect period) and a second specific display effect (second effect period) in which the processing load when displaying an image increases. ) And are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

  According to the feature G9, since the switching from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect is performed at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern about an extreme increase in processing load at the timing. Since the configuration such as G2 is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

  The invention of the feature group G is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the object. Drawing data is created by projecting the object to which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

  Here, as a character object, a connected object that has a plurality of partial objects with a predetermined connecting portion sandwiched therebetween and can displace the relative position of the partial objects with reference to the connecting portion is set. By doing so, the movement of the character can be made smooth. However, in connection with having a connection part as above-mentioned, a connection object becomes complicated in the game machine development stage compared with the object which does not have the said connection part. Under such circumstances, if it is desired to change the movement of the character in the course of game machine development, if the connected object is recreated from the beginning, the development period will be prolonged. On the other hand, if the connection part is set so as to correspond to any movement from the beginning, the data capacity of the connection object increases accordingly.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features G1 to G9, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. ~ E8, the above characteristics F1 to F15, the following characteristics G'1 to G'2, the following characteristics H1 to H11, the following characteristics I1 to I10, the following characteristics J1 to J13, the following characteristics K1 to K9, and the following characteristics L1 to L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Characteristic G 'group>
Feature G′1. Display means having a display screen;
Display storage means for storing image data in advance;
Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data, and updating the content of the image for one frame at a predetermined update timing;
In gaming machines equipped with
The display storage means stores specific image data used when displaying a specific image as a specific type of individual image,
The display control means includes
First display control means for displaying the specific image by using the specific image data;
Second display control means for displaying, as the specific type of individual image, a simple image that requires less processing load for displaying the image than when the specific image is displayed using the specific image data;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G′1, when displaying a specific type of individual image, it is possible to select specific image data to be used according to the processing load of the update timing at which the display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable display according to the processing load.

Feature G′2. Display means having a display screen;
Display storage means for storing image data in advance;
A display control means for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data, and updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing;
In gaming machines equipped with
The display storage means is different from the first specific image data and the processing load required to display an image as the first specific image data as image data used when displaying a specific type of individual image. Second specific image data, and
The display control means includes
First display control means for displaying the specific type of individual image by using the first specific image data;
Second display control means for displaying the specific type of individual image by using the second specific image data;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G′2, when displaying a specific type of individual image, it is possible to select specific image data to be used according to the processing load of the update timing at which the display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable display according to the processing load.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature G ′ group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, the image displayed on the display screen is updated at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created and the display device is updated in time for the update cycle. Signal output needs to be performed. Further, when creating the drawing data, calculation for specifying coordinates and size is performed for each of the individual images simultaneously displayed on the display screen, and drawing data is generated based on the calculation result.

  In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated simultaneously increases. When the processing load is locally increased, there is a concern that the processing may be lost.

  Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features G′1 to G′2, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, and the features D1 to D10. The above features E1 to E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a large number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is created in the setting storage means by setting the image data in setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is sent to the setting storage means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on output to the display means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The display control means includes
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen (a function for executing the processing of steps S1104 to S1105 in VDP 76, step S1403 in VDP 76 To the function of executing the process of step S1404),
Regarding the data of the unit setting area in which the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data of the overlapping portion of the back individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front individual image. Duplicate reflecting means (a function for executing the first effect addition process in the VDP 76, a function for executing the second effect addition process in the VDP 76), so as to be in the state of being
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when a plurality of individual images are overlapped in the depth direction, a function of displaying the image data of the overlapping portion of the back side individual image in a state reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the near side individual image. have. As a result, when displaying the near-side individual image, it is possible to display the back-side individual image in a state in which the color or the like is reflected, and it is possible to display a visually preferable image.

Feature H2. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplicate reflecting means includes
An arithmetic processing execution means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of the unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images (function for executing the processing of step S1204 in VDP76, step S1506 of VDP76) Processing function), and
Setting processing execution means (function for executing the processing of step S1205 in the VDP 76, VDP 76 for setting the calculation result data of the calculation processing in the setting storage means in the unit setting area corresponding to the unit image data overlapping each other. In step S1507), and
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, comprising:

  According to the feature H2, an excellent effect as described in the feature H1 can be obtained by executing the arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the portion overlapping in the depth direction.

Feature H3. Each unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output so that a bright color is displayed in the dots,
The calculation processing execution unit executes, as the predetermined calculation processing, an addition processing for adding numerical information of unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H3, when an image is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage unit, a brighter color is displayed as a dot corresponding to a unit setting area in which large numerical value information is set. Because of the configuration, complication of display control of the dots can be suppressed. In this configuration, the unit setting area in which the result of adding the numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to the portions overlapping in the depth direction is set has a numerical value larger than that of simply setting the image data of the front individual image. Numeric information is set. Therefore, an image reflecting the color and brightness of the back side individual image can be displayed at the overlapping portion. As a result, while using the relationship between the numerical information set in the unit setting area and the image display for the numerical information, and using a relatively simple calculation process such as an addition process, as described in the feature H1 above. An excellent effect can be achieved.

  Feature H4. When the overlapping reflection unit reflects the image data of the overlapping part of the back individual image on the image data of the overlapping part of the near individual image, the ratio of the reflection of the back image data is reduced. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, comprising reflection reduction means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1504 in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature H4, it is possible to reflect in the image data of the front individual image in a state where the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back individual image is reduced. Thus, for example, if the image data of the back individual image is reflected as it is, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back individual image is reduced in the case where the front individual image cannot be displayed well. It is possible to satisfactorily display the near side individual image in a state in which the side individual image is reflected.

Feature H5. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplication setting means includes:
Arithmetic processing execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S1506 in the VDP 76) for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of the unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images;
Setting processing execution means (function to execute the processing of step S1507 in the VDP 76) for setting the calculation result data of the calculation processing in the unit setting area corresponding to the unit image data overlapping each other in the setting storage means; ,
Reflection reduction means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1502 to S1504 in the VDP 76) for reducing the numerical information of the back individual image among the unit image data to be calculated in the calculation processing;
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, comprising:

  According to the feature H5, an excellent effect as described in the feature H1 can be obtained by executing the arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the portion overlapping in the depth direction.

  Further, it is possible to reflect the image data of the front individual image in a state where the ratio of the image data of the back individual image is reduced. As a result, for example, when the image data of the back individual image is reflected as it is, the display of the front individual image cannot be satisfactorily performed. It is possible to satisfactorily display the near-side individual image in a state where the individual image is reflected.

  In particular, the target for reducing numerical information in the computation process is the back individual image, not the front individual image, so it is possible to suppress the color tone of the front individual image that is positively added in front of the back individual image. The back side individual image can be reflected.

Feature H6. Each unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output so that a bright color is displayed in the dots,
The arithmetic processing execution means is configured to execute addition processing for adding numerical information of unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images, as the predetermined arithmetic processing.
The game machine according to Feature H5, wherein the reflection reducing means reduces numerical information of the back side individual image among the unit image data to be added in the addition process at a predetermined ratio.

  According to the feature H6, when an image is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage means, the brighter the color corresponding to the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which large numerical value information is set, is displayed. Because of the configuration, complication of display control of the dots can be suppressed. In this configuration, the unit setting area in which the result of adding the numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to the portions overlapping in the depth direction is set has a numerical value larger than that of simply setting the image data of the front individual image. Numeric information is set. Therefore, an image reflecting the color and brightness of the back side individual image can be displayed at the overlapping portion. As a result, while using the relationship between the numerical information set in the unit setting area and the image display for the numerical information, and using a relatively simple calculation process such as an addition process, as described in the feature H1 above. An excellent effect can be achieved.

  However, in the configuration in which numerical information addition processing is executed as described above, it is assumed that the numerical information resulting from the addition processing exceeds the limit numerical value of the unit setting area, so that the front individual image is displayed. It becomes impossible to do well. On the other hand, the numerical information of the unit image data of the back individual image can be reflected in the image data of the front individual image in a state where the numerical information is reduced at a predetermined rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the numerical information resulting from the addition process from exceeding the limit value of the unit setting area, and it is possible to display the front individual image in a state in which the rear individual image is reflected. Become.

Feature H7. The display storage means stores in advance transparent value adjustment data (partial addition data PD19) in which a transparent value is set in correspondence with each unit image data of the front individual image,
The reflection reduction unit is set in the transparency value adjustment data for each of the image data of the front individual image and the unit image data on which the arithmetic processing is executed in the image data of the back individual image. The gaming machine according to Feature H5 or H6, wherein each transparency value is applied.

  According to the feature H7, when the ratio of reflecting the back side individual image is reduced, the transparent value adjustment data is read from the display storage unit and applied to the image data of the back side individual image. , The complexity of the process for reducing the ratio is suppressed.

Feature H8. Coordinate specifying means for specifying the coordinates when setting the image data in the setting storage means (function for executing a calculation process for second effect production in the display CPU 72),
The reflection reduction unit is set in the transparency value adjustment data for each of the image data of the front individual image and the unit image data on which the arithmetic processing is executed in the image data of the back individual image. The transparent value adjustment data is set for the coordinates specified in the near individual image by the coordinate specifying means so that each transparent value is applied. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H8, when the ratio of reflecting the rear individual image is reduced, the transparent value adjustment data is read from the display storage unit, and the transparent value adjustment data is further converted into the image data of the front individual image. Since it is only necessary to set the same coordinates as the coordinates set, the complexity of the process for reducing the ratio can be suppressed.

  Feature H9. The near-side individual image is associated with numerical information defining color information as image data, and has an effect image (effect image CH2) having a large number of unit image data set with a transparency value applied to the numerical information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein:

  According to the feature H9, the effect image can be displayed favorably.

Feature H10. The effect image is used to generate a visual effect on a predetermined base image (character CH1),
The game according to Feature H9, wherein the display storage means stores image data of the base image (sprite data PD16) and image data of the effect image (effect data PD17) individually. Machine.

  According to the feature H10, when displaying the base image, it is possible to display the base image alone, and also to display the base image in a state where the effect image is applied.

Feature H11. The unit image data is configured to be associated with numerical information defining color information and set a transparent value applied to the numerical information.
The image data setting means is a case where the plurality of individual images are overlapped in the depth direction of the display screen, and the transparent corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the near individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion. When the value is not set, the unit image data of the front individual image is set in a state where the unit image data of the back individual image is not reflected in the unit setting area of the setting destination,
The overlapping reflecting means is a case where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, and the transparency value corresponding to information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the near individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion Is set, the unit image data of the back individual image is added to the unit image data of the front individual image in the state where the transparent value is applied to the numerical information for the unit setting area of the setting destination. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H10, wherein data in a state reflecting the above is set.

  According to the feature H11, whether or not the image data of the back individual image is reflected can be determined based on the setting state of the transparency value for the unit image data of the near individual image, and the processing related to the determination The complexity of the configuration can be suppressed.

  The invention of the feature H group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a texture-attached polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

  Here, as a kind of display effect, there is a case where a smoke screen is displayed to indicate a state in which an explosion has occurred. Further, a cloud for indicating that the weather is cloudy or a rain for indicating that it is raining may be displayed. These individual images are supplementarily displayed in front of the background or character. In this case, if the individual image is displayed regardless of the background or the color tone of the character, the player feels uncomfortable, which is not preferable.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features H1 to H11, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the features F1 to F15, the features G1 to G9, the features G′1 to G′2, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance corresponding to individual images individually displayed on the display screen;
Storage means for setting (frame regions 82a and 82b) in which drawing data is set using the image data;
Derivation means (function for executing task processing in the display CPU 72) for deriving parameter information including coordinate information of a setting destination of the image data to the setting storage means;
Creating the drawing data by setting the image data in the setting storage unit according to the parameter information derived by the deriving unit, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display unit; Display control means (VDP76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on
In gaming machines equipped with
The derivation means includes
When there is image data for which derivation of the parameter information is to be newly started, start derivation means (in the display CPU 72) that executes derivation start processing for newly starting derivation of the parameter information for the image data. The function of executing the processing of step S612 to step S614);
For the image data for which the derivation start process has already been completed, the update derivation means for executing the update process for updating the parameter information in accordance with the change in the display content of the image (in steps S615 to S617 in the display CPU 72). Processing function), and
Although it is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing for executing the derivation start processing, it may be included in the display target on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. Preliminary derivation means (function for executing the processing of steps S607 to S611 in the display CPU 72) for executing the derivation start processing on the image data corresponding to the individual image;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, drawing data is created by setting image data in the setting storage unit according to the parameter information derived by the deriving unit, and an image signal is output to the display unit according to the drawing data. As a result, the image is displayed on the display screen.

  In the above configuration, when there is image data for which derivation of parameter information is to be newly started, the derivation means starts derivation of parameter information by executing a derivation start process for the image data, and then At this image update timing, the parameter information that has been derived may be updated. Thereby, when a predetermined individual image is displayed over a display period for a plurality of update timings, it is not necessary to repeat the process of newly setting parameter information for the image data of the individual image, It is sufficient to repeatedly update the parameter information that has already been set.

  In addition, individual images that are not included in the display target on the display screen at the update timing of the image corresponding to the timing for executing the derivation start processing, but may be included in the display target on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. A derivation start process may be executed on image data corresponding to an image. This makes it possible to complete the derivation start processing for individual images outside the display screen in advance. For example, when there are a large number of individual images to be displayed on the display screen, It is possible to distribute the execution timing of the derivation start process so as to avoid simultaneous execution of the derivation start process for the image data.

  As described above, the processing load for displaying an image can be reduced.

  Feature I2. The preliminary deriving means is included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, but the derivation start process has not yet been completed. Prioritization within a display range in which the derivation start processing is executed with priority over image data corresponding to an image over individual images not included in the display target on the display screen at the update timing. The gaming machine according to Feature I1, further comprising means (a function for executing the processing of steps S609 to S610 in the display CPU 72).

  According to the feature I2, in the configuration including the feature I1 and capable of executing the derivation start process on the image data of the individual image outside the display screen in advance, the display target on the display screen is more than the image data. The derivation start processing is preferentially executed for image data corresponding to individual images that are included in the image but have not yet been completed. As a result, in the configuration in which the execution timings of the derivation start processing are distributed as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the individual image that should originally be displayed is not displayed.

  Feature I3. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing for executing the derivation start processing, but is displayed on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. When the derivation start process is executed on image data corresponding to an individual image that may be included in the target, priority is given to the image data of the individual image on the earlier side to be displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, further comprising priority means (a function of executing the process of step S611 in the display CPU 72) outside the display range so that the derivation start process is executed. .

  According to the feature I3, when there are a plurality of individual images that are outside the display screen but may be included in the display target at the subsequent update timing, the timing at which the display target on the display screen is earlier Since the derivation start processing is executed with priority from the image data of the individual images, the processing load can be distributed well.

Feature I4. The deriving unit outputs to the display control unit, drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information specifying image data of an individual image included in an image corresponding to one update timing and parameter information derived for the image data. Drawing instruction means (function for executing the processing of step S408 in the display CPU 72),
The display control unit is configured to set image data in the setting storage unit in accordance with information instructed by the drawing instruction information, and to generate drawing data corresponding to the update timing corresponding to the drawing instruction information. Yes,
Furthermore, when the drawing instruction means outputs the drawing instruction information corresponding to an image corresponding to one update timing, the image data of individual images that are not included in the display target on the display screen at the update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the drawing instruction information is output so as not to include information corresponding to the image data even if the derivation start processing is completed.

  According to the characteristic I4, even if the derivation unit starts deriving the parameter information in advance, only the image data of the individual image in the display screen is provided in the drawing instruction information output to the display control unit. Information corresponding to the image data of the individual images outside the display screen is not provided. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the amount of drawing instruction information output to the display control means. Further, the display control means does not need to determine whether or not the designated individual image is within the display screen, and even if the determination is not performed, display control is performed for individual images outside the display screen. There is no need to do.

Feature I5. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed at a predetermined position in the range of the rear image in front of the rear image. Includes a wide-range back image that is set wider than the display range of minutes,
Display changing means for changing the display range for the one update timing to a position different from the display range at the previous update timing in the wide-area rear image (function for executing the process of step S604 in the display CPU 72) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein:

  According to the feature I5, since the display range for one update timing may be changed, it is possible to suppress uniform display effects and increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, since the configuration of the feature I1 is provided and the derivation start process is executed in advance for the individual images outside the display screen, even if the display range for one update timing is switched, On the other hand, parameter information of each individual image can be favorably derived.

Feature I6. Operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The gaming machine according to the feature I5, wherein the display changing unit changes the display range for the one update timing based on the operation received by the operation receiving unit.

  According to the feature I6, since the display range for one update timing may be changed based on the operation of the operation accepting means by the player, the display effect is suppressed from being uniformed, and the degree of attention to the image is increased. It becomes possible to raise. However, in a configuration in which the display range for one update timing is changed based on an operation to the operation reception unit, it is difficult to anticipate the timing at which the change occurs. In this case, since the configuration of the feature I1 is provided and the derivation start process is executed in advance for the individual images outside the display screen, even if the display range for one update timing is switched, On the other hand, parameter information of each individual image can be favorably derived.

  Feature I7. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing for executing the derivation start processing, but is displayed on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. The game machine according to Feature I5 or I6, wherein whether or not an individual image that may be included in the target exists is determined based on a display range at that time.

  According to the feature I7, an individual image that is a starting target for derivation of parameter information is grasped on the basis of the set display range. Thereby, in the configuration in which the display range is switched, the distribution of the execution timing of the derivation start process is performed according to the currently set display range, and the distribution can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature I8. As a display mode in the display screen, a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of a rear image is included,
Furthermore, an operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by the player,
Display changing means (function for executing the process of step S604 in the display CPU 72) for changing the content of the back image based on the reception of the operation by the operation receiving means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, comprising:

  According to the feature I8, since the content of the back image may be changed based on the operation of the operation accepting means by the player, it is possible to suppress the uniform display effect and increase the degree of attention to the image. It becomes. However, in a configuration in which the content of the back image is changed based on an operation to the operation receiving unit, it is difficult to anticipate the timing at which the change occurs. In this case, since the configuration of the feature I1 is provided and the derivation start processing is executed in advance for the individual images outside the display screen, each content is changed even if the content of the back image is switched. The parameter information of the individual image can be derived well.

  Feature I9. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing for executing the derivation start processing, but is displayed on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. The gaming machine according to Feature I8, wherein whether or not there is an individual image that may be included in the target is determined based on the content of the back image at that time.

  According to the feature I9, an individual image that is a starting target for derivation of parameter information is grasped based on the content of the set back image. Thereby, in the configuration in which the content of the back image is switched, the execution timing of the derivation start processing is distributed according to the content of the back image that is currently set, and the distribution can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature I10. Derivation storage means (work RAM 73) used when the derivation means derives the parameter information;
The derivation means for starting uses the derivation used for deriving the parameter information of the image data as the derivation start process when there is image data to be newly derived of the parameter information. A configuration for executing at least a search process for searching for an area in the storage means (step S612 in the display CPU 72) and an area initialization process for initializing an area secured based on the search result (step S613 in the display CPU 72). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, wherein:

  According to feature I10, in the derivation start process, not only the process for setting parameter information, but also a process for searching for an area used for deriving parameter information, and an area secured based on the search result is initialized. Therefore, the processing load is larger than that of the update process. On the other hand, since the configuration of the characteristic I1 is provided and the execution timing of the derivation start process can be distributed, the processing load can be distributed.

  The invention of the above characteristic group I is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a texture-attached polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

  Here, the image displayed on the display screen is updated at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created and the display device is updated in time for the update cycle. Signal output needs to be performed. Further, when creating the drawing data, calculation for specifying coordinates and size is performed for each of the individual images simultaneously displayed on the display screen, and drawing data is generated based on the calculation result.

  In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated simultaneously increases. When the processing load is locally increased, there is a concern that the processing may be lost.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features I1 to I10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. ~ E8, the above characteristics F1 to F15, the above characteristics G1 to G9, the above characteristics G'1 to G'2, the above characteristics H1 to H11, the following characteristics J1 to J13, the following characteristics K1 to K9, and the following characteristics L1 to L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a large number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Drawing data creating means (function for executing the processing of step S505 in the VDP 76) for creating drawing data in the setting storage means using the image data;
Image signal output means (display circuit 94) for displaying an image on the display screen based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In gaming machines equipped with
A data adjustment unit (scaler) that adjusts the data size of the drawing data created in the setting storage unit to create adjusted data and outputs an image signal corresponding to the adjusted data from the image signal output unit. 97)
By changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means, a change effect execution means (setting process for zoom-in effect in the VDP 76) that performs a size change effect that is at least one of enlargement and reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, an individual image displayed on the display screen is resized by changing the adjustment magnification when adjusting the data size of the drawing data to create the adjusted data. As a result, a size change effect can be performed while reducing the processing load as compared to a configuration in which the magnification is individually adjusted for each piece of image data set in the setting storage unit. As described above, it is possible to execute the size change effect satisfactorily.

  Feature J2. The game machine according to Feature J1, wherein when the drawing data creating means creates the drawing data in the setting storage means, the drawing data is created with the same size regardless of the adjustment magnification.

  According to the feature J2, since the drawing data creation means only needs to create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence / absence or size of the resize effect, while suppressing the complexity of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data, A resize effect can be performed.

Feature J3. An initial adjustment magnification is set as the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means,
In the situation where the initial adjustment magnification is set, the data adjustment unit is configured to display the image corresponding to the entire data of the drawing data in a state adjusted to the resolution of the display screen. A game machine according to the feature J1 or J2, wherein the data is created.

  According to the feature J3, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described in the feature J1 and the like by using a configuration in which the resolution adjustment corresponding to the display screen is performed on the created drawing data.

  Feature J4. The change effect execution means changes the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means to an enlargement magnification larger than the initial adjustment magnification, thereby performing the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image displayed on the display screen. The game machine according to Feature J3, characterized in that it includes execution means for enlargement (a function of executing the process of step S2701 in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature J4, the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image is performed based on the initial adjustment magnification. Thereby, the drawing data creation means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence / absence and contents of the size change effect. Therefore, the size change effect can be performed while suppressing the complexity of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data.

  Feature J5. The change effect execution means is smaller than the enlargement magnification within the range from the initial adjustment magnification to the enlargement magnification in a situation where the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement is performed by the enlargement execution means. It is provided with a reduction execution means (function to execute the process of step S2701 in the VDP 76) that performs the size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen by changing to the magnification. A gaming machine described in the characteristic J4.

  According to the feature J5, after the adjustment magnification is set to a predetermined enlargement magnification, by returning it to the initial adjustment magnification side, a size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image is performed. Thereby, the drawing data creation means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence / absence and contents of the size change effect. Therefore, the size change effect can be performed while suppressing the complexity of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data.

Feature J6. A power supply unit (power supply and launch control device 57) that is connected to an external power supply and supplies necessary operating power in the gaming machine;
An initial setting unit (function for executing the process of step S305 in the display CPU 72) for setting the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment unit to the initial adjustment magnification based on the start of the supply of operating power from the power supply unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J5, comprising:

  According to the feature J6, in the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment unit, for example, when the power-on operation of the gaming machine is performed and the supply of the operating power from the power supply unit is started The adjustment magnification is set to the initial adjustment magnification. Thereby, the initial adjustment magnification can be set satisfactorily.

  Feature J7. When the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means is changed from the initial adjustment magnification to perform the size change effect, a magnification return means (an enlargement flag in the VDP 76) that returns to the initial adjustment magnification after the size change effect ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, wherein

  According to the feature J7, it is possible to display an image according to the resolution of the display screen after the end of the resize effect.

  Feature J8. The data adjusting means creates the adjusted data based on executing linear interpolation processing (processing in steps S2802 and S2806 in the display circuit 94) on the drawing data. The gaming machine according to any one of J7.

  According to the feature J8, an excellent effect as described in the feature J1 and the like can be obtained by using linear interpolation processing.

  Feature J9. The change effect execution means is such that a specific individual image among a plurality of individual images included in an image corresponding to one update timing when the size change effect is performed is included in the display screen as a whole. Individual adjustment means for adjusting parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage means by the drawing data creation means (function to execute the processing of steps S2608 to S2612 in the display CPU 72) The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, comprising:

  In the configuration that performs the size change effect by changing the magnification of the drawing data, it is assumed that the size is changed to a specific individual image that the entire image is to be displayed, and a part is arranged outside the display screen. Is done. On the other hand, according to the feature J9, the parameter information is adjusted when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit so that the entire specific individual image is included in the display screen. Is done. As a result, the entire individual image can be displayed on the display screen while achieving the effects described in the feature J1 and the like.

  Feature J10. The change effect executing means is a specific individual image among a plurality of individual images included in an image corresponding to one update timing when the size change effect is performed. Parameter information when image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit by the drawing data generation unit so as to be similar to at least one of the size and position displayed in the image corresponding to the update timing The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, further comprising individual adjusting means (function for executing the processing of step S2608 to step S2612 in the display CPU 72) for adjusting.

  In the configuration that performs the resize effect by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size is changed to a specific individual image that does not want to change at least one of the size and position, and the elements that do not want to be changed are changed. It is assumed that On the other hand, according to the feature J10, the image data of the specific individual image is stored in the setting memory so that at least one of the size and the position of the specific individual image is the same as when the size change effect is not performed. The parameter information when set in the means is adjusted. As a result, it is possible to maintain an element that is not desired to be changed as it is for a specific individual image while exhibiting the effects described in the feature J1 and the like.

  Feature J11. The change effect execution means is an update timing immediately before the size change effect is started for a specific individual image among a plurality of individual images included in an image corresponding to one update timing when the size change effect is performed. The size and coordinate information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit by the drawing data generation unit is adjusted so that the size and position are displayed in the image of The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, comprising individual adjustment means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2608 to S2612 in the display CPU 72).

  In the configuration in which the resize effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size and the position of the specific individual image that is desired to be the same as the image at the update timing immediately before the start of the resize effect are displayed. It is assumed that changes will be made. On the other hand, according to the feature J11, the image data of the specific individual image is set so that the specific individual image has the same size and position as the image at the update timing immediately before the start of the size change effect. Information on the size and coordinates when set in the storage means is adjusted. Thereby, it is possible to maintain the display mode for the specific individual image while achieving the effects described in the feature J1 and the like.

Feature J12. The display mode in the display screen includes a display mode in which the individual image for variation is displayed in a variability before the back image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J9 to J11, wherein the specific individual image is the variation individual image.

  According to the feature J12, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the individual image for change from fluctuating with the size change effect.

Feature J13. The display effect includes a reach effect that displays an image for reach in a state where an individual image for reach is displayed on standby.
The gaming machine according to Feature J12, wherein the specific individual image is the reach individual image displayed on standby.

  According to the feature J13, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the individual image for reach from fluctuating with the size change effect.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature group J is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a texture-attached polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

  Here, it is considered that the display effect can be diversified by performing a display effect of enlarging or reducing the image for one frame. However, it is not preferable that the processing load increases to cause the display effect and the processing drop occurs. On the other hand, for example, the number of individual images to be displayed is intentionally reduced in order to perform the display effect. If measures for simplifying such display contents are taken, the degree of attention to the display effect cannot be suitably increased.

  Incidentally, with respect to any one of the features J1 to J13, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the features F1 to F15, the features G1 to G9, the features G′1 to G′2, the features H1 to H11, the features I1 to I10, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The display storage means stores a plurality of types of compressed moving image data used for reproducing moving images,
The display control means includes
Developing means (moving picture decoder 93) for developing any moving image data in a developing area and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings for an image corresponding to the moving image data;
By using still image data for a plurality of update timings developed by the development means in the order defined in the moving image data, a moving image of the image corresponding to the moving image data is provided for the plurality of update timings. Moving image display execution means (function for executing moving image setting processing in the VDP 76) to display over a display period of
Among the plurality of types of moving image data, the second moving image data (moving image data PD55 for A after branching) is displayed after a moving image is displayed based on the first moving image data (moving image data PD54 for branching). A plurality of moving image effect execution means (function for executing arithmetic processing for moving images in the display CPU 72) for performing a group of display effects having a display period in which the moving image is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K1, a group of display effects is performed using at least the first moving image data and the second moving image data instead of using a single moving image data. Accordingly, for example, the first moving image data or the second moving image data can be used in common for causing other display effects to be performed, and moving image data is individually provided for each display effect. Compared to the set configuration, the storage capacity necessary for storing moving image data can be reduced. Further, for example, at the start of the group of display effects, the expansion process is performed on the first moving image data, and the second moving image is displayed during the period in which the moving image display is performed using the first moving image data. It is possible to execute processing for expansion on the data. In this case, the processing load when starting the group of display effects can be suppressed as compared with a configuration in which development for both moving image data is performed together.

  As described above, a display effect using moving image data can be favorably performed.

  Feature K2. The display control means includes means for performing a group of display effects using one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data, according to the characteristic K1. Game machines.

  According to the feature K2, one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is used in common for causing other display effects to be performed. Thereby, the storage capacity required for storing the moving image data can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data is individually set for each display effect.

  Feature K3. The moving image based on the first moving image data corresponds to a series of display effects, and the moving image based on the second moving image data is a display effect that is continuous with respect to the series of display effects based on the first moving image data. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2, characterized in that

  According to the feature K3, since the first moving image data alone corresponds to a series of display effects, it is possible to perform a display effect using only the first moving image data. In this case, by preparing the first moving image data and the second moving image data separately, a single moving image data in which the first moving image data and the second moving image data are collected in advance. Separately from that, the first moving image data is prepared in advance, and a plurality of types of display effects can be performed while reducing the storage capacity necessary to store the moving image data. Become.

  Feature K4. The expansion means performs expansion processing on the second moving image data during a period in which moving image display by the first moving image data is performed when the group of display effects is performed by the plurality of moving image effect execution means. The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the game machine is executed.

  According to the feature K4, the expansion process is performed on the second moving image data by using the period during which the moving image is displayed using the first moving image data. Thereby, the processing load at the time of starting the group of display effects is suppressed as compared with a configuration in which the processing for expansion is executed on both moving image data at the start of the group of display effects.

Feature K5. The multiple video effect execution means
First moving image effect executing means for displaying a moving image based on the first moving image data (function for executing the processing of steps S2913 to S2915 in the display CPU 72);
Second moving image effect execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2917 to S2919 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a moving image based on the second moving image data after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed;
Third moving image effect executing means (step S2920 to step S2920 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a moving image based on the third moving image data (moving image data PD B for branching B) after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed. The function of executing the processing of S2922),
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, comprising:

  According to the feature K5, the first moving image data can be used in common in each of the display effect using the second moving image data and the display effect using the third moving image data. Accordingly, a single moving image data in which the first moving image data and the second moving image data are combined, and a single moving image data in which the first moving image data and the third moving image data are combined. Compared to a configuration in which the image data is individually prepared, the above-described plurality of types of display effects can be performed while reducing the storage capacity necessary for storing the moving image data.

Feature K6. Operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The plurality of moving image effect executing means is based on the fact that the operation is received by the operation receiving means in a period during which the moving image display by the first moving image data is performed or at a timing after the moving image display is completed. And an effect distribution means (function for executing the process of step S2908 in the display CPU 72) for setting a subsequent effect execution target in the second movie effect execution means or the third movie effect execution means. The gaming machine according to feature K5.

  In the configuration in which the branch from the previously executed video display to the predetermined video display or a different video display is performed based on an arbitrary operation by the player, the occurrence of the operation itself is arbitrary. One moving image data cannot be supported. On the other hand, according to the feature K6, the first moving image data is prepared for the moving image display executed first, and the second moving image data and the third moving image data for the moving image display executed after branching are prepared. Video data is prepared. Accordingly, it is possible to provide an effect in which the content of the developed video display is changed during the video display based on an arbitrary operation by the player.

  Feature K7. When the moving image based on the second moving image data or the moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed, the expanding unit displays the first moving image. The feature K6 is characterized in that the development process is executed only on the first moving image data among the first to third moving image data before the start timing of moving image display by data. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K7, the processing load when starting the group of display effects can be suppressed as compared with a configuration in which the processing for expansion is executed on each moving image data at the start of the group of display effects.

  Feature K8. The effect distribution means is the operation receiving means at the determination timing that is in the middle of the moving image display by the first moving image data and that is the number of update timings for determination before the end timing. When it is specified that the operation is accepted, the effect execution target after the moving image display by the first moving image data is set in the second moving image effect executing means or the third moving image effect executing means. The gaming machine according to Feature K6 or K7, wherein:

  According to the feature K8, since the moving image data of the distribution destination is determined before the timing at which the moving image display by the first moving image data ends, the moving image display by the first moving image data is performed. In this period, a period for performing development processing on the moving image data of the distribution destination is secured. Thereby, the start of a new moving image display after the moving image display by the first moving image data is completed is smoothly performed.

  Feature K9. When the moving image based on the second moving image data or the moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed, The gaming machine according to feature K8, wherein a development process for the moving image data of the distribution destination by the effect distribution means is executed in a period until the end timing of the moving image display by the first moving image data.

  According to the feature K9, the expansion process is executed only on the moving image data of the distribution destination of the second moving image data and the third moving image data. Thereby, the processing load of the expansion process can be suppressed, and the storage capacity required in the expansion area can be reduced.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature K group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  A configuration including moving image data as image data is also known. Since the moving image data has a larger data capacity than the still image data, the moving image data is stored in a compressed state in the image data memory. Accordingly, when moving image data is used, the moving image data is expanded into a predetermined memory area using a decoder to form a plurality of still image data, and each time the plurality of still image data become the update timing of the image. It is necessary to use them in the prescribed order.

  Here, since it is necessary to decode and use the moving image data compressed as described above, there are restrictions on the use thereof, and accordingly, restrictions on the diversification of display effects using moving image display. Also occurs. On the other hand, it is possible to store still image data as a collection without compression. In this case, however, the storage capacity of the image data memory is extremely increased.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the features F1 to F15, the features G1 to G9, the features G′1 to G′2, the features H1 to H11, the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J13, and the following features L1 to L12 Or the structure limited by 1 may be applied. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data and updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing;
In gaming machines equipped with
As the display mode, a display effect performed over an effect period for a plurality of update timings is included,
The storage means for display uses specific image data used for displaying an image corresponding to the display effect, and is used at the first update timing in the effect period and at a timing later than that. 2 including the one used at the update timing of 2,
The display control means, when displaying an image corresponding to the display effect, is a display effect executing means that uses at least a part of the plurality of specific image data over a plurality of update timings (for the transmission effect in the display CPU 72). A gaming machine having a function of executing a calculation process and a function of executing a transmission effect setting process in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature L1, a display aspect can be diversified by performing a display effect over the effect period for several update timings. Here, in the display effect, at least a part of the plurality of specific image data is set over a plurality of update timings. Thereby, compared with the structure which prepares specific image data for every update timing, reduction of the specific image data required in order to display a display effect can be aimed at. Therefore, it is possible to diversify display modes through execution of display effects while suppressing an increase in image data.

Feature L2. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data and updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing;
In gaming machines equipped with
As the display mode, a display effect that is displayed so that the mode of a specific type of individual image is changed over an effect period for a plurality of update timings is included.
The storage means for display includes first specific image data used for displaying the first specific image in which the specific type of individual image is in the first mode, and the specific type of individual image is in the second mode. A plurality of specific image data corresponding to the display effect, including second specific image data used to display the second specific image.
The display control means is a process of changing from the state in which the first specific image is displayed as the specific type of individual image to the state in which the second specific image is displayed. Display effect executing means (a function for executing a symbol calculation process for enlarged display in the display CPU 72 and a function for executing a symbol setting process for enlarged display in the VDP 76) are used which partially use over a plurality of update timings. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature L2, it is possible to diversify the display mode by performing a display effect that is displayed so that the mode of a specific type of individual image is changed over an effect period corresponding to a plurality of update timings. Here, in the display effect, at least a part of the plurality of specific image data is used over a plurality of update timings. Thereby, compared with the structure which prepares specific image data for every update timing, reduction of the specific image data required in order to display a display effect can be aimed at. Therefore, it is possible to diversify display modes through execution of display effects while suppressing an increase in image data.

  Further, in the process of changing from the state in which the first specific image is displayed to the state in which the second specific image is displayed, at least a part of the plurality of specific image data is used over a plurality of update timings. Therefore, for example, in a specific aspect of display effects, specific image data is prepared for each update timing, and the specific aspect is suitably performed. For other aspects, one specific image data is provided over a plurality of update timings. Can also be used. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in image data while increasing the degree of attention to the image.

Feature L3. The display control means is for displaying an image on the display screen based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and for setting the image data in the setting storage means , A configuration for setting the image data in a state in which parameter information that determines the setting mode is applied,
In the display effect, a first specific image is displayed at the first update timing in the effect period, and at a second update timing that is a timing at which a plurality of update timing specific periods have elapsed from that timing. A display mode in which the second specific image is displayed is included,
The display effect executing means stores at least one of the first specific image data corresponding to the first specific image and the second specific image data corresponding to the second specific image in the setting period to the setting storage means. A setting object and an intermediate image displayed over the specific period by changing at least a part of the parameter information applied to the image data that is the setting object The gaming machine according to the feature L1 or the feature L2.

  According to the feature L3, since the intermediate image is displayed over the specific period, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player when switching from the first specific image to the second specific image. Further, the display of the intermediate image is realized by changing at least a part of the parameter information applied to the image data to be set. Thereby, it is not necessary to prepare specific image data corresponding to the intermediate image in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

Feature L4. The parameter information applied to the image data includes reflection value information that determines the degree to which the color information of the image data is reflected on the display screen,
The display effect executing means sets both the first specific image data and the second specific image data to be set in the setting storage means in the specific period, and sets reflected value information of each specific image data. Adjusting the color of the second specific image rather than the first specific image from the state in which the intermediate image relatively reflecting the color of the first specific image is displayed rather than the second specific image. The gaming machine according to Feature L3, wherein the game machine is shifted to a state in which the reflected intermediate image is displayed.

  According to the feature L4, both the first specific image data at the transfer source and the second specific image data at the transfer destination are set as the setting targets, and the reflection value information of each specific image data is adjusted stepwise, thereby A display effect that gradually changes from the image to the second specific image can be executed. In this case, an intermediate image in which both the first specific image and the second specific image are associated over a specific period is displayed. The intermediate image is easier to adapt to the transition mode than the intermediate image using only one of the first specific image data and the second specific image data. Thereby, the uncomfortable feeling given to a player can be reduced suitably.

Feature L5. The display effect executing means includes
Coordinate information setting means (in the display CPU 72) sets coordinate information of parameter information applied to each specific image data so that the first specific image and the second specific image overlap in the depth direction of the display screen. The function of executing the process of step S3204 and the process of step S3210);
A synthesizing unit (a function of executing the process of step S505 in the VDP 76) that synthesizes the first specific image data and the second specific image data in a state where the reflection value information corresponding to each specific image data is applied;
The gaming machine according to Feature L4, comprising:

  According to the feature L5, when the transition from the first specific image to the second specific image is gradually performed, the two overlap each other, so that the transition mode from the first specific image to the second specific image is recognized as a series of effects. Can do. Thereby, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player at the time of the change can be reduced.

Feature L6. The display effect is an effect that is displayed so that a specific type of individual image performs a specific operation,
The first specific image is an image (first character image CP1) corresponding to a state in which the specific type of individual image has become the first motion mode.
The second specific image is an image (second character image CP2) corresponding to a state in which the specific type of individual image has changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode according to the specific operation. The gaming machine according to Feature L4 or Feature L5.

  According to the feature L6, it is possible to smoothly represent a specific type of individual image performing a specific operation by setting image data before and after a specific operation as a setting target and adjusting the reflection value information in stages. .

Feature L7. The second specific image and the first specific image are images (initial symbol image CP3, enlarged symbol image CP4) having at least different sizes,
The parameter information includes magnification information (scale information) of the image data,
The display effect executing means sets at least one of the first specific image data and the second specific image data as the setting target to the setting storage means in the specific period, and the image data that is the setting target The game machine according to Feature L3, characterized in that the intermediate image is gradually brought closer to the second specific image by gradually adjusting the magnification information applied to the second specific image.

  According to the feature L7, by adjusting the magnification information stepwise, it is possible to display a state in which the intermediate image is changed from the first specific image to the second specific image through an effect that gradually increases or decreases. In this case, the specific period in which the intermediate image is displayed is a period in which the degree of attention to the image is lower than the timing at which the first specific image or the second specific image is displayed before and after the intermediate period. Even when an image obtained by changing the magnification information of the first specific image or the second specific image during the specific period is used as the intermediate image, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. Thereby, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player while reducing the volume of the image data.

Feature L8. When at least one of the first specific image data and the second specific image data is applied with the same magnification information as the magnification information applied to the second specific image data in order to display the second specific image , Set to display an image smaller in size than the second specific image,
The display effect executing means gradually increases the magnification information applied to the setting target image data to gradually bring the intermediate image closer to the second specific image. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature L8, it is possible to express how the intermediate image gradually approaches the second specific image by gradually increasing the enlargement magnification information applied to the setting target image data. In this case, since it is not necessary to consider the collapse of the image that may be caused by reducing the image data, the intermediate image can be brought close to the second specific image with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature L9. The specific period includes a first period and a second period that is a period later than the first period.
The display effect execution means sets the first specific image data as a setting target in the setting storage means in the first period, and sets the second specific image data in the setting storage means in the second period. As well as
In the first period, the magnification information applied to the first specific image data is adjusted stepwise, and in the second period, the magnification information applied to the second specific image data is adjusted stepwise, The gaming machine according to Feature L7 or Feature L8, wherein the intermediate image is gradually brought closer to the second specific image.

  Generally, when an image is enlarged or reduced, the image quality deteriorates. The decrease in image quality tends to increase as the enlargement magnification increases or the reduction magnification decreases. Here, according to this feature, the intermediate image is displayed based on the first specific image data in the first period of the specific period, while the intermediate image is displayed based on the second specific image data in the second period. Is done. In this case, since the enlargement magnification applied to the image data can be reduced or the reduction magnification can be increased as compared with the configuration in which the intermediate image is displayed using either one of the image data, the image quality of the displayed image is increased. Can be suppressed.

Feature L10. The second specific image is an enlarged image or a reduced image of the first specific image;
The display effect executing means sets the second specific image data as a setting target and applies a plurality of scale information to the second specific image data, so that a plurality of pieces of information can be displayed after the specific period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features L7 to L9, wherein the second specific image is displayed at approximately equal magnification over the update timing.

  According to the feature L10, a display effect is performed in which the first specific image gradually increases or decreases, and then the second specific image that is an enlarged image or a reduced image of the first specific image is displayed over a predetermined period. It becomes possible.

  When performing such a display effect, a configuration in which a magnification-change image of the first specific image is displayed over a predetermined period after the specific period instead of the second specific image is also conceivable. However, in the case of such a configuration, an image whose image quality has been reduced by enlargement or reduction is displayed over a plurality of update timings, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the second specific image of approximately the same magnification is displayed over a plurality of update timings, deterioration in image quality is suppressed. Therefore, the inconvenience can be avoided.

Feature L11. The display storage means includes first specific image data used at a first update timing and second specific image data used at a second update timing later than the first update timing in the production period. Specific image data (curtain effect image data IMD1 to IMD6) for a plurality of frames corresponding to the display effect is stored,
The display effect execution means displays the display effect by sequentially setting the specific image data for the plurality of frames in a predetermined order in a predetermined setting storage means (frame regions 82a and 82b). Is,
The update interval of the specific image data from the time when the specific image data for one update timing is set to the time when the specific image data for the next update timing is set is set to be different according to the contents of the display effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L10.

  According to the feature L11, display effects are performed by sequentially setting specific image data for a plurality of update timings in the setting storage unit in a predetermined order. In this case, the specific image data necessary for the display effect can be reduced by increasing the update interval of the specific image data.

  However, when the update interval of the specific image data is increased, there is a disadvantage that it is difficult to express a smooth display mode. On the other hand, according to this feature, the update interval of the specific image data is set to be different depending on the content of the effect. Thus, for example, by reducing the update interval of the specific image data in a scene where a smooth display mode is required, and increasing the update interval in a scene where a rough display mode may be used, it is possible to specify without giving the player a sense of incongruity. The capacity of image data can be reduced.

Feature L12. In the display effect, a high discrimination mode and a low discrimination mode in which the discriminability of the image by appearance is relatively high and low are set,
The ratio of the display period of the high discrimination mode to the number of frames of the specific image data used in the high discrimination mode is the ratio of the display period of the low discrimination mode to the number of frames of the specific image data used in the low discrimination mode. The gaming machine according to Feature L11, wherein the gaming machine is set to be smaller.

  According to the feature L12, the degree of attention to the image can be increased by performing a display effect that shifts from the low discrimination mode to the high discrimination mode, for example. In this case, details of the image can be confirmed in the relatively high discrimination mode. For this reason, even if the update interval of the specific image data is increased in the low discrimination mode, the unnaturalness of the image change is not noticeable. On the other hand, if the update interval is increased in the high discrimination mode, the unnaturalness of the image change is noticeable. , There is a risk of discomfort to the player.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the ratio of the display period of the high discrimination mode to the number of frames of the specific image data used in the high discrimination mode is set to the number of frames of the specific image data used in the low discrimination mode. It is set to be smaller than the ratio of the display periods of the low identification mode. Thereby, the average update interval in the high discrimination mode is smaller than that in the low discrimination mode. Therefore, the display mode in the situation that is the high discrimination mode is displayed smoothly as a whole as compared with the situation that is the low discrimination mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the specific image data while avoiding the above inconvenience.

  The invention of the above-described feature L group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program relating to the game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  Among the above gaming machines, those equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device, are known. Such a gaming machine is equipped with an image data memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, when a series of display effects are to be displayed over a display period for a plurality of update timings (a plurality of frames) on the display screen, image data corresponding to each update timing is prepared and determined in advance. It is conceivable to execute a process of reading sequentially. In this case, since it is necessary to prepare image data for each update timing, the data amount of the image data related to the display effect is extremely increased, and the storage capacity of the image data memory may be extremely increased.

  Further, with respect to any one of the features L1 to L12, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the features F1 to F15, the features G1 to G9, the features H1 to H11, the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J13, and the features limited to any one of the features K1 to K9. May be. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means Then, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and the gaming machine gives a privilege to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display apparatus, 48 ... Production operation device as operation reception means, 50 ... Main control apparatus as upstream control means, 53 ... ROM, 70 ... Display control apparatus, 72 ... Display CPU 73 ... work RAM, 74 ... memory module, 76 ... VDP, 81c ... composite data area as grouping storage area, 82a, 82b ... frame area as setting storage means, 93 ... moving picture decoder as expansion means , 94 ... Display circuit, 97 ... Scaler as data adjustment means, 101 ... Controller, 102 ... NAND flash memory, 111 ... I / F, 113 ... Controller CPU as management means, 114 ... Control as management information storage means ROM, 117... Cache memory as storage means, 119... Boot memory, 13 ... Display CPU, 132 ... Work RAM, 133 ... Memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142a, 142b ... Frame area as setting storage means, 143 ... Z buffer as comparison storage means, 145 ... As storage area for grouping Mode buffer, 155 ... display circuit, 161 ... controller, 162 ... NAND flash memory, 171 ... I / F, 173 ... controller CPU as management means, 174 ... control ROM as management information storage means, 177 ... Cache memory as storage means, 179 ... boot memory, CH5 ... smooth movement sprite, G ... display screen, PA1 ... overlapping area, PC35, PC36 ... connected object, PD2-PD10 ... divided part data, PD12-PD15 ... divided data group, PD19 ... Partial addition data as bright value adjustment data, PD22 to PD25... Partial data, PD26, PD27... Sprite data, PD30 to PD33... Partial data, PD37, PD38. ... sprite data, PD54 to PD56 ... moving image data, CP1 ... first character image, CP2 ... second character image, SPD1 ... initial symbol sprite data, SPD2 ... enlarged symbol sprite data, IMD1 ... open image data, IMD2 ... in operation Image data, IMD3 ... closed image data, IMD4 to IMD6 ... fluctuation image data.

Claims (1)

Display means having a display screen;
Display storage means for storing image data in advance;
Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data , and updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing;
In gaming machines equipped with
Includes a display effect to be performed over the presentation period of the update timing content of the multiple as the display mode,
In the display effect, the first specific image is displayed at the first update timing in the effect period, and the second specification is performed at the second update timing after a specific period of a plurality of update timings has elapsed from that timing. It includes a display mode that displays images,
The storage means for display includes, as specific image data used for displaying an image corresponding to the display effect, first specific image data corresponding to the first specific image and second corresponding to the second specific image. Including specific image data, specific image data for a plurality of update timings corresponding to the display effects is stored,
The display control means is for displaying an image on the display screen based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and setting the image data in the setting storage means The image data is set in a state in which parameter information including reflection value information that determines the degree to which the color information of the image data is reflected on the display screen is applied;
When the display control unit displays an image corresponding to the display effect, both the first specific image data and the second specific image data in the specific period are set as setting targets in the setting storage unit. By adjusting the reflection value information of each specific image data in a stepwise manner, the first specific image can be displayed from a state in which an intermediate image relatively reflecting the color of the first specific image is displayed rather than the second specific image. Transition to a state in which an intermediate image reflecting the color of the second specific image is displayed rather than an image, and at the time of the transition, specific image data for the plurality of update timings is predetermined in the setting storage unit. Are set in order,
The update interval of the specific image data from the time when the specific image data for one update timing is set to the time when the specific image data for the next update timing is set is set to be different according to the contents of the display effect. A gaming machine characterized by being made .